Home

1 Preface Thanks very much for purchasing the SK

1. Figure 4 114 Static picture dialog 2 After a picture is chosen click OK and then the mouse shape will become a cross Click on any point in the screen and then you can add the chosen picture into the screen 212 3 The size of the picture inserted can be adjusted Choose the picture move the mouse to a small green dot press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to adjust the picture to a suitable size Sk Workshop supports a wide range of picture formats including JPG BMP JIF WMF EMF and GIF 4 5 17 Picture display of Sk Workshop Picture Display is an extension of Static Picture control as Static Picture can only display one picture but Picture Display can display up to 32 pictures Picture Display can have different definitions basing on different state types chosen by user The operation steps are as follows Click Picture Display icon k in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 115 will appear Picture Dispaly State Type Ey Bit Value e Auto Change Data Type 16 Bit Unsigned Monitor Addre Total States 3 o a W Figure 4 115 Picture display dialog gt Bit When this option is checked there are totally two states that are 0 and 1 and the monitor
2. SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Keyence KV VisualKV series PLC terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting v Select Keyence Corporation in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Keyence KV VisualKV series PLC for device setting 389 Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC KV 1000 700 KV L20 R KV 1000 700 KV L20 R KV 10 16 24 40 KV P16 RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 EVEN EVEN ODD NONE Support functions Yes No Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Yes Extension mode 3 Operable register and address range No KV 1000 700 KV L20 R OOO R O dddDD 0 59915 Bit input output relay a dddDD 0 99915 Sie Ansa aureliiay acl dddDD 0 99915 Bit lock up relay ddDD 0 3915 Bit control relay dddd 0 3999 Bit timer dddd 0 3999 Bit counter DM ddddd 0 65534 Word data storage a ae ddddd 0 65534 Word expanding data storage a ae ddddd 0 32766 Word file register ddd 0 511 Word temporary data storage ddddd 0 11998 Word control storage dddd 0 3999 Word current value of timer dddd 0 3999 Word current value of counter KV
3. Figure 3 14 USB driver prompt If a dialog as shown in Figure 3 14 appears it indicates that the PC cannot identify the touch screen In this case you can check whether the USB driver has been installed Connect the PC with the touch screen power on the touch screen and search for a USB driver named Samkoon HMI Tech Corp in My Computer Properties Hardware Device Manager General Serial Bus Controller of Windows See Figure 3 15 You may also try removing and plugging USB cable repeatedly to check whether the PC can identify the HMI 88 EHD REQ FEY HBO e BSG 2m AIRM AO co i LPT o gt SEE a it Soe BESS AERE GY USS RIS VGA FEF Sy Ses a ROR CHheS oe RST Sees Intel R S2601ER WEB Universal Host Controller 27402 Intel R B2601ER USE Universal Host Controller 7414 Intel R G2G01ER WE Universal Host Controller 2407 Intel R SZ001EB WE Universal Host Controller 40E Intel M 2Z001ER WEE Enhanced Host Controller 240D Samkoon HMI Tach Corp WE Root Hub WSE Root Hub USE Root Hub WSE Root Hub WSP Root Hab Figure 3 15 Searching for USB driver of the touch screen 3 4 Upload configuration program SK Workshop4 0 allows uploading of configuration from HMI to hard disk To do this connect HMI with PC choose Upload potion in Download menu and then an uploading dialog will appear Upload SamDraw file Upload por File path File name
4. Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 8 Dynamic alarm bar of SK Workshop Dynamic Alarm Bar is used to display the current alarm The difference between Dynamic Alarm Bar and Alarm Control is that the former displays the current alarm information in the form of rolling texts digital alarm and analog alarm If there are 3 alarm at present Dynamic Alarm Bar will display the first the second and the third alarm in turn and repeatedly in rolling form either from left to right or from right to left The movement speed movement interval and alarm voice are determined by the related parameters Refer to Alarm Bar Setting Before using a dynamic alarm bar you must configure the alarm settings first Refer to Alarm Setting gt The steps to insert a dynamic alarm bar are as follows Click Dynamic Alarm Bar command in Tool menu or click button E in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 65 will appear 142 l Alarma Bar Border Colo Sample Message BG Color Pattern Solid v Uption ta show alarm cont Font Size a ay Select all alarm com Text Color Ls Attribute A os Speed ao Direction Left Right Alarm sort O Time C By Time Reversal eee C Figure 4 65 Dynamic alarm bar dialog gt Choose all alarming information If this option is chosen this alarm display control will display all conforming alarming information in Dig
5. Start uploading Upload file File path Click Browse to choose the directory for file saving Project name Enter the name of the project to be uploaded Upload Click this button to start uploading After successful uploading you may choose whether to open the project uploaded 89 File path ees and Setti gt File name FEE LLLE AAA Upload file 3 5 SKWorkshop converter If any pictures shapes or library graph is contained in the original V3 3 configuration project after conversion these will be invalid in the new V4 0 0 configuration SKWorkshop4 0 0 has a remarkable functional improvement compared with SamDraw3 3 and project files generated by SamDraw3 3 cannot be directly opened using SK Workshop Thus conversion is required SK Workshop provides a tool to convert V3 3 project files to V4 0 0 ones that is the Converter Start up SK Workshop click to start up the Converter or start up it from Start Programs SK Workshop Convert 3 3 projects SamkoonConverter Function Select Upload historical data Upload recipe E Upload SamDray file Upload history alarm 90 3 5 1 Choose Convert SamDraw3 3 to SK Workshop To convert V3 3configuration files to V4 0 0 ones Convert SasDraw3 3 project to SEWorkshop Open Samiravs 3 project file Open file ckr orkshop 4 0 0 new project file File Hame Fath Choose C
6. 4 5 2 Word button of Sk Workshop Word Button can be used to enter fixed value numeric value and password into the data register and execute adding subtracting operations for the values in the register The steps to set a Word Button are as follows 171 gt Choose Word Button icon hid in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 81 will pop up Word Button M Eg Frere eeeeeetaveeeeeverersee rer sa Label Advanced Visibility Border Color BG Color Fattern Function O Add ie Subtract Progressiv Decrease O Set Const Enter Valud Enter Password Data Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int ee TEL oe Minimum Total Digil4 Macro Use Macro Figure 4 81 Word Button dialog Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern gt Function module Set Constant Different types of data can be chosen SKWorkshop provides several data types including 16 32 digit positive integer 16 32 digit integer 16 32 digit BCD positive integer and 32 digit floating point number This option is to write the constant set by you to the write address For example if the write address is LW1 and the constant is 10 then each time the button is touched the value of LW1 will be set to constant 10 regardless of its original value Enter value Different data types can be chosen This option is to write a value that is the numeric val
7. Change Delete button Then the system will automatically delete Sk WorkshopV4 0 0 and related components as introduced in Step 2 and Step 3 of the first method 2 5 Operation of Sk Workshop After installation of Sk Workshop a shortcut will appear on the desktop as shown in Figure 2 17 Figure 2 17 Shortcut on the desktop Meanwhile SK Workshop program group is added in Start menu of Windows as shown in Figure 2 18 fs SKWorkshop if Uninstall SEWorkshop MAEF E m SE orkshop Figure 2 18 Program icon in Start menu Double click the shortcut on the desktop or click SKWorkshop exe in the SKWorkshop program group in the Start menu to run the software See Figure 2 19 for the software running page 47 SEWorkshop C Documents and Settings Administrator IEST she Screenl View Draw H Object Sereen F Setting DownLoad iD Ee EA LFI E Langue ge SS Link BB Link 1 E A Setting on HMI Parameter Se EES HMI Status FLC Control ro File Frotection 7 HMI Frotection Variable table I Sereen gt 000 Sereent e E Window g Historical Data Loge oo Alarm Log E Recipe i ed Data Transport Coordinate Left o Top Size Width Height Samkoon Figure 2 19 Software running page 2 6 Installation of USB driver of SK Workshop Before downloading configuration files to the touch screen you must install USB driver of the touch screen or th
8. H Communication Port Properties General Parameter Communication Parameters Baud rate Other HMI Address 9800 PLU Address p Communication ims ms Overtime time 5 ims Data bits Check Overtime time stop Bits aus I 1 re default Se Retry Times 3 v Address Model Standard M FLC Continuous addi 32 v Spare paramai Figure 7 2 Parameter setting of COM1 communication screen Spare set parameters Spare paramd0 Spare paramd0 Parameter setting Device service manufacturer brand and CPU model of PLC Model model of PLC Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 187 5k Parity check odd check even check no check Data bit 7 8 Stop bit 1 2 Communication mode RS232 485 422 7 2 Setting of SK Workshop Let s come to some settings of HMI It is also important for project configuration We can change HMI system settings in a narrative way to achieve the expected effect of users 7 2 1 Language of Sk Workshop Language this option possesses the multilingual function Double click the option and pop up the following dialog box 298 Le ry Language p Language tot Language Language Name fp a ee ae Ss gt Language sum five languages are available for setting gt Language name the users can set a simple and concise language name as
9. Installation opening size Figure 1 4 Installing dimensions of SK 5 0A installing dimension of SK 5 7 Figure 1 5 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 057AS SK 057AE SK 057CS SK 057CE The outline dimension is 176x140x40 and the installing opening dimension is 164x134 12 Samkoon oad od DooOnnoO w Fl Front The back 40 i64 om wa 79 w Fel Installati ing si Side stallation opening size Figure 1 5 Installing dimensions of SK 057AS SK 057AE SK 057CS SK 057CE Figure 1 6 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 5 7D SK 5 7E SK 5 7F The outline dimension 1s 202x144x40 and the installing opening dimension is 192x138 202 mm Samkoon D HOOO0 O00 0008 DOOGHOO00 0000 DOOD RORROOND DOR OOD ORO OOND wa phl oo Cee _ a a gt o a E nr O i E io The back 192 w TAT m gel Side Installation opening size Figure 1 6 Installing dimensions of SK 057DS SK 057DE SK 057FS SK 057FE 13 installing dimension of SK 7 0A Figure 1 7 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 070AS SK O70AE The outline dimension is 228 154x41 and the installing opening dimension is 211145 228 mm men qoangoggoogo90 oooonni f i Doonooooggoggi ooo f PWR oh 1 SS S35 o Se 22 gai 3 E SS S5 Ss COM Front The back 211 ma w 802 wi CFI Installation opening size
10. Side Figure 1 7 Installing dimensions of SK 070AS SK 070AE Installing dimension of SK 7 2A Figure 1 8 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 072AS SK 072AE The outline dimension is 203 x 16540 and the installing opening dimension is 186x156 14 D nousagenqggad P a ponoaaonoopal E z e SS E A es E E Front The back 136 mm E n g F E El Installation opening size Figure 1 8 Installing dimensions of SK 072AS SK 072AE installing dimension of SK 8 0A Figure 1 9 shows the product dimensions mm of SK O80AS SK 080AE The outline dimension is 239x 192x49 and the installing opening dimension is 235x188 15 239 mm Samkoon EE g com cowi use S The back 235 m D I A g aa E Installation opening size Figure 1 9 Installing dimensions of SK 080AS SK 080AE installing dimension of SK 10 2A Figure 1 10 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 102AS SK 102AE The outline dimension is 26620840 and the installing opening dimension is 261x203 Samkoon me HOG E E E COMZ COME USE H l O f Front wa 656 u pig Installation opening size Figure 1 10 Installing dimensions of SK 102AS SK 102AE installing dimension of SK 10 4A Figure 1 11 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 104AS SK 104AE The outline dimension is 312 225x54 and the installing opening dimension is 386x214 iri 312 mm F a LALALALA LOLLL pT PP aAa ABI A
11. User 3 Star Username E Passwor 3333 mi He M 00s 0 070s User 4 Star User 5 Star A l Ir epre Username user Passwor BEGG vw i wle wla wla ls vle 7 Ele Default user 1 Allows uploading configuration a Upload when password Wg ew ew D552 ee eee sees ese Ses Supreme authority password Figure 4 79 User password setting in the touch screen parameter setting Then if Default User Level is NULL this control is not touchable and in this case you can use Change User Level in Function buttons to change the default level For example if the password entered by the user is 6666 corresponding to User Level 6 but the user chooses only option 1 not matching option 2 or 3 so the system will prompt that the password is incorrect When the password entered by the user is 2222 or 3333 as both users have option 2 matching option 2 or 3 the password is valid and this control will be changed to a touchable control If the Default User Level is user 2 to 3 then both user levels have option 2 to match the touching conditions and then this control is touchable in simulation or initialized screen If the Default User Level is user 3 then this user level does not
12. in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 413 10 26 Vigor device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Vigor V VH VB M series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Vigor V VH VB M series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Vigor V VH VB M series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Vigor V VH VB M series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Vigor V VH VB M series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Vigor V VH VB Mv COM1 COM2 series SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Vigor V VH VB M series PLC terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting Y Select Vigor Electric Corp in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Vigor V VH VB M series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Sett
13. 0S 4 MIN U N Whether to display pen 8 MAX Go 6 7 U OO 39 MIN l Ending time minute used to define the ending time basing 41 onthe current time 8 a 43 Time range minute al oo 45 MAX MAX atthe time of single Y axis display wl oo 47 MIN MIN at the time of single Y axis display sl 49 Whether to use multiple Y axis 09 Ww TU W N Recover original state Recover when the value is 1 and automatically reset after recovering N 133 gt Detection Enable enable the detection line reference line or not Color the color of detection line reference line Detection address writing the corresponding value of current detection line reference line into the detection address register 2 Page of Pen in historical tendency chart as shown in Figure 4 59 Historical trend Curve 1 Curve 2 Curve 3 Data Source Data Source Data Source Figure 4 59 Pen tab of historical trend chart In this tab user can set the maximum minimum value of each pen line pattern and line color The data source is the data in the Data tab of Historical Data Collection in the Project Manager Different data sources can be chosen for the pens 3 XY Axis tab of Historical trend chart as shown in Figure 4 60 134 fi Historical trend ee General Pen XY Axis Visibility X Axis Show Ticks Show Y Axis Gr Show Whale Gr Aeis
14. 60008 time minute System has operated for _ minutes System operation 60009 time second System has operated for _ seconds Number of current 60010 picture window Current screen number 60012 Current language Corresponding language number R Allowable upper limit of numerical The allowable upper input limit when the keyboard is disconnected 60013 input ASC display Allowable lower limit of numerical The allowable lower input limit when the keyboard is disconnected 60023 input ASC display Input data displayed 60033 in keyboard Characters input from keyboard ASC display Users login the 60065 current system Current user number Login user password 60066 in current system Display the password of current user 16 characters Login user name in 60074 current system Display the name of current user 32 characters User 1 60090 enabled disabled 0 deactivate 1 activate User 60091 2enabled disabled 0 deactivate 1 activate User 3 60092 enabled disabled 0 deactivate 1 activate User 4 60093 enabled disabled 0 deactivate 1 activate User 5 60094 enabled disabled 0 deactivate 1 activate 346 User 7 R enabled disabled 0 deactivate 1 activate User 8 60096 R 60097 enabled disabled 0 deactivate 1 activate 60098 Name of user 1 60114 Name of user 2 60130 Name of user 3 60146 Name of user 4 p
15. CLEAR ASCII Figure 4 128 General tab of keyboard element gt State You can set the border color foreground color background color and pattern for the control under different states by clicking Before Pressing and After Pressing buttons gt ENTER Function button used to confirm the input gt BACKSPACE Function button used to delete a character before the cursor gt CLEAR Function button used to clear all contents entered gt ESC Function button used to cancel the pop up keyboard without entering any content gt ASCH Values entered with the keyboard element gt Refer to Visibility tab of Word Button for the Visibility tab 2 How to add a user defined keyboard You can start up the keyboard adding guide by clicking Add User defined Keyboard in Setting menu Following this guide you can quickly add a user defined keyboard that has been set in the program as shown in Figure 4 129 231 Customize Your Eeyboard Welcome to use the keyboard Funct Figure 4 129 Page 1 of user defined keyboard guide After clicking Next a dialog will pop up for you to select keyboard type as shown in Figure 4 130 232 Customize Your Eeyboard Please choose to establish keyboard type C ASCII Keyboard input type Results are shown below Mis MIN oe BACK SPACE Figure 4 130 Page 2 of user defined keyboard guide After choosing a keyboard type click Next and then the system will
16. Figure 4 39 Table dialog gt In the Table dialog as shown in the figure above Sk Workshop provides options such as background color display of border cell options and grid options In Cell options number of cells and be adjusted either by clicking the fine tuning button or directly typing in a number In Grid options you can choose whether to display the vertical horizontal lines and change the grid pattern and color gt After modifying the table properties click OK button to close the dialog Then in the picture editing window the mouse will become R Move the mouse to a position where the table will be displayed left click the mouse and drag it to another appropriate position before left clicking again The system will automatically draw a table See Figure 4 40 114 Figure 4 40 An example of a table drawn Such table is a pure graph object and cannot be filled with words data or other embedded objects It can be only used as bottom graph To display words data or other objects over the table you can add text graph and numeric display objects over the table and set top layer for these objects 4 3 12 Scale graph of SK Workshop Choose Scale command in Draw menu or click Scale command button E in the tool buttons and then a Scale dialog will pop up See Figure 4 41 115 aa Scale eee General Color Line Color Scale Orientation C Left Right Up 6 Down Text Orien Up ALS
17. Language Language v Font Size 10 Background mans Den ee Border col Font Size 10 pipet calors La Font Rows Backeround Text Color ees 1 Time Time l gt s l lae ree e e e t User User aser OoOo Figure 4 132 Operation record parameter setting dialog e Background color Set background color of the control e Border color Set border color of the control e Language Set the contents of the title bar if multiple languages are chosen e Font size Font size of the title bar e Background color Background color of the title bar e Word color Word color of the title bar e Time Text displayed in the time column of the title bar e User Text displayed in the user column of the title bar e Operation contents Text displayed in the operation content column of the title bar e Font size Font size of the record text Text color Color of the record text 238 e Line number Maximum number of lines to be displayed by the control Note LW60601 must be set to 1 to enable record operation of HMI 4 7 Control operation introduction of SK Workshop SKWorkshop V4 0 configuration software provides powerful basic controls When creating a configuration project the new control will be displayed in the user area and you can change the properties of the control by double clicking and right clicking Position and size of control can be entered manually in the status b
18. Properties Used to open property window of object if an object is chosen or screen if no object is chosen Insert Used to open all object windows in the Object menu Library Used to open and generate picture library Cut Used to delete the object chosen and copy it to the paste buffer area The shortcut key is Ctrl X Copy Used to copy the object chosen to the paste buffer area The shortcut key is Ctrl C Duplicate Used to copy several graphs chosen in horizontal and vertical directions increasing the address by 0 255 units The shortcut key is Ctrl D Paste Used to copy the object in the paste buffer area to the current screen The shortcut key is Ctrl V Delete Used to delete a chosen object The shortcut key is Ctrl Del Select All Used to select all the objects in the current screen of the current project The shortcut key is Ctrl A Align Used to align two or more objects chosen The align manners include top alignment bottom alignment vertical centering left alignment right alignment horizontal centering the same height the same width and the same height and width 63 Layer Used to place the object chosen to different screen layer The selectable layers include top layer one upper layer bottom layer and one lower layer Rotary Used to rotate the chosen object The rotary manners include free rotation horizontal rotation and vertical rotation Assemble Used to assemble two or more objects cho
19. Select one and double click to enter into macro edition lt 3 gt Unfinished compile window for recording all unfinished compile macro name in project as shown in 5 3 Select one and double click to enter into macro edition 5 3 3 How to new create macro Click new add button and pop up the dialog box of macro compiler as shown in Figure 5 4 Macro Compiler Macro Editor ileal include MacrolInit h void Macro main IN p MarcoInit f Todo specification af variables Variable Hame Datallass Bytes Write Prop tddress Type Address mmection Ty FPLC Station j click the right mouse be a 5 Debug Information Output Figure 5 4 Macro Compiler Button Function Description 265 Compile Compile the current macro source code and check the syntax error Function Insert the selected library function at the cursor location in the edition window of source code Close Close the current dialog box Description pop up the help instruction of macro usage Instructions Instruction 1 convention introduction of program compilation Create the source program of C language conforming to ANSI C standard in the edition window Instruction 2 information output window The window outputs the information of compilation and connection state of program Users may make debugging and modification according to the information prompt Instruction 3 close open window In the variable setting us
20. Setting S gt Macro from the menu as shown in Figure 5 1 macro menu and pop up interface as shown in Figure 5 1 macro editor Setting DownLoadiD He Preference SettinglF Recipe Setting R File Protection M Fi Macro Editor a Global Macro Fal Init Macro Add Customize Keyboard 262 Figure 5 1 Macro Menu Method 2 click shortcut button Macro as shown in Figure 5 2 Macro button and pop up interface as shown in Figure 5 3 Macro Editor Figure 5 2 Macro Button 5 3 2 Function button introduction in macro editor The functional controls are arranged in macro editor window as shown in Figure 5 3 Macro Editor 263 8 Bacro List Compile successfully list A list compiled unfinished _ Figure 5 3 Macro Editor lt 1 gt Button function description 1 New add new create a macro Delete delete the selected macro Edit edit the selected macro same with double click macro Copy select one macro and click copy to copy the selected macro Hew CtrlitN Delete Del Edit Ctrlto Copy CtritE Faste Ctrlty Paste paste the copied contents and the suffix of macro name adds one automatically Description pop up the macro description Close close or exit the current dialog box 264 lt 2 gt Compile success window for recording all macro names with successful compilation in project as shown in 5 3
21. lB Bit Unsigned Int trite Address E Monitor Address Identical to Write Address Monitor Addresd Total States 3 Macro Use Macro Figure 4 92 Multi state switch dialog gt State You can change this state value and modify the border color pattern color background color and pattern of the control under different states gt State type it is assumed that the number entered by the user is n Numerical value The written value is a numerical value from 0 to the total number of states less 1 187 Register bit The written value is the No n power of 2 For example We assume State Type of this control is Numerical Value Keyboard Input is chosen for Manner option the write address is LW3 the option The Same Write Address and Monitor Address is chosen and the total number of states is 8 After setting and clicking OK click on the screen to add the control into the screen add an value entering control in the screen set both the write address and monitored address to LW3 and then save the project Click the number entering control in simulation or screen and enter a desired state value in the pop up keyboard We assume the value entered is 3 then the value written to the register is the third power of 2 the value of the monitored read address is 3 and the control will display the texts under state 3 that is the text contents under State 3 in the Text tab of this control On the contrary if the e
22. new historical data collector notice only one historical data collector can be newly created at most Otherwise the error prompt box will be popped up Double click Historical Data Collector 0 in Project Manager to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 7 17 Historical data collector Genarel Data I t em Memory Sample Full Processing Sample Len 1 Humber of f _ Stop Sampling SEAB ae C Wotiy Memory Requirj22 Remarks Memory Reguired 0 The total bytes of datatype Humber of Samplin A Sampling Method a O Timed Peedi il Second ls L e Trigger O Clocked Figure 7 17 Dialog box of historical data collector e Name user can change the name displayed in project manager as required e Sample length number of data read from memory each time e Number of sampling times of data extraction The method to calculate the required memory required memory 20 total bytes of data types for all data items total samples Wherein 20 refers to the total bytes of time or date Total bytes of data types for all data items refers to the sum of data type of selected address on the data item page The example is shown as Figure 6 14 a Supposing the data type o
23. touch screen Users may use Layer command to superpose touch objects Mirror Used to overturn a chosen object The allowable overturning manners include horizontal overturning and vertical overturning Zoom Used to zoom in or out the current screen in order to conduct finer control operation The available zoom options include 1x zoom in recover and 1x zoom out Pan view Used to move the current screen up and down or horizontally at will 55 Grid Used to set and cancel in the current screen grids whose widths have been selected Grid width Used to change the grid width of the current screen The range of such change is 4 16 Border scale Used to add or cancel scale lines on the left top corner of the picture window The forward screen Used to open the screen numbered before the current screen The backward screen Used to open the screen numbered after the current screen Open screen property Used to open property window of object if an object is chosen or screen if no object is chosen Information output window Used to open and close information output window Project manager Used to open and close the project manager Find address Used to find an address being used Address table Used to open and close an address table being used Address table is a list of addresses of objects for the purpose of convenient searching and replacing e Draw menu This menu is mainly used to draw pictures Sk Workshop provides Li
24. word occupies two addresses SMW ddd 0 4095 Word special bit memory SMW0 SMW29 read only 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses ddddd 0 10239 Word variable storage 8 bit register 408 ddddd 0 10238 Word variable storage 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses ddddd 0 10236 Double word variable storage 8 bit register each double word occupies four addresses ddd 0 255 Word current value of timer Vv ddd 0 255 Word current value of counter AIW dd 0 62 Word analog input read only 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses AQW dd 0 62 Word analog output write only 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses Siemens S7 300 Register Name Address Input Range Remark Format dddd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit input image register dddd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit output image register dddd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit bit memory DB Bit DDD dddd o 0 0 0 255 8192 7 Bit bit of DB block storage word block number DD 0 255 each block word dddd 0 8192 bit of each word o 0 7 dddd 0 4095 Word input image register 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses z dddd 0 4095 Word output image register 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses dddd 0 4095 Word bit memory 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses DDD dddd 0 0 255 8192 Word DB block storage block number DD 0 255 each block word dddd 0 8192 8 bit register each word occup
25. 1 Establish recipe configuration according to above mentioned method as shown in figure 7 32 below 339 Data Item EECIPEL RECIPES RYT vise hs Language RITO languagel RWI Recipe Hame BHT RECIFE RWIS Tata ENIG EnIT Source Recipe EO Rive ATIJ Objective Recip Figure 7 32 Function of recipe data copy This recipe includes 4 sub recipes in all Each recipe has 16 members The store address is memory addresses RWI 1 RWI 16 of HMI 2 After completion of recipe configuration display recipe on screen and carry out alteration or directly download recipe to PLC Therefore the following several important function controls will be used a y Recipe display click value display input A For operations please refer to Value Display Input Select address of internal memory area to be RWI 0 You can create controls of value display and input on screen Value of input and display is just recipe number If value of RWIO is 0 it means that the recipe number is 1 if value is 1 the recipe number is 2 and so forth yV Click function button Ea for operations please refer to Function Button Through related function setting in function button buttons as Write Recipe to PLC Read Recipe from PLC Save Recipe Previous Recipe and Next Recipe can be established on screen 3 The screen shown in figure 7 33 can be finished as per above mentioned operations 340 If all addresses written
26. 314 Bit Addre 1b5 Conditior T O 1 C Automatic Re SCF eer Figure 7 7 The dialog box of new creating a bit control screen switching Enter the bit address select the satisfied condition and screen and click confirm Then one bit control screen will be added in Figure 7 6 Details refer to Figure 7 8 PLC Control PLC Control PLO Control C Change the Recipe rite the Recipe FJ i he Recip The Current user Lev F Switch Sereen Bit Control Screen andit Bit Ae eer Mane Edit E Delete M Figure 7 8 The dialog box of new creating a bit control screen switching 315 In the same way a number of bit control screens can be created The sequence of bit control screen switching is made number Right click the bit control information and pop up the right click menu as create edit and delete for users Details refer to Figure 7 8 When the address LBS is 0 it will jump to screen 1 Click confirm button and PLC control setting is finished 7 2 5 Clock of SK Workshop Clock setting includes three functions download the system clock to HMI write time to PLC and synchronize time with PLC Double click the option Clock in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 9 Clock Clock Download the System Clock to the HMI Length Write Addres trite Method O Timed Interval 60 leee
27. Animation Visibility State Border Colo FG Color Bi Color pattern ssia v Property Total States 1 v Site O depend on registel Aeeording of the clock Tata Type 1 Read Address LED Figure 4 123 General tab of animation gt State number Set number of states of the element 224 gt Position Depending on Register When this option is chosen the state and position of the element will be controlled by the data in register Read address If the state and position of the element are controlled by the data in register you must set the read address for the state and the position correctly The formats of read address are as follows Data Format Status Address of Control Element Position Address of Control Element For example if the register is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit positive integer then LW100 will determine the state of the element and LW101 will determine the display position of the element Taking Figure 4 124 for example LW100 2 and LW101 1 so the state of the element is 2 and the position is 1 Figure 4 124 By clock If you do not choose Depending on Register but By Clock for the element then the element will change its state and display position automatically In this case Auto Control Position is used to set the changing mode of the state and the display position Speed The speed of position changing in 0 1s For example it
28. BG Color Text Colo Write kdd Monitor Monitor Address Identics Monitor Addy Total al Font Size Passt F Use Unicode Display High Byte Sw E Input Discretion Byt Alignment O Left Center C Right Macro Use Macro Figure 4 105 ASC character entry dialog gt Write address The address where the ASCII texts entered by the user will be saved gt Monitor The control reads the value of a specified address and displays it on the control gt Monitoring address is same to write in address read and write is the same address monitoring address is same to write in address gt Monitoring address the address to read gt Total word number Maximum number of characters that can be displayed for the monitored address 201 gt Font size Size of the characters to be displayed gt Swap between higher and lower bytes Change the higher bytes of the monitored address with the lower bytes 66399 gt Password If this option is chosen the control does not display specific characters but instead gt Use UNICODE Display the value of the monitored address with Unicode codes gt Align Align the displayed characters on the
29. EVEN EVEN ODD NONE i 3 Operable register and address range 388 Y lt lt CV32 00 ww st SS o T c ie ata wv o 200 255 Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit le Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 13 Keyence device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Keyence K V VisualK V series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Keyence KV VisualKV series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Keyence KV VisualKV series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Keyence KV VisualK V series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Keyence KV VisualK V series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Keyence KV VisualKV COM1 COM2 series
30. Fattern _ selia Read Address F Data Type 16 Bit Int Monitor Addre E Attribute Total States3 e Fath Horizontal direction along the w i coordinated ei i coordinate S00 Figure 4 66 Graphics move dialog e Picture selection Choose in Picture tab a picture from the library or a user defined picture e Monitor address Monitored address linked with Graphics Move Three addresses are occupied respectively corresponding to change of total states X axis value and Y axis value For example if the monitor address set is LW1 and the data type is 16 digit number then the monitor address for total states is LW1 that for X axis is LW2 and that for Y axis is LW3 that is change in the value of LW1 LW2 and LW3 can respectively control the total states movement along X axis and movement along Y axis If the data type is 32 digit then the monitor addresses for total states X axis and Y axis are respectively LW1 LW3 and LWS e Path If the monitor address is internal storage address LW1 and the data type is 16 digit then Horizontal moving along the X axis The graph moves in horizontal direction only and the movement range should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 146 Vertical moving along the Y axis The graph moves in vertical direction only and the movement range should be between the Y
31. Meaning of option Use if the option Use of some item is selected the alarm information can be displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic alarm bar only when the corresponding address of the item is 1 if the option Use of some item is not selected the alarm information will not be displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic alarm bar even if the corresponding address of the item is 1 if the item address is 0 the alarm information will not display in Alarm Controls or Dynamic alarm bar no matter the option Use is selected or not OFF alarm if the option is selected it will make alarm when the corresponding address is 0 OFF value otherwise it makes alarm when the address is 1 ON value It defaults to make alarm while the address is 1 ON Let s take an example Suppose the continuous digit is selected as type 329 gt Suppose LB1 address value is 0 the alarm information will not display in Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar no matter the option Use is selected or not gt Suppose LB1 address value is 1 and option Use is not selected the alarm information will display in neither Alarm Controls nor Dynamic alarm bar gt Suppose LB1 address value is 1 and option Use is selected the alarm information will display in both Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar e Click OK to finish the setting of digital alarm Users can make six digit butto
32. Reference curves for multiple data can be drawn Time will be used as the horizontal axis and value will be used as the vertical axis to visualize the change trend of the value in a period 8 polygonal lines can be displayed at most line chart gt Steps to insert a Trend Chart and modify its properties are as follows 124 1 Click Trend Chart icon ew in the tool bar and then a Trend Chart property dialog as shown in Figure 4 55 will appear Trend Chart a General i Pen AY Axis Visibility Leoooo Bi Color Data Type Check Start Read Trigger Humber of Curve Bee Humber of Data Points60 E Read Address Each set of data pois Sampling Time Orientation Left to Right Right to Left Show Data Point Marker Show Conmected Line Ei Color If use control address Clear Trigger Figure 4 55 General tab of trend chart BG Color Used to set background color for the trend chart The change in the color can be seen only after clicking OK button Data Type Totally 7 data types are provided Read Trigger The curves will move only when this option is set to 1 Number of Data Number of pens that is number of lines 8 pens at most Auto resetting of read trigger bit If the system detects that the value of the read trigger bit is 1 it will im
33. This option can be chosen only when the Numerical Value option in the three options of State Type is chosen If this option is chosen when you click the control the state number will increase by 1 each time you click until the state number is equal to the total state number Decrease This option can be chosen only when the Numerical Value option in the three options of State Type is chosen If this option is chosen when you click the control the state number will decrease by 1 each time you click until the state number is equal to the total state number gt Datatype Data type of the write address and monitored read address gt Monitored address The same to read address The value of this address is the read state value and the user chosen state will be shown in the control gt Total state number The maximum number of the states that can be set gt User Macro If this option is chosen when you click the control in online simulation or screen the chosen macro will be executed Refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Refer to the introduction of Multi state Lamp control for setting of Text and Picture tabs Refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for setting of Advanced and Visibility tabs k After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become N Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking
34. and has the same priority Relational expression The general form of relational expression is Expression Relational operator Expression For example atb gt c d x gt 3 2 a 1 lt c 1 5 j k 1 are legal relational expression As the expression is relational expression concurrently the nestification may occur such as a gt b gt c a c d etc The value of relational expression is true and false which is expressed with 1 and 0 1 Logical operator and expression In C language the logical operators include AND operator amp amp OR operator and NOT operator AND operator amp amp and OR operator are binary operators with left associativity NOT operator is unary operator with right associativity The priority relation between logical operator and other operators can be expressed as following The following can be derived depending on the priority of operator 254 2 a gt b amp amp c gt d is equivalent to a gt b amp amp c gt d b c d lt a is equivalent to b c d lt a atb gt c amp amp x y lt b is equivalent to atb gt c amp amp x y lt b Evaluation of logical operation The evaluation of logical operation may be true or false expressed with 1 and 0 individually Its evaluation rules are as following 1 When the two values of AND operation amp amp are true the results are true otherwise they are false For example 5 gt 0 amp amp 4 gt 2 As 5 gt 0 is true and 4 gt
35. e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 10 HollySys device driver 384 This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of HollySys LM series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of HollySys LM series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate HollySys LM series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of HollySys LM series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with HollySys LM series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen HollySys LM COM1 COM2 series C Z J Q Z J lt efe F 0000 O 00000 ON oo SK series touch screen uses DBYF connector HollySys LM series PLC terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting Y Select HollySys Group in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of t
36. gt ae EF 20 com Len a raak E Ee ok SH G p SS ery see Sici Sc SES ey Ee Rese aM SoRREA ae a j SSacSeank a ae Ti Reese Sse Figure 2 22 Device manager page of VISTA e Choose View the computer to find the driver software on the installation page See Figure 2 23 AREER gt SwRI RFS Windows S229Ri 581140 Internet LictRricmnherSia iE R gt Sit BS RAR Figure 2 23 Driver updating page of VISTA e Then view Manual installation directory and click next See Figure 2 24 50 EL PR RES CiUsersisamkoon Desk Han Bro EE samkoon gt aR gt i ee gt ites i same ie Sei Figure 2 24 Manual installation selecting page of VISTA Choose Always install this driver software See Figure 2 25 gt FERED FD THRSUERNM Heke Reser gt eS SASF USSSA Riese oS St NNE Figure 2 25 Driver installation After installation connect the touch screen with PC using USB cable We can find a serial driver named Samkoon HMI Tech Corp under General serial bus controller of the device manager See Figure 2 26 G RATS Intel R 3280168 USS Universal Host Controller 278 Intel R 8280166 USB Universal Host Controller 2709 Intel R 3260166 USS Universal Host Controller 2704 intel R 8280168 USS Universal Host Controller 278 Intelik S280LGER USB2 Enhanced Host Controller 270C j n HAE Tech USB Root Hub USB Root H
37. indicates that a curve arc has been preliminarily drawn Move the mouse to the starting point or the ending point a dotted line will appear The ending point of the dotted line is a square dot Move the mouse to this dot and then the mouse will become press down the left key of the mouse move it to an appropriate position and release it to get desired radian In addition you can also move the starting point or the ending point to an appropriate position See Figure 4 27 105 Figure 4 27 Drawing a curve arc gt After completing the above steps the curve arc has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the curve arc and double click or click Properties button Ei the tool bar after choosing the curve arc At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear You may adjust the properties of the curve arc using the pull down and fine tuning button SKWorkshop provides 15 line types 10 line widths and 6 line end arrows for curve arc 4 3 4 Free line of SKWorkshop Choose Free Line command in Draw menu or click Free Line command button 1 in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw free line in the window gt Move the mouse to a position wher
38. register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Emerson EC series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Emerson EC series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Emerson EC series before using the driver How to establish connection with Emerson EC series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Emerson EC COM1 COM2 SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Emerson EC series PLC terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting Y Select Emerson Network Power in the connection device service VY Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol Vv Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Emerson EC series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Default Parameters Setting Range O EOST EC Sees RT 376 RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 lt Data bit length Stop bit length 1 2 HMI station number 0 255 omme Online simulation 3 Operable register and address range Bit output contact Word indexed addressing register Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e Bit in the remark indicates
39. 17 1 4 3 C OMMMIUNTC AMON 1MUCTIACESS aneren a E alaee etait alaaewaielateleiats 17 1 4 4 Operin onindica torio h taane E E O A E O 18 Le i Beret ataiversHly orslgen eats Co Remsen mmmame ere reamenre es ONG terme NE ENN Te NU open tered Oc NU InN HIRI NUT oRSUONC Ora NU TEaMINE ET 18 1 6 Pini eOr The TOVC MAS Cie CM tac 620 5 a aha ce sae a a aes alta eit tae 32 1 6 1 CPU modul eonen a a a a a soae teen ater eae 33 1 6 2 TOUCH Screen display modile 3c ticicw ticles T 33 1 6 3 Communication Modes ete et eter eter ee rset eA SAT TART SAT O 33 1 6 4 Memory Modulo teeny amare oe Pe eee area eee Pra arene et a ne ese ee 33 1 6 5 Powersupply Modul esnea a Mencuerut shales Alamos cisboten dense 33 17 Industrial CMY ITOMIMCIN seca ea a E E EA E Re ee Ree Beets 33 1 8 WIDE meg erate eee ee ER ee nea ea ee A ee ae Ea E eT Pe ee 33 OIC Stati SE WOKS NOD rics caceceter oe a a octet dee nee aan Sei ages dorset ec ache ate 34 2A VITALS SIS Work hop ereraa an ses eeeeeecoee ees eicne ee erate ceteeen 34 22 Requirements of SK Workshop for COMPUtEL cccccccccccccecceeeeseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaaeeeesees 35 221 Software requirements of SK Workshop for Computel ccccccccccceseeessssseeeseeeeeeeeees 35 22 2 Hardware requirements of SK Workshopfor computet ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 35 2 3 Installation of SK Workshop configuration SOftWATLEC cccccccccccceeceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaas 36 2 4 Uninstal
40. 2 is true the corresponding result is true 2 When one of two values involved in OR operation is true the result is true When two values are false the result is false Take an example of 5 gt 0 5 gt 8 As 5 gt 0 is true the corresponding result is true 3 When the NOT operation involved in operation is true the result is false when the involved operation is false the result is true For example the result of 5 gt 0 is false In the logical operation value of C programming it represents true with 1 and represents false with 0 Vice versa when judging a value is true or false 0 represents false and the non zero data represents true For example as 5 and 3 are non zero the value of 5 amp amp 3 is true i e 1 Another example the value of 5 0 is true i e 1 The general form of logical expression is Expression Logical operator Expression Wherein the expression can be logical expression as well which forms nestification Take the a amp amp b amp amp c as an instance The above expression can be written to a amp amp b amp amp c according to the left associativity of logical operator The value of logical expression is the final value of various logical operation which represents true and false with 1 and 0 respectively if statement The branch structure can be constituted with if statement It makes judgment according to the given condition
41. 7 8 9 terminal is used in RS422 communication 8 9 terminal is used in RS485 communication 10 1 AIBUS device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of AIBUS device through AIBUS protocol It establishes serial port communication with the connection port of AIBUS device through the serial port device of SK series touch screen so as to operate AIBUS device Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of AIBUS device before using the driver How to establish connection with AIBUS device 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 AIBUS device SK series touch screen uses 9P trapezoid female connector The pin at AIBUS device terminal is defined as AIBUS device RS422 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 AIBUS device e RG Pewomizaton TK Tee Pineomintion o e o nooman 370 O Je N 0000 oo0oo0o0o O SK series touch screen uses 9P trapezoid female connector The pin at AIBUS device terminal is defined as AIBUS device RS485 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 a O ome Pacman B O ee AIBUS device O Jo N ooo 00000 O SK series touch screen uses 9P trapezoid female connector The pin at AIBUS device terminal is defined as AIBUS device 2 Software setting v Select AIBUS Protocol in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in
42. A Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test for running Ambient Humany ior 10 to 90 RH non condensable running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC 34 Opening dimension 330x246 mm Weight About 1 8 kg Configuration SK Workshop 4 0 0 software 1 6 Principle of the touch screen Samkoon SK series touch screen uses powerful 32 digit RISC microprocessor with low power consumption low temperature rise low failure rate and aging of the machine and high reliability of the system It also includes internal memory external system program memory power circuit module communication module display and touch module and so on Figure 1 17 is a schematic diagram for the structure of the touch screen Terminal Communi cation module tatus isdicator lamp Display and touch cell Figure 1 17 Schematic diagram for the structure of SK series touch screen 1 6 1 CPU module 32 digit RISC microprocessor is used with higher computation rate lower power consumption and stable operation 1 6 2 Touch screen display module SK 4 3A SK 4 0A and SK 3 5A use 4 wire electric resistance type touch screen plate and SK 12 1A SK 10 4A SK 10 2SK SK 8 0A SK 7 2A SK 7 0A SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7D SK 5 7F and SK 5 0A use 5 wire electric 35 resistance type touch screen plate with high touch precision high durability and long service life The display screen brings TFT LCD 260 000 pigment tru
43. Color Pattern Moni tor Addr es Figure 4 84 Bit Lamp dialog gt Data type This drop down box has three options that are bit word bit and double word bit If Bit is chosen the monitored read address will be a bit address If Word Bit is chosen the monitored read address will be a word address If Double Word Bit is chosen the monitored read address will be a double word address gt Bit Number If the data type chosen by the user is Word Bit or Double Word Bit the displayed ON OFF state of the monitored read address will be determined by the value of the Bit Number The bit number of Word Bit is 0 15 and the bit number of Double Word Bit is 0 31 For example If Word Bit is chosen the monitored address is LW1 and the value of LW1 1s 23 as the decimal number 23 corresponds binary number 10111 so if the bit number chosen is 3 the system will check the value of the number 3 counting from right to left from 0 bit and display such value as the state if this value is 0 state O will be displayed if this value is 1 state 1 will be displayed In this example the value is 0 so the bit lamp will display state 0 Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern 2 In the General page of the Bit Lamp choose an address to be monitored by the lamp and set such parameters as the display texts and picture and flicker in Label page 175 The Label tab of Bi
44. Description Convert a binary value to a BCD value Usage result BIN2BCD source Example short source 1234 short result result BIN2BCD source result 0x1234 7 CRC Description Get 16 bit CRC Usage bit CRC CRC source sizeof source Example char source 5 Oxl 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short bit CRC 283 bit CRC CRC source 5 8 DEC2ASCII Description Convert a decimal value to a string Usage result DEC2ASCII source sizeof source Example short source 5678 char result result DEC2 ASCII source 4 result 0 5 result 1 6 result 2 7 result 3 8 9 FLOAT2ASCII Description Convert a floating value to a string Usage result FLOAT2ASCII source Example float source 56 8 char result 4 result FLOAT2ASCII source result O S result 1 6 result 2 jresult 3 8 10 GETBIT Description Get bit value Usage result GETBIT source bit_pos Example short source Ox5 bit pos 0 result result GETBIT source bit_pos result 1 284 11 GETCHARS This function is applied for free port communication only Description Get data from communication port PortID Serial Port ID COM1 0 COM2 1 Success return the count of chars fail return 1 Usage GETCHARS PortID Data Example char Data 20 int Length checksum PortID Result Length 5 PortID 0 Result GETCHARS PortID Data
45. EDN Automation Corp Keyence Corp Koyo Electronics Estar Technology Letrun Technology L Industrial Systems fee Server MITSUBISHI EEN Next Cancel Modbus gt Figure 6 4 Dialog box for communication connection setting of new item In this example Mitsubishi PLC is taken as device Users can select PLC of other models in option Device Service as required and select different model of the PLC behind the option After completion of setting click Next to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 6 5 293 g a Hew Screen Sereen Ham Backer ound Default BG Color Fis Color Pattern saia v Figure 6 5 Dialog box of adding new screen for new project In this dialog box users can change name of screen in column Screen Name and background color of screen in column Background Color After completion of setting click Finish to finish creation of project as shown in figure 6 6 294 ja SEWorkshop C Documents and Settings Administrator IEST she Screenl File Edit E View Drar H Object Sereen F Setting DownLoad D Help H Language Selection Setting A HMI Farameter Sec Ry HMI Status PLO Control EU Clock at File Protection i Variable table E Sereen D00 Sereenl Window Historical Data Log oo DP Alarm Log a Data Transport Coordinate Left Top Size Width Heient SamKoon Figure 6 6 Project screen
46. Frequency Hote 1f the execution times for Om Cea Tt Figure 5 17 Timer Property Setting lt 5 gt Select label gt text in the function button and input character in the text box as Figure 5 18 278 Function Button Font Size Color Fosition Bold Italic UnderLine Plink O Word Inte O Figure 5 18 Function Button Property Setting Step 7 lt Compile general project and download to touch screen gt Complete the above setting and save the project for next compilation Then download the project to touch screen through USB lt 1 gt Click V in the red circle as Figure 5 19 and execute the project compilation 279 Figure 5 19 General Project Compile lt 2 gt Select download D gt USB D from menu and select download in the dialog box Complete download and restart the touch screen or click the function button of compile download shortcut in black circle to complete operation by one step Step 8 lt Result Test gt After the touch screen is restarted it will display as following Figure 5 20 This is because the macro Init is executed at startup This directive is the result that the timer triggers to execute macro Init 280 Figure 5 20 Display Initial Numerals Enter data as 31 42 53 64 into the numeral entry display respectively click to execute ADDSUM Then i
47. Guide on configuration with SK Workshop This chapter introduces in detail the configuration methods using SK Workshop software 4 1 Screen operation with SK Workshop 4 1 1 New screen with SK Workshop New Screen command is used to create a new screen in the current project The steps to create a new screen are so simple that even beginners can complete easily These steps are as follows 1 Choose New Screen command in the Screen menu or click in the tool bar or right click the Screen in the Project Manager and then click Add Screen in the right click menu See Figure 4 1 92 Ff HML Frotection Variable table m Add Screen tindow J a r I m T Y Figure 4 1 Screen option 2 In the New Screen pop up dialog set the name and background color of the screen to be created and then click OK The default name of a new screen is the serial number of the screen and the default background color is blue See Figure 4 2 Add Screen esis aaa Screen Hame sardon Backeround Acquiews Color Fiz Color poe Fattern Picture Figure 4 2 New screen dialog gt Background color foreground color and pattern can be set for the new screen gt Picture Picture can be used as the background of the new screen Screen name cannot be led by space and numbers and cannot contain other special symbols 4 1 2 Modify
48. HMI and enter level 3 protect password 3333 When password of 3 levels has been unlocked HMI protection is invalid and HMI can be used normally Examples are taken above to describe the operation of HMI protect function Operation for setting of different password levels is similar Users can refer to above descriptions 7 2 8 Variable table control of Sk Workshop Variable setting the definition tag corresponds to one address When the tag is used it means the corresponding address of tag is used To configure the variable setting double click the variable table in the project manager and pop up the dialog box as Figure 7 13 319 a Variable table setting Variable Name onmection devic Address Figure 7 13 Dialog box of variable table setting gt Add add a new variable tag gt Delete delete the selected variable tag gt Modify modify the variable tag or double click the selected variable tag gt Delete all delete all variable tags a Variable set Variable Variatie na Address Type Bit Address ie Figure 7 14 The dialog box of new creating a bit control screen switching gt Variable name set the name of new variable gt Address type select the data type of address gt Address select the connection address 7 3 Screen of Sk Workshop 320 Screen operation means to operate page Create a new screen operation as shown in figure 7 15 Window x Stan
49. Low Color Text Color ae Text Color Low Color Low Color Figure 4 98 Range display checked The text and background color of the Numeric Display will change with the change of the value of the monitored address as shown in Figure 4 99 Figure 4 99 An example of numeric display Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Visibility tab When 32 digit data type is chosen for Numeric Display the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to avoid mis operation over data and address After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen 194 4 5 9 Numeric entry of Sk Workshop Numeric Entry control is the most frequently used control as data analog quantity need to be operated in almost all process controls With Numeric Entry you can enter and display the data saved in the data register of PLC or other connected devices such as speed current pressure and the like Numeric Entry has functions basically the same as Numeric Display expect that with Numeric Entry you can enter da
50. PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of TaiLing DX series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Default Parameters Setting Range PLC DX Series DX Series Communication port RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 411 Data bit length Stop bit length 1 2 HMI station number 0 255 Support functions Offline simulation Online simulation 3 Operable register and address range 0 7999 Word register Word current value of timer OAR 200 255 Double word current value of 32 bit counter Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 25 Techwayson device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Techwayson V80 series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port o
51. Recipe ae Data Transport Figure 2 41 Project manager window 2 7 2 System composition of SK Workshop SK Workshop is the configuration editing software of Samkoon touch screen SK Workshop allows designers to edit project configuration on PC and then download the final configuration screen and required communication drivers to the storing mechanism of the touch screen via USB Then communication with PLC or other connected devices can be constructed through the executive body of the touch screen and serial communication Figure 2 42 shows the system composition of SK Workshop T2 y SKWorkshop Touch screen PLC ey io Picture editor K E i E IN qu 4 a 3 3 E m H a a L B z Ph oroe F A K AL mM AJ Animation show a Ah Ack Ag i to af a a T 3 5 a H ia a wi Phi W ie z G k hy ages Jugs ih il F Communication drive th ip if 1 J p Figure 2 42 System composition of SKWorkshop 2 8 Basic operations of SK Workshop This chapter introduces operation of SK Workshop configuration software including use of mouse shortcut keys and some terms 2 8 1 Use of mouse and shortcut key of SK Workshop When preparing configuration screens using mouse the mouse is as shown in Figure 2 43 Now we introduce common mouse operations and the functions of right button left button such operations in the software L
52. State Border Color 0 Bi Color solia Pattern Tata Type Total States ae r Figure 4 71 General tab of message display The text tab of Message Display is shown in Figure 4 72 132 ry Bessage Display General Text i Visibility C All language use the first langu A11 the property will the 5s Text Attribute Language Font Font Sire Color Figure 4 72 Text tab of message display gt Refer to the Multi state Lamp for setting of language font font size and color gt Movement There are three choices in this option those are no movement left movement and right movement No movement The text will be displayed still in the center of the screen Left movement The text will be moved left by n pixels at the Speed value for example n set by the user Right movement The text will be moved right by n pixels at the Speed value for example n set by the user K Refer to Multi state Lamp control for parameter setting of Message Display 4 4 14 Flow block of SK Workshop Flow Block is used to simulate in animated pictures the fluid flow status in pipeline Whether a flow block is flowing is determined by the state of the trigger bit when the trigger bit is 1 the flow block is flowing when the trigger bit is 0 the flow block is static The flowing speed is specified by user Click button fF in the toolbar
53. Technology Co Ltd listed in the manual PLC supported by SK series touch screens Manufacturers Brand Model Communication Protocol Connection Mode Direct connection Advantech Distributed I O ADAM 4017 ADAM 4060 Advantech special protocol serial port Direct connection AIBUS device manufacture AI series AIBUS protocol serial port Direct connection Allen Bradley Rockwell MicroLogix series DF 1 protocol serial port Direct connection Altec Electronics AL series Altec special protocol serial port Direct connection Delta Corporation DVP series Delta special protocol serial port Direct connection Emerson Network Power EC series Emerson special protocol serial port Fatek Automation Direct connection Corporation FB series Fatek special protocol serial port Direct connection Fuji Electric Corporation NB series Fuji special protocol serial port Direct connection GE Corporation GE SNP X CCM device GE special protocol serial port Haiwell Technology Direct connection Corporation _ E S H series Haiwell special protocol serial port Direct connection Hitachi Industrial E EH series Hitachi special protocol serial port Direct connection HollySys Group LM series hollySys special protocol serial port Direct connection IDEC Corporation FC4A FCSA series IDEC special protocol serial port Inovance Technology Direct connection Corporation H1u H2u series Inovance special protocol serial port Direct connection JiaCh
54. Triggering LB60128 to be ON HMI will copy all historical alarm files to U disk When the export completes these trigger positions will reset to OFF automatically Please use LW register LW60359 LW60429 while exporting partial data How to obtain the screen shot with U disk or SD card 1 Insert U disk or SD card 2 Please select function button gt screen shot and export to U disk or SD card in configuration 3 While triggering the function button HMI will save the current screen shot into corresponding storage Note Do not disconnect U disk or SD card during exporting e Keep HMI powered during exporting e Make sure your U disk or SD card has sufficient memory space 11 2 How to update a project with U disk or SD card SK series touch screen supports to import your project into HMI with U disk or SD card for updating HMI operational configuration 419 How to update project files with U disk or SD card 1 Compile project Run SK Workshop and open the project to be updated Click and generate the compiled file 2 Copy the compiled file into U disk or SD card Open SK Workshop root directory compile copy project bin into U disk or SD card 3 Rename project bin Rename project bin copied into U disk or SD card as u disk prj bin 4 Insert U disk or SD card to HMI 5 Copy files and re update the project After the U disk or SD card is inserted HMI will pop up hint as following Click YES in the window and enter in
55. Word current value of timer CV dddd 0 199 Word current value of counter CV32 dddd 200 255 Double word current value of 32 bit counter Melsec Q00J QC24N ddddd 0 11135 Word data register hhh O 7ff Word conversion register Z gt z 0 3ff Word special link register E EN hhh 0 7ff Bit input relay read only hhh 0 7ff Bit output relay MM dddd 0 8191 Bit internal relay dddd 0 2047 Bit lock up relay dddd 0 2047 Bit alarm dddd 0 2047 Bit indexing relay _ so dddd 0 2047 Bit step relay ow hhh O 7ff Bit conversion relay swo hhh 0 3ff Bit special link relay ddd 0 511 Bit timer status ddd 0 511 Bit counter status O D sw Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e h indicates hexadecimal and the input range is 0 9 a f e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only 398 e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 18 Modbus device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read a
56. a list of the addresses used by the current project Double click an address a property setting dialog for the controls using this address will pop up so that you can set the properties quickly and conveniently Display Address Use screen Name Control name Mises E Yord Button rite Address Screenl Flow block trigger address Screenl Flow block touch addresses Sereent Flow dynamic piece flow Screenl HumEntry trite Address Sereent MmEntry Monitor Address FrojManager Holtransmission source address FrojManager Nol transmission target address F 2 3 4 5 6 T E E FrojManager Hoz transmission source address 10 FrojManager Hoz transmission target address Visible Type display all screens display assigr In Display Type you can choose to display information of addresses used by a chosen screen or by all screens Control overlying With control overlying you can execute multiple controls by touching the screen once SKWorkshop V4 0 allows for overlying of 32 controls at most When multiple controls are overlain and then touched they will be executed in turn basing on the overlying layer sequence For example if control 1 2 and 3 are overlain the commands of button 1 2 and 3 will be executed in turn after touching Layer 1 Step 1 Executing commands of control 1 Layer 2 Step 2 Executing commands of control 2 Layer 3 Step 3 Executing commands of control 3 240 If there is a screen swit
57. after completed creation of new project Add controls into project NI Click icon Value Input Display in toolbar Set appearance background color foreground color pattern and other attributes of the controls in popped up dialog box The Write Address is D5 And select the option Monitoring address is same to write address Value of all other attributes is default value Click the button OK to display the controls on screen Click the icon Word Button to pop up a dialog box Then set appearance background color foreground color pattern and other attributes of the controls in the box Select in module Function Write Address is D5 Enter 5 in column Constant Usually other attributes of page are of default values Click the page tab Label and enter D5 5 in box Text of page Text Click OK to display the controls on screen Click the icon Bar Graph in toolbar to pop up a dialog box Then set background color color sample of bar graph and background color sample of bar graph Select Rightwards in direction module The monitoring address is D5 Maximum and minimum values are respectively 0 and 200 Value of other attributes is default value Click OK to display the controls on screen Click the icon ASC word input and display in toolbar Then set appearance background color foreground color pattern and other attributes
58. and the resolution reaches 800x600 The length width ratio of SK 12 1A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 800x600 Refer to technical parameter list for detailed parameters 1 3 Installing dimension of Sk Workshop Installing dimension of SK 035A Figure 1 1 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 3 5A The outline dimension is 136x89x39 and the installing opening dimension is 124x81 136 mm Samko iais A H E o The back Front 124 mm 18 Tar Al i i I Installation opening size Figure 1 1 Installing dimensions of SK 3 5 installing dimension of SK 4 0A Figure 1 2 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 040A The outline dimension is 123x99x39 and the installing opening dimension 1s1 14x90 The back Front we ET Installation opening size Figure 1 2 Installing dimensions of SK 4 0A installing dimension of SK 4 3A Figure 1 3 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 043A The outline dimension is 151x93x39 and the installing opening dimension is 142x85 10 0 a 2 Samkoon The back 142 mm we Or S TEU Installation opening size Figure 1 3 Installing dimensions of SK 4 3 installing dimension of SK 5 0A Figure 1 4 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 0504A The outline dimension is 16510339 and the installing opening dimension is 157x95 11 165 om Samkoon me 01 The back Front 157 ma ma gg
59. and then the General tab of flowing block will pop up as shown in the figure below 153 Flow Block a General i Visibility Flow Block FG Col Flow Block BG Col Pipe FG Color Fipe BG Color Border Color Border Color Trigger Address Display Type Horizontal O Vertical Attribute gt CT Direction Left flow direction change direction Blacks F Ho Border O Fixed Flow Speed O Low O Mic C Hi C Iynamic Flow Spee Color Here you can set the color of the flow block gt Flow Block FG Color Click here to set the foreground color of the flow block gt Flow Block BFG Color Click here to set the background color of the flow block gt Pipe FG Color Click here to set the foreground color of the pipe gt Pipe BG Color Click here to set the background color of the pipe 154 gt Border Color Click here to set the color of the border of the Flow Block control gt Pattern Click here to choose a pattern for the Flow Block Pure color by default gt Trigger address The address that triggers flowing of the Flow Block When the value of this address is 1 the Flow Block is flowing Attribute Here you can set attributes of the Flow Block such as direction and flow speed gt Display type If Horizontal option is checked the flow block flows horizontally if Vertical option is checked the flow block flows vertically gt Direction
60. are involved in operation The general form of conditional expression composed by conditional operators is Expression 1 Expression 2 Expression 3 Its evaluation rule if the expression is true its value of expression 2 will be the value of conditional expression otherwise the value of expression 2 will be the value of whole conditional expression Conditional expression is normally applied in assignment statement For example if a gt b max a else max b max a gt b a b is expressed with conditional expression Its semanteme is if a gt b is true assign a to max otherwise assign b to max In the application of conditional expression there are some points to be noted as following 1 The operation priority of conditional operator is lower than that of relational operator and arithmetic operator but higher than assignment operator Therefore max a gt b a b can be removed the bracket to be max a gt b a b 2 Conditional operator and is a pair of operator which can not be separated in application 3 The associative direction of conditional operator is from right to left 5 2 3 switch statement C language provides another switch statement for selection of multiple branches Its general form 1s switch expression 257 case constant expression 1 statement 1 case constant expression 2 statement 2 case constant expression n statement n default statement n l Semanteme calculate the expression
61. array The general form of initialization assignment is static type specifier array name constant expression value Wherein static refers to the static storage type It is specified that only static storage array and external storage array can be initialized assignment the relevant static storage and external storage concepts will be introduced in Chapter 5 in C language The data in are the initial value of each element and the elements are spaced with comma such as static int a 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 which is equivalent to a 0 0 a 1 1 a 9 9 2 There are several provisions for initial assignment of array in C language 1 Itis allowed to assign initial value for partial elements When the elements in is less than element quantity the initial value is assigned for the front only For example static int a 10 0 1 2 3 4 it indicates that the initial value will be assigned for the first 5 elements a 0 a 4 and the last 5 elements will be assigned 0 automatically 2 Assign initial value for element one by one and the overall assignment for array is unavailable For example if assigning 1 for 10 elements it can write to be static int a 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 rather than static int a 10 1 3 Ifthe initial value assignment is unavailable for all arrays with initialization all elements will be 0 4 If assigning all elements the array element quantity may not be given in the array declaration For exa
62. can see the change clearly and easily Bar Graph can present the change in the data saved in the data register of PLC or other connected devices or present directly the real time change of all analog quantities on the process flow See Figure 4 106 Figure 4 106 The steps to insert a bar graph and modify properties of a bar graph are as follows 1 Click Bar Graph icon L in the tool bar or the Bar Graph command in Tool menu and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 107 will appear 2 In the pop up dialog set properties of the bar graph and click OK gt BG Color Background color of the bar graph 202 Border color Border color of the bar graph Setting of border color in Figure 4 107 is invalid and you can choose another graph in Shape and then choose the border color to see the change Transparent Set transparent background border for the bar graph Direction The rolling direction of the bar graph including upward downward leftward and rightward Upward When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from the bottom to top Downward When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from top to bottom Leftward When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from right to left Rightward When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from left to right Data type Data type of the read address value either word address or double word address Monitored ad
63. command used to draw a sector in the screen Language box used to choose desired language A Corresponding to Text command used to draw a text box in the current screen for word inputting Corresponding to Table command used to create a table of specified number of rows and columns in the current screen E Corresponding to Scale command used to draw required scales 66 F Corresponding to Open library command used to open the picture library of the SKWorkshop for use by the designers ioe Figure saving command used to save the current figure or user selected control or user imported picture as a control or a figure UN Corresponding to ON 1 command used to set to ON status the graph objects in the current screen for which ON OFF status can be set UFF Corresponding to OFF 0 command used to set to OFF status the graph objects in the current screen for which ON OFF status can be set value of the control and when the value of this box is changed the chosen control will be changed to the same state corresponding to the value State drop down box When there is a control with state in the current screen this box will display the state ao Corresponding to The forward screen command used to switch to the screen before the current screen Corresponding to The backward screen command used to switch to the screen after the curr
64. day of week Static picture Used to insert in the current screen a static picture from local disk 58 Picture display Used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying several pictures GIF display Used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying static or animated pictures with an extension name of GIF Trend chart Used to create in the current screen a trend chart control to monitor change trend of the values of continuous addresses of the connected device XY trend chart Used to create in the current screen an XY trend chart control to monitor the ratio between the values of two continuous addresses of the connected device Dynamic circle Used to create in the current screen a dynamic circle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Dynamic rectangle Used to create in the current screen a dynamic rectangle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Alarm control Used to create in the current screen an alarm box control to display the date time and message of each alarm Dynamic alarm bar Used to create in the current screen an alarm bar that can display alarm message and move left or right Historic alarm dialog Used to create in the current screen a historical alarm box control to display the date time and messag
65. device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC Fatek FB Series Fatek FB Series Communication port RS232 RS232 Baud rate 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 Data bit length T 7 8 Parity check bit EVEN EVEN ODD NONE Stop bit length I 1 2 PLC station number l 0 255 HMI station number 0 0 255 Support functions Yes No Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Yes Extension mode Yes 3 Operable register and address range ___Register Name dddd 0 9999 Bit input contact read only dddd 0 9999 Bit output relay a dddd 0 9999 Bit internal relay S dddd 0 9999 Bit step relay dddd 0 9999 Bit timer status read only dddd 0 9999 Bit counter status read only OOO R O dddd 0 9999 Word data register OO D dddd 0 9999 Word data register dddd 0 9999 Word current value of timer dddd 0 9999 Word current value of counter 378 200 255 Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support diffe
66. executed No Timer can be set if there is no macro at present The size of Timer cannot be changed but its position can be set Timer control will not be displayed on HMI during project execution 4 4 16 Data transfer of Sk Workshop Data Transfer is used for transfer of data between PLC and HMI or between PLC and PLC Click Data Transfer in Project Manager and the current data transfer list will appear Data Transfer List Source Address D5 Destination Address LW3 Transmission mode Word Time triggered ratel This list shows the details of all current data transfers and you can carry out New Delete and Alter operations SKWorkshop V4 0 supports up to 64 data transfers at the same time Create a new Data Transfer or double click an existing Data Transfer to enter the property dialog 157 Data Transfer Attribute Timed C Automatic Reset Address Type Bit a Humber of Horii 7 SOU Addr LEO Destinati on LBO 1 Attribute Timed Triggered Here you choose the trigger manner of data transfer Timed The data will be transferred basing on specified time interval Triggered Data transfer will be triggered by specified address 1 e triggered when the value of trigger bit is 1 Automatic resetting When the address value of the trigger bit is 1 this value will be automatically changed to 0 Address
67. if 16 digit data type is selected the address read following is equal to previous address plus 1 e Users can set the Scanning Time of analog alarm as required 1 e scanning frequency e Click every item in list box Move mouse to right Limit and enter one data into it Then move mouse to the edit box Text in right module Message and enter the corresponding text information in the box 1 e alarm content Suppose the information set here i e alarm content is as shown in figure 7 24 From this figure we can see that each address value can be divided into 4 areas i e data subarea of alarm address low low low high and high high In following content we take address LW1 for example to describe the meaning of these 4 areas all the option Use for four options of address LW1 is selected as shown in figure 7 27 334 The limut for option High Hof LW 13 130 When value of LW 15 more than 1530 the mfomnation of option High H 1s displayed 1 The limit foroption High of LW1is 100 When value of LWlis more than 100 and not more than 150 the mfonnation of option High iedisplayed p i The limit for option Low of LW1 is 50 When value of LW1 isnot less than 10 and less than 0 the infomnation of option Low 1s displayed The lmit for option Low L of LW1 15 10 Whenvalue of LW1 15 less than 10 the imfonmnation of option Low L 1 displayed Figure 7 27 Area d
68. in figure 8 11 will pop up Select the drop down menu on left of register name The number selected after clicking the drop down menu is just the slave station address of PLC Figure 8 11 Address entry Window RS232 cannot support the connection mode of multi drop Therefore when PLC in mode one screen with multiple devices doesn t support port RS485 it is necessary to configure communication adapter to convert RS485 signal into RS232 signal 360 9 3 Penetration connection method of SK Workshop SK series touch screen also supports a special connection method The remote one HMI could realize monitoring and control for PLC or other control devices via another HMI serial port this HMI connects PLC or other control devices At this time it is equivalent that two or more control ends may operate for subordinated devices The penetration function is a very practical function provided by SK series HMI Before using the penetration you have to learn the two nouns as following lt Local the HMI that connects to PLC or other control devices lt Remote other HMI with penetration function that connects to local To realize penetration function the local HMI should have double serial ports The connection diagrams in penetration function are shown as Figure 8012 and Figure 8 13 Two screen penetration Local Remote slave station ID1 PLC or control devices Figure 8 12 connection diagram of two screen penetr
69. in the Text tab of this control Similarly if the entered value for LW3 is 8 the control will display the text under state 3 If the entered value for LW3 1s 3 the multi state lamp will not switch to any state 182 User defined state value When this option is chosen there will be a Define State Value button after the User defined State Value Click this button and then a dialog as shown in 4 89 will pop up a Customize status values Figure 4 89 User defined state value dialog In this dialog column S is the current state column which means that when you chose a line the value corresponding to S in the line indicates the current state value Double click the Value column of a line and then you can enter the value to be written under the current state For example we assume the monitored read address is LW3 and the total number of states is 8 After setting and clicking OK click on the screen to add the control into the screen add an value entering control in the screen set both the write address and monitored address to LW3 and then save the project Click the number entering control in simulation or screen and enter a desired state value in the pop up keyboard We assume the value entered is 22 then the value of the monitored read address is 1 and the control will display the texts under state 1 that is the text contents under State 1 in the Text tab of this control Similarly if the entered value for LW3
70. into monitoring are DO recipe length is 16 and total number is 4 Figure 7 33 Recipe effect diagram All data of recipe can be changed saved read and written conveniently through setting function button together with value display input Users have to pay attention to the following several points when using recipe V The recipe table has to be established firstly y Pay attention to selection of data type when writing required recipe parameter to recipe table 16 digit data occupies one word and 32 digit data occupies two words The selection of data type shall be consistent when selecting controls especially notice the use of 32 digit data address The 32 digit data occupies two words Therefore it is necessary to prevent data address from overlap when entering address into write address and monitor address yV Address RWIO is fixed which can only be used to change recipe number and cannot be used in any other places Besides when value of RWIO is 0 it standards for first recipe number and so forth y Recipe parameter address is continuous 7 9 Setting of global macro of Sk Workshop Set one successfully compiled macro to be global macro When the configuration begins to run i e execute this macro instruction the instruction shall be executed in the whole operation course with no limit from screen 64 global macros can be set at most When multiple global macros are set they will be executed according to the set serial numbe
71. is 0 7 e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 3 Delta device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Delta DVP series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the connection port of Delta DVP series PLC through the serial port device so as to operate Delta DVP series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Delta DVP series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Delta DVP series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Delta DVP COM1 COM2 series ex 373 374 O Je N ooo 00000 O SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Delta DVP series PLC terminal is MD8M RS485 SK series touch screen Delta DVP COM1 COM2 series SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Delta DVP series PLC terminal is two wire terminal 2 Software setting Y Select Delta Corporation in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connectio
72. is 33 the control will display the text under state 3 If the entered value for LW3 is 2 the multi state lamp will not switch to any state Date type Data type of the write address and monitored read address Monitored address The same to read address The value of this address is the read state value and the user chosen state will be shown in the control Total states Here you can set the total number of states basing on particular needs up to 32 states that is state 0 31 For example when 16 digit positive integer is chosen and the total states are 32 if the value in the monitored address is 0 then the Multi state lamp displays the texts and picture of state 0 if the value in the monitored address is 5 then the Multi state lamp displays the texts and picture of state 5 If the value in monitored address is 60 then the Multi state lamp displays the texts and picture of state 31 as the total number of states is 32 at most 183 Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern When 32 digit data type is chosen for multi state Lamp the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to avoid mis operat
73. load a predefined keyboard Totally 9 predefined keyboards can be loaded and you can add desired keyboards up to 32 keyboards as shown in Figure 4 131 233 Numeric Eeyboard Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Digital keyboar Finish Figure 4 131 Page 3 of user defined keyboard guide After clicking Complete button you can add the chosen keyboard to the project 4 6 10 Recipe selector of SK Workshop The function of recipe selector is to list the names of all recipes if any Then you can choose a recipe in the list and the system will write the number of this recipe into the recipe number register RWIO Accordingly if the value of the recipe number register RWIO is changed the recipe selector will point to the specified recipe name The icon of this control in the toolbar is ial Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in the figure below will pop up 234 fin Recipe selector ETEEN Rsooo0 Display Styl List O Down list Font Systen v a EEEE Font Size yw Text Color BRE Color Rows Macro Use macro General tab of recipe selector gt Display style List Display all the recipe names in the form of a list Dropdown box Display all the recipe names in the form of a dropdown box gt The Font Font Size Text Color and Backgr
74. make it precise If you find any ambiguity or mistake in this Manual please contact us using the contact information provided at the end of this Manual and notify us the serial number indicated on the cover of the Manual On the trade mark and other matters Windows is a registered trade mark of Microsoft Corporation in USA Programmable Logic Controllers PLC refer to products of all manufacturers Safety issues In this Manual safety considerations are divided into Danger and Caution Danger Mis operation may lead to accidents and cause death or serious injury Caution Mis operation may lead to accidents and cause middle or minor injury However issues marked as Caution may also cause serious accidents in some cases So please abide by these instructions carefully Warning Before installation dismounting wiring maintenance or testing please switch off the power to prevent electric shock mis operation or failure Please set external emergency stop loop and interlock device for the touch screen Otherwise failure of the touch screen may cause mechanical damage or accidents When the power is on do not touch live parts such as the terminals or electric shock may be caused Caution Do not use items that have been damaged or deformed at the time of unpacking or failure or mis operation may be caused Prevent the machine from impact such as falling or rolling or product damage and failure may be cause
75. number of current recipe when there is recipe write the serial number of current recipe into PLC Current user level write current user level into PLC Present language that is to enter the present language number into PLC Click OK to finish setting of HMI status 7 2 4 PLC control of SK Workshop PLC control concludes switching of PLC control screen change of user level recipe alteration and operation of write recipe Double click the option PLC Control in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 6 313 PLC Control FLC Control PLO Control C Change the Recipe C Write the Recipe The Current user Lev F Switch Sereen Bit Control Screen Conditior Bit Address Screen Hame Hew Figure 7 6 Dialog box of PLC control Control recipe change HMI changes recipe as the address of control recipe change Control recipe write in HMI controls the recipe write in as the address of control recipe write in Control the current user level HMI controls the current user level as the address of control the current user level Word control screen switching it means the word address controls the screen switching HMI switches the screen as the address of control screen switching If the address value is n it means to jump to screen n Bit control screen switching double click new create line and pop up the dialog box as Figure 7 7
76. of project establishment and also be changed at configuration The HMI model currently used in project can be altered through selecting the parameter setting command of touch screen in project manager Double click the option Parameter Setting of Touch Screen in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 6 0 Parameter Setting 1 The parameters can be set and changed from the drop down list or by double clicking the touch screen setting in the project manager Then it will pop up the dialog box as shown in Figure 7 3 HEI Parameter Sett ing Model HMI Model Hide the mouse cursor Floating point Settings ie Standard E Appoint This set of some agreement effective Display Type Horizontal HMI Start Setting Screen Sayer Tili ee IM Flicker Freguen 10 IE Touch Voice Avoice tips Oo Screensavers Screen Touch invalid labeled Use suest system Labeled F 1 Load Screen Alarm setting E eee Alarm Voice No sound reminders Mi Operation Mode Touch Type Oper USE Mouse Action Cenc er Figure 7 3 General setting box for touch screen parameters gt Touch screen model change the touch screen model by changing the option Model description the meaning of each character such as SK O70AS SK indicating the SK series of Samkoon 308 070 indicating the 7 inch screen of SK series The figure is HMI dimension A indicating t
77. of states is 3 and the texts of state 0 1 and 2 are respectively 0 1 and 2 then when clicking repeatedly the control after downloading to HMI the control will switch over among the three states 0 2 and write the corresponding value into LW1 4 6 3 Radio button of SK Workshop The function of radio button that when you click a state the control will switch to this state and write the corresponding value under the state into the write address The icon of this control in the toolbar is D Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 119 will pop up 218 SingSelect Button l Advanced L Visibility State Text Base Cole Separation Lii 3 lt e e a Total States cotate Type State sequence Value Bit register Left to Rif Right to Lei am C Customize the values of tl e Wp to Downl Town to Up Data Type 16 Bit Unsigw rn s ee i Write Addres i o Button interval 4 SSe Current State Bis Color Text color Macro Use Marco Figure 4 119 General tab of radio button State sequence Text arrangement sequence of the control For example if the total number of states is 3 the texts of state 0 1 and 2 are respectively 0 1 and 2 From left to right Horizontal placement of the control and from left to right arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 0 1 2 From ri
78. of the controls in popped up dialog box The write address is D2 And select options Monitor and Monitoring address is same to write address Adjust the total number of words to 20 Values of other attributes are default value Click OK to display the controls on screen 93 66 vi in the offline simulation the available functions for buttons are as following previous recipe next recipe 29 66 current recipe save user level change user level log off and touch sound ON OFF The historical alarm 295 dialog box historical data displayer historical trend chart timer and macro on the toolbar can not be simulated V The creation method of other controls is same to previous introduction Therefore detailed description is not given again After setting attribute of all controls click Save to save the project Then select Off line Simulation in menu Download of menu bar as shown in figure 6 7 SEWorkshop C Documents and Settings Administrator RM IESI sha Screenl Ef File F Edit View Draw H Insert Screen P Setting DownLoad Help H Language Selection Standard List vi HMI B ros Tal T 4 a HRA et T Pk DHA at L BR 9999 9 Link L 2 a BHG ex F RR BHAT Sr E BR 9999 9 7 setting 2 ae p ee AQ HII Parameter Ser HAH 4 OK ORB HAH SS FRR 000A Ge mI Status mrad PaE eiii middi Fa Da i Te sini PLO Con
79. other graphs will be covered by other graphs Figure 4 8 shows a contrast before and after such moving First choose an object in several graphs and then choose Move to Bottom command in Edit menu or command button Ei in the toolbar buttons or call the right click menu and choose Move to Bottom command in the Layer option See Figure 4 9 for a comparison before and after combination h A be er Ce ee a Object before back Object after back Figure 4 9 Contrast before and after moving object backward Move object one layer forward This command is used to move the chosen object to an upper layer over the graph object intersected with it Thus the parts of other graphs intersected with this graph will be covered by this graph Figure 4 9 shows a contrast before and after such moving First choose an object in several graphs and then choose Move to Upper Layer command in Edit menu or command button 21 in the toolbar buttons or call the nght click menu and choose Move to Upper Layer command in the Layer option See Figure 4 10 for a comparison before and after combination Object moved forward a Execution of a Execution a layer of two layer of former forward again times the forward Figure 4 10 Contrast before and after moving object one layer forward Move object one layer backward This command is used to move the chosen object to a lower layer than the graph object intersected with it Thus the part of th
80. parameter changes FLASH it is OFF after completion Storage of COM2 communication Trigger the bit to store the changed communication parameters into 60110 parameter changes FLASH it is OFF after completion Confirmation of system parameter Trigger the bit to store the changed communication parameters into 60111 changes FLASH it is OFF after completion Window of abnormal ON allow to popup abnormal window 60112 z communication OFF prohibit to popup abnormal window Control of mouse ON appear the mouse cursor 60113 a 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7A 5 x curse OFF prohibit mouse cursor for touching only USB connection ON USB device is connected 60114 status OFF no USB device is connected Connection status of ON SD card device is connected 60115 SDcard OFF no SD card device is connected R 60116 Whether it makes sound in touching or mouse clicking R W 60117 Whether it makes sound in alarm R W 60118 Clear the historical Clear the historical alarm records auto reset R W 344 alarm records Clear the operation 60119 records Clear the operation records auto reset Clear the historical data records Clear the historical data records auto reset When re loading the recipe data at current number this bit is ON it Re load recipe becomes OFF after completion ON save the historical alarm records into disk Save historical alarm OFF after completion ON sav
81. present it onto the control The presentation area can be indicated in Foreground Color Background Color and Pattern The icon of this control in the toolbar is Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 116 will pop up 214 Pie Graph Advanced Visibility il Il IL P0000 Fie FG Color Fie BG Color Bottom colour Cirele BG Col Pattern Directi Clock Anticlockwise lata Type Monitor Addre F Iynamic range Figure 4 116 General tab of fan chart Scale tab of fan chart is shown in Figure 4 117 215 Pie Graph Display Color v Axis v Marks Font Size Min Total Diz Fractiona Figure 4 117 Scale tab of fan chart gt Refer to the Scale tab of Meter for the parameter setting in this tab gt Refer to the Advanced tab of Numerical Value Display control for the parameter setting in the Advanced tab 4 6 2 SK Workshop Step button of SK Workshop Function of step button is to switch over the state of the control in return after each clicking and write the corresponding value into the write address The icon of this control in the toolbar is Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 118 will pop up 216 aa St epping Hutton Medinet ID sTBo00 State Text Base Cols Separation Lii Total States 3 a ee eee State Type State sequence Value Bit register Left to Rif Righ
82. range is 0 15 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 22 Siemens device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Siemens 7 200 300 series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Siemens S7 200 300 series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Siemens S7 200 300 series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Siemens S7 200 300 series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Siemens S7 200 300 series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS485 Siemens S7 200 SK series touch screen Siemens S7 200 COM1 COM2 series SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Siemens S7 200 series PLC terminal is DB9M RS232 Siemens S7 300 SK series touch screen Siemens S7 200 COM1 COM2 series 7 8 Short connec SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Siemens S7 300 series PLC MPI terminal is DB9M 407 2 Software setting vV Select SIEMENS in the connection de
83. requirements Let s illustrate how to realize multilingual function in the following sections For example As shown in above figure the language quantity for setting is 3 and the language name is default Create a control with text entry such as screen button select language 1 in the drop down list enter language 1 Simplified Chinese in the text and set the font size color and other attribute value Select language 2 in the drop down list and then enter language 2 English in the text Select language 3 in the drop down list and enter language 3 Japan in the text Details are shown as following figure 299 Screen Button Advanced Visibility Language languagel F All language use the first language text Ficture langmuagel P itf Font System Font Size 14 Color Fosition Bold Italic UnderLine Plink Ho ford Inte 300 Screen Button Geman Advanced Visibility Language EEA EELA All language use the first language text Picture languagee English Font Ari al Font Size 19 Color ae Fosition Bold Italic UnderLine ford Inte 301 Screen Button Teneral Language Language tye F All language use the first language text Font Size 10 Fosition Bold Italic UnderLine Plink io SE SESEESSE SE SESESDSESES ESSERE ut ford Inte lo 2 Click confirm button after settings fini
84. sampling current is Full Limit of total sampling time inform to set address to 1 Click the tab Data Item to set attributes of the page as shown in figure 7 18 324 Historical data collector Data Item Attribute l Language Llanguazel Address Name Name Display T Total Dig Fractiona F Scaling Figure 7 18 Data item of historical data collector User can set the corresponding attribute for the item in right Data Item Attribute through clicking each item in list box Following we take example to describe it in details If user sets read address to LW1 and sample length to 5 in page General after clicking the tab Data Item five columns of data are added in the list box Content of address column is LHO LH4 and name column is empty User can click each line firstly and then set name data type display type total digits fractional digits scaling or not and other attributes for each item in right Data Item Attribute Suppose name of LHO LH4 is set as shown in figure 6 14 the data type and scaling or not of LHO LH4 are set as follows other attributes are default value LHO0 16 po
85. selection Once you have chosen an item the corresponding value will be written into the control address of the character register o Slider analog switch used to create a slider analog switch control in the current screen You can drag the slider to change the value of the corresponding character register address 123 Corresponding to Numeric display command used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box showing the value of the monitored address la i l o al Corresponding to Numeric entry command used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box for data entry and showing the value of the monitored address A showing ASCII character words Corresponding to ASCII character display command used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box b al Corresponding to ASCII character entry command used to draw in the current screen an ASCII character display and entry box for inputting ASCII character words ii Corresponding to Bit lamp command used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor bit state of single connected device R Corresponding to Multi state lamp command used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor word state of several connected devices with continuous addresses y Corresponding to Multi state switch command used to create in the current screen a multi state button to monitor change in the valu
86. serial port Direct connection Siemens S7 200 PPI S7 300 MPI Siemens special protocol serial port Direct connection TaiAn Technology _ TPO3 series TaiAn special protocol serial port Direct connection TaiLing Electric DX series TaiLing special protocol serial port Direct connection Techwayson Technology V series Techwayson special protocol serial port Direct connection Vigor Electric Corporation V VH VB M series Vigor special protocol serial port Direct connection Xinje Electronic XC XCM series Xinjie special protocol serial port Yokogawa Electric Direct connection Corporation FA M3 series Yokogawa special protocol serial port Direct connection ZhengHang Electronics A4 AS5 series ZhengHang special protocol serial port lt Pin definition of serial port COM1 COM2 for SK series touch screen The serial port for SK series touch screen uses 9 pin trapezoid male connector and the connected cable is 9 pin trapezoid female connector Detailed pin definition is shown as following table SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 2 X ee ee CA ee 369 RX RS232 communication receiving end TX RS232 communication transmitting end KZ control terminal GND grounding terminal RX RS422 communication receiving RX RS422 communication receiving TX RS422 communication sending RS485 communication B TX RS422 communication sending RS485 communication Note 2 3 5 terminal is used in RS232 communication 6
87. so the system will prompt that the password is incorrect When the password entered by the user is 2222 or 3333 as both users have option 2 matching option 2 or 3 the password is valid and this control will be changed to a touchable control If the Default User Level is user 2 to 3 then both user levels have option 2 to match the touching conditions and then this control is touchable in simulation or initialized screen If the Default User Level is user 3 then this user level does not have an option to match the touching conditions and then this control is not touchable in simulation or initialized screen Notification When the control is touchable if you click this control and enter a value in the pop up keyboard the system will write a user specified state value 1 or 0 to the Notification Bit address set by the user 198 gt Scaling When this option is chosen the value of the write address value entered by the user using the pop up keyboard offset gain the displayed value value of the monitored address value of the monitored address x gain offset gt Range display If this option is chosen you can set the lower limit higher limit lower level color and higher level color and then value of the monitored read address will be reflected with different colors in the set range Variable range The values of Lower Limit and Higher Limit are changing depending on the address entered by the user Low
88. speed gt Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 15 Timer of Sk Workshop Timer is a control that triggers specified function basing on time conditions In SK Workshop V4 0 timer is used as a control for trigger of macros Create a new Timer or double click an existing Timer i to enter the property dialog 155 a General Properties Fun Condition Always Perform Frequency Run Times Function Function Type Hame Control Run Conditions Here you can set run conditions for macros either Always Perform or Address Triggered 1 Always Perform If this option is chosen the macros will be always executed in specified frequency 2 Address Triggered If this option is chosen then the macros will be executed when the value of the specified bit is 1 and will not be executed when the value is 0 Address When Address Triggered option is chosen there will be a box for address entering Enter here the bit that controls the macro so that when the value of this bit is 1 the macro will be executed Frequency Execution frequency of the chosen macro from 0 1 to 60s Run times This option defines how many times the macro will be run If 0 is set here the macro will be always executed Function 156 Function Type Here you can choose the type of the function to be executed In SKWorkshop V4 0 the function controlled by Timer is macro Name Name of the macro to be
89. standard mode 1 extension mode R COMI a communication 60307 timeout Set the communication timeout the unit is ms Current waiting time in COM1 60308 communication Current waiting time of communication the unit is ms Current retry times in COM1 60309 communication Current retry times of communication 60310 PLC brand of COM1 Communication parameter set manufactures for PLC connection PLC model of COMI 60311 Communication parameter the model is CPU model 60312 COM2 check Communication parameter check 0 NONE 1 EVEN 2 ODD Communication parameter baud rate 60313 COM2 baud rate 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 25600 6 115200 7 187 5K 60314 COM2 stop bit Communication parameter stop bit 0 lstops 1 2stops 60315 COM2 data length Communication parameter data length 0 7bits 1 8bits HM1 address of 60316 COM2 Communication parameter HMI address PLC address of 60317 COM2 Communication parameter PLC address PLC continuous address interval of 60318 COM2 The max continuous address length acquired in single communication COM2 a 60319 communication time Communication delay time 60320 COM2 retry times System retry times in abnormal communication R W 60321 COM2 address mode Address mode 0 standard mode 1 extension mode R COM2 a 2 2 2i z e 2 2 al 2 2 2 2 24 2 2 z z 60322 communication Set the communica
90. that in the former there is not ON Text and ON Picture as Word Button has only one state Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Word Button 173 When 32 digit data type is chosen for Word Button the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to avoid mis operation over data and address The Advanced and Visibility tabs of Word Button are exactly the same as the Advanced and Visibility tabs of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Word Button gt After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen 4 5 3 Bit lamp of Sk Workshop Bit Lamp can be used to monitor the ON OFF state of the bit contact of the connected device and to display the corresponding state on the screen See Figure 4 83 Ks 4 83 Figure 4 83 Steps to set a Bit Lamp are as follows 1 Choose the Bit Lamp button icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 84 will appear 174 Border Colo Fis Color BG
91. the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation Version 4 0 0 Realse date 4011 12 31 CH do not accept the agreement Figure 2 4 Agreement accepting page Users can fill in their own personal or company information or choose the default setting C Program File SK Workshop and then click next See Figure 2 5 fe setup SEWorkshop Select Destination Location Where should SKWorkshop be installed setup will install SKWorkshop into the following folder To continue click Next I you would like to select a different folder click Browse At least 108 3 MB of free disk space 15 required Figure 2 5 Installation directory selection page If you have installed SK Workshop4 0 0 before a dialog as shown in Figure 2 6 will pop up 41 Folder Exists The folder C Program Files SKWorkshop already exists Would you like to install to that folder anyway Figure 2 6 A prompt dialog If you want to cover the previous installation click Yes Otherwise click No to go back to the dialog as shown in Figure 2 5 and reselect an installation directory After clicking Yes in the dialog as shown in Figure 2 6 a dialog will appear to allow you to choose the installation folder You may choose the default folder or other folders Then click Next as shown in Figure 2 7 ie setup SEForkshop Select Start Henao Folder Where should Setup place the program s s
92. the Valid Lowest Level set by you Otherwise a password dialog will pop up when you touch a control in the screen as shown in Figure 4 86 Figure 4 86 Password input dialog The screen can be opened only when the level of the password entered is higher than that set by you and after the screen is opened the current user level is the level entered just now gt Use Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the screen button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list 177 The Label tab of Screen Button is the same as the Label tab of Bit Button except that in the former there is not ON Text and ON Picture as Screen Button has only one state Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Screen Button The Advanced and Visibility tabs of Screen Button are exactly the same as the Advanced and Visibility tabs of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Screen Button gt After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen 4 5 5 Function button of Sk Workshop Function Button is an important control in the whole touch screen Using
93. the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of AIBUS device v Please refer to relative technical documents of AIBUS device for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Setting Range Parameters a E p Communication port RS232 RS422 RS485 Baud rate Data bit length Parity check bit Stop bit length PLC station number HMI station number Support functions Offline simulation Online simulation Extension mode eS Operable register and address range 371 Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 2 Allen Bradley device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Allen Bradley AB series PLC register through Allen Bradley DF1 protocol It establishes serial port communication with the connection port of Allen Bradley AB series PLC through the serial port device so as to operate Allen Bradley AB series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manua
94. the original state of the minimum value and the maximum value If the value of the address is 1 there will be dynamic change otherwise 4 the original value will be recovered Note Only internal address can be used for this control address and the minimum value and maximum value respectively occupies two consecutive word addresses gt For example If the data type is 16 digit data the number of data is 8 and the read address set by the user is LW3 then the values of 8 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 Value of pen 1 LW4 Value of pen 2 LWS Value of pen 3 LW6 Value of pen 4 LW7 Value of pen 5 LW8 Value of pen 6 LW9 Value of pen 7 LW10 Value of pen 8 Thus if 16 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of N addresses can be read continuously according to different address rules of the PLC 126 If the data type is 32 digit data the number of data is 5 and the read address set by the user is LW3 then the values of 5 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 Value of pen 1 LWS Value of pen 2 LW7 Value of pen 3 LW9 Value of pen 4 LW11 Value of pen 5 Thus if 32 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of N addresses adding 2 to the address each time can be read according to different address rules of the PLC Direction From left to right The pens lines move from left to right From right to left The pens li
95. the recipe parameters will not be changed by touching Save current recipe 179 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Used to set the function of the Function Button to save current recipe Then you can save the recipe parameters from corresponding continuous data register addresses which are write addresses set by designers during recipe setting of PLC or other connected devices to the current recipe by touching this button on the touch screen Screen shot This function button is used to shoot the current screen and save it as a picture to specified position System parameters Used to set the function of the Function Button to system parameters Then you can open the system parameter page by touching this button on the touch screen In this page some information on the touch screen is displayed and can be modified by touching such as system time screen saver time background light contrast and the like Change user level Used to set the function of the Function Button to change user level Then you can change the privilege of the current user by touching this button on the touch screen If Privilege Login option is chosen then a keyboard will appear on the screen when you touch the Function Button Then after you enter the system password set in Environment Parameter option you can get the privilege corresponding to this user level and thus enter a screen with a level equal
96. this parameter you can set alarm sound for the system The options include No voice prompt and Voice prompt 81 Touch voice You can set whether to have sound when the touch screen is touched Screen saver screen If this box is checked you can select a picture and set it to be the screen saver picture After the screen saver picture appears you can simply touch the screen to go back the original screen Load screen If this box is checked the selected loading picture will be displayed after power up of the touch screen and remain for set duration before the appearing of the start up picture This is to give some prompts or instructions to users gt Other settings Hide mouse cursor Whether to display the mouse or not Floating point number setting Standard higher bytes of the floating point number in front of the lower bytes Specified positions of higher and lower bytes to be set by user No data sign Numerical value object All controls with numerical value such as numerical value display and numerical value input controls under communication failure As it is Keep the displayed text contents as it is Clear Clear the text contents displayed in the control Present the displayed contents of this control with Present the displayed contents of this control with Character object All controls with character such as ASCII display and ASCII input controls under communica
97. to set or modify global macro Initial macro Used to open initial macro interface to set or modify initial macro Please keep firmly in mind the password after setting Project configuration files with password can be opened only after correct password is entered The password is case sensitive e Download menu Download menu is used to compile and download configuration project consisting of four commands that is Compile C Off line Simulation M USB Download D and Compile Download A After the touch screen is connected to PC via USB cable you can download the configuration project to the touch screen after compiling the configuration project See Figure 2 35 60 Download D Help H Langua Compile C off line SimuLlation M i S on Line Simulation USE DownLoad 1 q Converter Fack Unpack Figure 2 35 Download menu Compile Used to check the configuration project created by the user and prepare for downloading Off line simulation Used to call other applications of SK Workshop open simulation panel and to simulate the current project configuration on PC to check the effect or modify the screen Please save the project before off line simulation USB download Used to download the compiled project configuration to the touch screen via the USB cable supplied along with the product Before downloading please compile and save the project configuration Converter Use
98. to show grids of Y axis Axis Tick Color Changing the color of X axis tick Grid Color Changing the color of X axis grids Number of Major Number of major ticks of X axis Number of Sub Number of sub ticks of X axis Show Marks Defining whether to show marks of X axis Y Axis Show Ticks Defining whether to show scales of Y axis Show X Axis Grid Defining whether to show grids of X axis Axis Tick Color Changing the color of Y axis tick Grid Color Changing the color of Y axis grids Number of Major Number of major ticks of Y axis 129 Number of Sub Number of sub ticks of Y axis Show Marks Defining whether to show marks of Y axis Font Size Changing font size of marks on Y axis Min Minimum value of ticks of Y axis Max Maximum value of ticks of Y axis Total Digits Maximum digits of the data displayed Fractional Digits Maximum fractional digits of the data displayed Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 3 XY Trend chart of Sk Workshop gt Overview of XY Trend chart Displaying continuous values of variables on a dynamic and continuous basis Reference curves for multiple data can be drawn Values of two continuous register addresses will be respectively used as the horizontal and vertical axis to visualize the change trend of the two values 8 polygonal lines can be displayed at most Steps to insert a XY Trend Chart are similar to that for Trend Chart so you can refer
99. value and compare with the subsequent constant expression value one by one When the expression value is equal to a constant expression value the subsequent statement is executed Then judgment is not made Continue the statement behind all case If the expression value is different from the constant expression behind case it will execute the statement behind default There are several points to be noted in switch statement 1 All constant expression values behind case must be different otherwise there will be mistake 2 Several statements are allowed behind case and they can not be bracketed with 3 The sequence of case and default clauses may be changed and will not affect the program execution 4 Default clause may be omitted 5 2 4 Loop structure program The loop structure is an important structure of program When the given condition is satisfied one program segment is executed repeatedly until the condition is unsatisfied The given condition is called loop condition and the program segment executed repeatedly is called loop body C language provides many loop statements which may compose different loop structures 1 While statement The general form of while statement While expression statement wherein the expression is loop condition and the statement is loop body Semanteme of while statement compute the expression value When the value is true not 0 the loop body statement is executed There are some po
100. with semicolon 3 In the variable declaration it is forbidden to assign initial value for several variables successively For example the following declaration is incorrect Int a b c 5 must be written to int a 5 b 5 c 5 However the assignment statement must be assigned continuously 4 Note the difference between assignment expression and assignment statement Assignment expression is a kind of expression which can be used in any allowable place But the assignment statement can not The following statement is legal 1f x y 5 gt 0 z x the function of statement if expression x y 5 is greater than 0 then z 0 The following statement is illegal 1f x y 5 gt 0 z x as x y 5 is a statement it can not be used in expression 5 2 2 Branch structure program Relational operator and expression In the program it usually compares the size of two data so as to confirm the next process The operator for comparing data size is called the relational operator There are such relational operators in C language as following lt less than lt less than or equal to gt greater than gt greater than or equal to equal to unequal to The relational operator is binary operator which is left associative Its priority is lower than that of arithmetic operator and higher than that of assignment operator In the six relational operators lt lt gt gt has the same priority which is higher than and While
101. 0 Generation Library Function Selection G Choose regional as 1 O Imported images from Save To Figure 4 51 Build library dialog gt SKWorkshop can save configuration pictures completed by the designers so that they can use them conveniently next time After clicking Build Library as shown in the figure above the graph object in the current screen will be displayed in the white area in the middle of the dialog gt There are three options in the function area Choose area as library Take the chosen object in the screen as the library object Import library Import from external source well arranged library files with an extension of sk such files are generally provided by the Company Import picture from files Take a picture imported from external files as the library object gt Click Save to button select library 2 See Figure 4 52 121 Save to user defined library Custom Library Figure 4 52 Save path selection dialog Choose a save path in the selection box on the left Sk Workshop totally provides 8 self defined control libraries and graph libraries After a save path is selected click Save to button below to save the graph object At this moment the saved graph object will be displayed in the white area on the left Click OK again to complete this operation To view the graph saved just now you can click the open library command button scroll down the scro
102. 1 How to export data with U disk or SD Card ccccccccccccceessseeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaasaaeeeeees 380 1 Be How to update a project with U disk or SD Card cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeesees 380 11 3 Image formats supported by SK series touch SCre N ccccceeecececeeeeeeeeeeaeaseeeeeesseeeeeeees 381 11 4 Dia Sy Dacor a A E 381 C OIE sath EER E A E A E R 382 1 Hardware manual 1 1 General Samkoon SK series touch screens are high quality human machine interface products integrating CPU module output module display screen memory and some other modules It can be widely used in various control systems of different industries Optimized design of hardware and software is adopted so that the touch precision and screen color of the product meet the requirements for machine control Samkoon SK series touch screens have the following models SK 3 5A SK 4 0A SK 4 3A SK 5 0A SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7D SK 5 7F SK 7 0A SK 7 2A SK 8 0A SK 10 2A SK 10 4A SK 12 1A Samkoon SK series touch screens are open human machine interface products providing standard serial interfaces for connection with other equipment It mainly supports serial communication including communication with currently popular PLCs such as Mitsubishi s PLC products Siemens PLC products Omron s PLC products and Modicon s PLC products Meanwhile communication drive can be developed upon request of users The configuration software
103. 10 16 24 40 KV P16 dddDD 0 90915 Biti relay dddd 0 999 Bit timer dddd 0 999 Bit counter ddddd 0 9999 Word data storage ddd 0 99 Word temporary data storage dddd 0 999 Word current value of timer dddd 0 999 Word preset value of timer dddd 0 999 Word current value of counter CV p dddd 0 999 Word preset value of counter 390 CTH dddd 0 9 Word current value of high speed counter Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e DD indicates the hexadecimal and the input range is 0 15 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 14 Koyo device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Koyo SN series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Koyo SN series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Koyo SN series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Koyo SN series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Koyo SN series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Koyo SN COM1 COM2 series SK series touch scre
104. 12 HEX2ASCII Description Convert a hexadecimal value to a string Usage HEX2ASCII source result start Example short source 0x5678 char result result HEX2ASCII source result O S result 1 6 result 2 7 result 3 8 13 HIBYTE Description Retrieve the high byte from the low word of a specified value Usage result HIBY TE source Example short source 0x1234 result result HIB Y TE source result 0x12 285 14 HIWORD Description Retrieve the high word from the specified value Usage result HIWORD source Example int source 0x45232568 result result HIWORD source result 0x1234 15 INVBIT Description Set specific bit to be inversed ON gt OFF OFF gt ON Usage result INVBIT source bit_pos Example short source 0x6 bit pos 1 result result INVBIT source bit_pos result 4 16 LOBYTE Description Retrieve the low byte from the specified value Usage result LOBY TE source Example short source 0x1234 result result LOBY TE source result 0x34 17 LOWORD Description Retrieve the low word from the specified value Usage result LOWORD source 286 Example int source 0x12345678 result result LOWORD source result 0x5678 18 PUTCHARS This function is applied for free port communication only Description Send data to communication port PortID Serial Port ID COM1 0 CO
105. 2 do while statement may be composed to the nested loop and nested with while statement mutually 3 The loop body between do and while is made up of several statements and bracketed with to form a compound statement 4 When converting do while and while statement mutually pay attention to modify the loop control conditions 5 2 5 for statement For statement is a kind of loop statement with stronger function and wider application provided by C language Its general form is For Expression 1 Expression 2 Expression 3 statement Expression1 it is usually to assign initial value to loop variable and it is assignment expression It also allows to assign initial value to loop variable except for statement In this case the expression may be omitted Expression 2 it is usually the loop condition and it is relational expression or logical expression Expression 3 it is usually for modifying the value of loop variable and it is assignment statement These three expressions may be comma expression That is to say each expression can be composed with several expressions Three expressions are options and can be omitted The statement in general form is loop body statement Semanteme of for statement is 1 First calculate the value of expression 1 259 2 Then compute the value of expression 2 If the value is true not 0 loop body is executed once more otherwise exit the loop 3 Calculate the value of expressi
106. 2 RS485 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 NONE EVEN ODD NONE Support functions 418 Online simulation Extension mode 3 Operable register and address range Register Name Address Format Input Range 0 0 15 7 Bit output image register dddd 0 1998 Word variable storage 8 bit register each AQW d word occupies two addresses Word analog output write only Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 11 Appendix 11 1 How to export data with U disk or SD card SK series touch screen supports to export historical data historical alarm and screen snap with U disk or SD card How to export historical data with U disk or SD card 1 Insert U disk or SD card 2 Triggering LB60125 to be ON HMI will copy all historical alarm files to SD card Triggering LB60126 to be ON HMI will copy all historical data files to SD card Triggering LB60127 to be ON HMI will copy all historical alarm files to U disk
107. 200 38400 57600 1 15200 Yes No Yes Yes Yes 7 8 EVEN ODD NONE 1 2 0 255 0 255 Address Format Input Range Remark ddd ddd dddd ddd ddd dd dd dddd ddd ddd ddd 404 1 128 1 128 1 1024 1 256 1 256 1 32 1 32 1 1024 1 256 1 256 1 2048 Bit digital input read only Bit digital output Bit bit register Bit system bit register Bit bit register at power off Word analog input Word analog output Word word register Word system word register Word word register at power off Address Format Input Range Remark Bit digital input read only a e ddd 1 2048 B anion OO M dddd 1 8192 Bit bit register a sS ddd 1 4096 Bit system bit register ddd 1 2048 Bit bit register at power off dd 1 512 Word analog input dd 1 512 Word analog output dddd 1 8192 Word word register ddd 1 2048 Word system word register ddd 1 2048 Word word register at power off oa e e d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 21 Omron device driver This device driv
108. 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 7 8 EVEN ODD NONE 1 2 0 255 0 255 Extension mode 3 Operable register and address range SYSMAC C CPM Series Register Name HR Bit LR Bit AR Bit rs SYSMAC CS CJ Series Register Name CIO Bit W Bit A Bit A it i dddd DD dddd DD dddd DD dddd DD ddd ddd dddd dddd dddd dddd ddd dddd dddd DD dddd DD dddd DD dddd DD dddd DD dddd dddd dddd dddd dddd dddd Address Format Input Range 406 0 0 4095 15 Bit I O relay 0 0 4095 15 Bit hold relay 0 0 4095 15 Bit link relay 0 0 4095 15 Bit memory aid relay 0 255 Bit timer status 0 255 Bit counter status 0 4095 Word I O relay 0 4095 Word hold relay 0 4095 Word link relay 0 4095 Word memory aid relay 0 255 Word timer value 0 9999 Word general data area Remark 0 0 3189 15 Bit core I O area 0 0 6143 15 Bit working area 0 0 511 15 Bit holding area 0 0 959 15 Bit auxiliary area read only 7 168Bit AO0000 A447 15 0 0 32767 15 Bit general data area 0 4095 Bit timer status 0 4095 Bit counter status 0 3189 Word core I O area 0 6143 Word working area 0 511 Word holding area 0 959 Word auxiliary area read only 448 Word A000 A447 dddd 0 32767 Word general data area V dddd 0 4095 Word current value of timer V dddd 0 4095 Word current value of counter Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e DD indicates the hexadecimal and the input
109. 4 4 will appear s SEWork shop i Whether delete selected picture Figure 4 4 Screen deletion confirmation Click OK to complete the deletion operation 94 A Deleted screen can never be recovered Thus be careful to execute this command 4 1 4 Copy screen with SK Workshop Copy Screen command is used to copy the screen in the current project The steps are as follows Click the screen to be copied in Screen options in the Project Manager right click it to call the right click menu and then choose Copy option in the menu Then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 5 will appear Input the name in this dialog and click OK to complete copying You can click Cancel to cancel the copy operation i Copied to the current screen x Screen Ham Figure 4 5 Copy screen 4 2 Graph editing commands of SKWorkshop 4 2 1 Assemble and disassemble of Sk Workshop Assemble command is a group command used to assemble two or more graph objects in the current screen to a whole graph object The objects to be assembled may be graphs drawn by designers or users or graphs from picture library of the system or other controls such as alarm control and trend chart After assembling the original properties of the graph elements will not be kept An assembled object graph or control is a whole image and can be saved as library control for future use helping to save much time of the users Disassemble command is used to
110. 400 57600 1 15200 Data bit length 7 7 8 Parity check bit EVEN EVEN ODD NONE Stop bit length 1 1 2 PLC station number 1 0 255 HMI station number 0 0 255 Support functions Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Extension mode eS Operable register and address range Macro Smart FC4A Remark a ddd 0 255 Bit external switch value input read only a ae ddd 0 255 Bit external switch value output M dddd 0 1023 Bit internal relay M ddd 0 215 Bit internal register OO R O ddd 0 255 Word shift register O D ddd 0 1299 Word data register ddd 0 127 Word current value of timer ddd 0 127 Word current value of counter Macro Smart FCSA Register Name Address Format Input Range Remark ey ddd 0 255 Bit external switch value input read only OO ddd 0 255 Bit external switch value output a ee dddd 0 2047 Bit internal relay ddd 0 215 Bit internal register a o b255 Wond shit register OO D ddd 0 42000 Word data register ddd 0 255 Word current value of timer ddd 0 255 Word current value of counter Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in Different device models may support different register names and the range may be dif
111. 422 RS485 Baud rate 19200 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 Data bit length 8 7 8 Parity check bit NONE EVEN ODD NONE Stop bit length 2 1 2 PLC station number l 1 31 HMI station number 0 0 255 Offline simulation Yes Support functions Online simulation Yes 382 z 908 gt 3 Operable register and address range 0 0 0 0 255 7 S Bit N Bit 2 0 0 2 255 7 2 0 2 255 8 0 255 255 T ACC T_PRE C ACC C PRE 4 0 255 255 5 0 255 255 Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 9 Hitachi device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Hitachi E EH series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Hitachi E EH series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Hitachi E EH series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Hitachi E EH series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Hitachi E EH se
112. 509 password of user 7 reset after completion Modify the password as 60511 cache of user 8 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 8 to cache region password at 1 auto as 60519 password of user 8 reset after completion Operating system R R R 60560 version 40 characters Operating records Ss a a a 2 a a a Z 60600 enabled Operating records is recorded at 1 Operating records 60601 items Display the current operating record items 351 8 3 RWI Recipe number register Display recipe designated by recipe number The corresponding recipe data can be displayed in RWI when Recipe memory address designating recipe number 352 9 Connection method of SK Workshop multi screen multi unit This Chapter presents the multipoint connection methods of Samkoon SK series touch screen including one unit multi screen connection one screen multi unit connection and practical function penetration connection 9 1 One unit multi screen connection method of SK Workshop Samkoon SK series touch screen can connect with PLC in the form of one device with multiple screens through MODBUS communication protocol All touch screens connect with each other one by one The first screen is connected with PLC You can set all touch screens to be slave station and PLC to be primary station Double click com1 connection in project manager to
113. 6 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Melsec QOOJ series PLC terminal is MD8M RS232 Melsec QC24N module SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Melsec QC24N module terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting v MITSUBISHI Select MITSUBISHI in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Melsec FXxn QO0J C24N series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Melsec FX2N Melsec FX FX2N FX3U 3G Q_C24N Q00J RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 EVEN EVEN ODD NONE Support functions 397 Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Yes s U Operable register and address range Melsec FXxn FX3 U 3G 0000 0 377 Bi e input coil read only 0000 0 377 Bi dddd 0 7999 Bi dddd 8000 8999 Bit Gata output coil e intermediate relay cote special intermediate relay dddd 0 999 Bit status bit dddd 0 256 Bit timer status dddd 0 256 Bit counter status dddd dd 0 00 7999 15 Bit bit of 16 bit register dddd 0 7999 Word register dddd 8000 8999 Word special register TV dddd 0 255
114. 66 Color word space and position Used to set the text color word space and alignment mode under the current state When the total numbers of languages is more than in the Language option of the Project Manager and the language other than language 1 is chosen these three function options will be invalid and the same text color word space and position as that in language 1 will be applied Off Picture and On Picture Here you can add pictures of different formats to different state according to the Picture Source When you have chosen the desired picture it will be automatically added to General tab When you choose the option of Fit to Object the picture will be of the same size as the control set in the General tab Fit object size If this option is chosen the size of the graph is the same as the control in the General tab and the Edge Distance and Position options will be invalid and hidden When importing a picture from external files there will be a Transparent option which is used to change a specified color to transparency When flicker is chosen the flickering screen will be the screen at ON OFF state and the default frequency is 1s To change this frequency double click Touch Screen Parameter Setting option in the Project Manager find Flickering Frequency option in the pop up dialog and then change the frequency to the desired value gt Advanced page will be displayed after you click this t
115. AN EEE REE Leia cece cate E AEE E E E E E EAE EE E ESRA 343 10 9 Hitacmidevice dr iVe iuen A T 344 FOTO HollySys device drivi omseoeiia a a a 345 WOT Tey IDEE yA rann e a a i E A E a 347 O MRO VANS CC VNC dive aa ha etch E te can hs a E NS 349 TOMS JRGyence device dive raaa aa aa A el ye ciel E A L 350 IOTA Koyo device ATN sii dares cd erste dese aad ead aac dette dts odes deeded dada de 352 eS TGS Vi Ce iy Si E E ected eet E E E ET E T E A O 353 IOT Matt shita devico driyo iani a E E E Ea 355 1O77 Mitsubishi device AGNET eene E a are E er E EE 357 10 18 Modb sdevicediive oen i a ENR R 360 1O19 Modicondevice GIy Ei nosan E A E 362 O20 Nanda device ONYO eekan nn N aa N NNE 364 lOl OMO GE VIC 6 dr Vict ar a a a a ele shea sans atau ln eta 366 1022 Siemens dEV Arive eae NG tea das ci E cl dated rad MG deel elation eerste 368 1O23 TAA Qe va edre cee chee S E N E hahateatecmutesdech adel 370 1O24 TAEDE ANICE e e e e aaieelesthatad cee owen 372 10 25 Techwaysom device diver a ao ee ee ea ee ee eee eee 373 WO226 WSOPE VIC CEI Cline toss aad reece a eae ieee eal a a aes 374 NDF AI dEV Ce CII CF cans donet segue ronagautinnsdaantanadeuttetadelsonaaadanttaadenet ined ane A 376 1O25 VY OKOSAWa device CE VC hss wears ctr cet otia aioe wetatiend dred ceo cies dete dicate netoaek 377 10 29 ZmeneH an Oey 1 Cerys a a A ALA A al eh nace 379 j2N 0 ola 6 1 ee eee E ene nee ee ee ee ee ce ee ee ee ee eee eee a ee 380 11
116. Ambient temperature for running Ambient humidity for running Shell plastic Weight Configuration software Detailed parameters of SK 8 0A pS Main technical parameters Model Number of network interfaces Number of USB main interfaces Number of SD cards USB device interfaces Number of COM interfaces Display size Resolution Brightness Color Contrast Service life of back light Touch screen plate Communication interface User memory Power supply Power consumption SK 080AS SK 080AE 12M 30 CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test Protection grade IP 65 front panel Ambient temperature 10 to 65 C for running software Detailed parameters of SK 10 2A pe Main technical parameters Number of network interfaces Ambient humidity for 10 to 90 RH non condensable running Number of USB main interfaces Number of SD cards USB device interfaces f interfaces Display size 10 2 length width 16 9 Resolution 800x480 Brightness 500cd m Color 262 144 pigments Contrast 450 1 31 Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate coneeedon USB RS232 RS422 RS485 interface User memory 12M Power supply DC24V 415 CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielect
117. C Class A Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test for running Ambient humidity for 10 to 90 RH running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Opening dimension 142x85 mm software Detailed parameters of SK 5 0A SK 5 0A has two types respectively SK OSOAE and SK 050AS SK 050AE is an economic type and SK 050AS is a standard type es Number of COM interfaces de 25 Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 4 wire high precision touch plate interface Power supply DC24V 15 Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test for running Ambient humidity for 10 to 90 RH running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Opening dimension 157x95 mm software Detailed parameters of SK 5 7 Main technical parameters a 057AS SK 057AE SK 057CS SK 057CE SK 057DS SK 057DE SK 057FS eo O57FE 640x480 640x480 320x240 320x240 640x480 640x480 320x240 320x240 Number of network interfaces Number of USB main interfaces cards 26 Outline 176x130x39 176x130x39 202x144x40 202x144x40 dimension Opening 164x134 164x134 193x139 193x139 dimension Tach 1 interfaces E a l 2 interfaces Display size 5 7 length width 4 3 Brightness 400cd m Service life of back light 60 000 hours a 5 wire high precision touch plate plate gnp p Communication USB RS232 RS422 RS485 interface
118. C language 1 Integer Integer includes integer constant and integer variable The integral constant is the integer constant In C language there are three kinds of integer constant octal hexadecimal and decimal 2 Integer constant 1 Octal integer constant The octal integer constant must begin with 0 That is to say 0 is the prefix of octal integer constant Its value is 0 7 Octal constant is usually unsigned The followings are the legal octal 015 decimal 13 0101 decimal 65 0177777 decimal 65535 The followings are the illegal octal 256 without prefix 0 03A2 contained non octal codes 0127 with negative sign 2 Hexadecimal integer constant The hexadecimal integer constant is prefixed with 0X or ox Its value is 0 9 A F or a f 241 a 4 The followings are the legal hexadecimal OX2A decimal 42 OXAO decimal 160 OXFFFF decimal 65535 The followings are the illegal hexadecimal 5A without prefix 0X 0X3H contained non hexadecimal codes Decimal integer constant The octal integer constant has no prefix Its value is 0 9 The followings are the legal decimal 237 568 65535 1627 The followings are the illegal decimal 023 prefix 0 is forbidden 23D contained non decimal codes In the program these notations are distinguished by prefix Therefore do not mistake the prefix in writing to avoid incorrect result When the suffix of integer constant is on the 16 bit computer its basic integer
119. Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the Y coordinate is the value of LW2 Moving along both X and Y axis The graph moves in both horizontal and vertical direction the movement range along X axis should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate Ceiling and the movement range along Y axis should be between the Y Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 the X coordinate is the value of LW2 and the Y coordinate is the value of LW3 Proportional horizontal moving along the X axis The graph moves in horizontal direction only and the movement range should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Proportional vertical moving along the Y axis The graph moves in vertical direction only and the movement range should be between the Y Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Proportional reverse horizontal moving along the X axis The graph moves in horizontal direction only and the movement range should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Proportional reverse vertical moving along the Y axis The graph moves in vertical direction only an
120. Direction O Right Alarm sort O By Time Reversal Figure 7 28 Dialog box of alarm bar e Speed movement speed of alarm content e Direction select the movement direction of alarm bar from right to left or left to right e Alarm sort select the time sort of alarm content Select alarm controls in toolbar and set the content and parameter of alarm display in its dialog box as shown in figure 7 29 336 Al AlaraControl Im apoooo Fr ame Title Text BG Color Language Language Font Size 10 bal Border col Font Size E Text Color Ea A BENI Font Rows E BG Color Time Disp HH MM w Text Color Data DiseDD MMeTY Time Time o Select all alarm content Date Message Message Figure 7 29 Dialog box of alarm controls 7 8 Recipe configuration of SKWorkshop In manufacturing field recipe describes the proportional relation of different ingredients used for production of some product which is a set of parameter setting values corresponding to some variables during manufacturing For example the bakehouse has a basic ingredient recipe for bread production which lists all compositions used during bread production e g water flour sugar egg and sesame oil etc and all optional ingredients e g fruit nutlet and chocolate chips etc All of these optional ingredients can be added to basic recipe to produce various kinds of bread For another example in steel plant a recipe may be a
121. Display Axis Major Scale la d Text Display Text Minimum Mazimm 100 Font Size yt Fractional Figure 4 41 Scale dialog gt In the Scale dialog as shown in the figure above SK Workshop provides options such as color coordinate axis and text options In Color options you can choose line color and text color In Axis options you can choose whether to display the axis and define the precision of the main scale and sub scale either by means of the fine tuning button or direct typing in In Text options you can choose whether to display text and can change the maximum and minimum value of the scale the Font Size and the Fractional Digits of the scale gt After modifying the scale properties click OK button to close the dialog Then in the picture editing window the mouse will become iN Move the mouse to a position where the scale will be displayed left click the mouse and drag it to another appropriate position before left clicking again The system will automatically draw a scale See Figure 4 42 116 Figure 4 42 An example of a scale drawn gt A scale drawn following the above steps is as shown in the first left scale in the figure above If you want to change it to the form of the second left scale in the figure above first choose the scale move the mouse to one of the height sides press down the left key and drag the mouse when the mouse becomes E and have the mouse pass
122. EEEIEE 268 Tou Setting of communication screen Of SK WorkShoP cccccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaas 268 dea Setimes Of SK WOrksShOp 2 Are eee ee ae ee EOT 270 Tal Language of SKK W OFKSHOPiioisesctcotaciedeos ieatdeaniendectanevdestaeadennugeneoieeh dyeudeeeneedgetennns 270 T22 Parameter setting of touch screen of SK Workshop ccccsssssseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 276 7 23 HM Estamsot SK W OF KSNOD at icantcond catch a a leash N S 281 P24 PEC Control OL Sk Works hO Bessy ices sauce aioe Band A A Bese Aas Be Noxtaeeed 282 Ta Clock r SK W OLK SHO ior fart os ents e a a Meee dances 284 7 2 6 Pale prorect OF Sk Work MOP a se acco ER EE EEEE RE EEE ETE 286 hawt TIVE OTE CUO 1 SK Workshopsessie a E E a EA 286 7 2 8 Variable table Control or SK WOorkshop 620435ncneav AE anne 288 Tae Screech ol SK W OPK SHOP asec hierebeae chee a setuSdat blveiee aun a 289 7 4 Window or SK WOTKSDOD easi a a a a 290 To Historical data collector of SK Workshop cccccccccsssssssessseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 290 7 6 Alarm seine of SK WOrkshOperscciet alt tet A aioe arel ance uel ators 294 7 6 1 Digital alarm log of SK WorkShoP ccccccccccccececeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeees 294 7 6 2 Analog alarm log of SK Workshop cccccececccccceeecaceeeessssesseeeeecceeeeesesseaeageaeeees 300 Tals Alarm display controls of SK Workshop cccccccccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeseeeseeee
123. HMI configuration project to PC Y Y V WV Privilege operation You can use this password to carry out all privilege based operations 83 3 2 3 Connection with printer Click Connection with Printer dialog as shown in Figure 3 7 HEI Parameter Setting Set User Password HMI connected to the printer Settings l Str F Upen printing funFrinter Events bespeak print attribute to set C Print serial number F Frint date Printer port F Print time F Frint expand date YYYY MN Baud rate C Print extended time M H M F Check the window error Data bit C Print standard time H M 5 F Character pattern print Parity check Print accurate time H M 5 ME Download set m Download matliSB IP Address O Fort Stop Bit Download images options Clear History Alarm i Keep pictures for thi Start the Program Se O Fut the pictures int Clear History Data notice To Suggestions will Download Ree Figure 3 7 Connection with printer dialog gi a a gt This dialog contains some parameters for HMI connection with printer and you can set these parameters basing on the printer type gt Downloading setting Downloading mode You can choose to download through USB connection or Ethernet If Ethernet is chosen you need to set IP address and port number IP address and port number of HMI Clear historical alarming record Whether to clear the historical a
124. Level before the flip Level after flip Figure 4 12 Contrast before and after horizontal overturning of single graph object See Figure 4 13 for horizontal overturning of multiple graph objects 98 Level before the flip tevil after fig Figure 4 13 Contrast before and after horizontal overturning of several graph objects gt Vertical overturning Vertical rotation allows designers to overturn a chosen graph object or several graph objects by 180 around a horizontal center line Use of the vertical overturning command is simple First choose one or more graph objects then click Vertical a l s Overturn command in Rotary option in Edit menu or click vertical overturn button W in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Vertical Overturn command in Rotary option in the right click menu See Figure 4 14 for vertical overturning of single graph object Vertical flip after Figure 4 14 Contrast before and after vertical overturning of single graph object See Figure 4 15 for vertical overturning of multiple graph objects Se ee Vertical flip before Vertical flip after Figure 4 15 Contrast before and after vertical overturning of several graph objects 4 2 4 Align of SK Workshop 99 Align is also a group commands allowing designers to align several graph objects This command can be used only when several graph objects are chosen To select several graph objects you may click the o
125. Link ID Link Hame Connecting I COMI HMI Site Local w f Sa OM port master slave mode port Connection 5 MITSUBISHI Melsec FA2H CPU Port Figure 8 18 General page of property setting for remote HMI communication port 366 fi Communication Port Properties General Far ameter Communication Parameters Other iai HI Address Baud rate T l FLE Address 1 Data bits Communication o Check otop Bits 1 Overtime time S i re re default Se Retry Times j3 Address Model Standard H wl PLC Continuous addi 3e Spare set parameters Spare parame Spare paramet Spare parame Spare paramet Figure 8 19 Parameter page of property setting for local HMI communication port Other parameters are defaulted Then the remote HMI parameter setting is completed v Note the above setting is the software setting for two screen penetration v Note in multi screen penetration the COM2 setting in remote HMI is same to that of local and the like v Note as all communication data will be changed with PLC through local COMI the communication speed in multi screen connection will become slow 10 Device driver of Sk Workshop This Chapter will make a detailed introduction of devices to connect with SK series touch screen of Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd It is important to set the I O drive for configuration The devices to connect with SK series touc
126. M2 1 Usage PUTCHARS PortID Data Length Example char Data S5 0x02 0x30 0x31 Ox4d OxSe int Length checksum PortID Length 5 PortID 0 PUTCHARS PortID Data Length 19 SWAPB Description Swap the low byte and high byte of the specified value Usage result SWAPB source Example short source 0x1234 result result SWAPB source result 0x3412 20 SWAPW Description Swap the low word and high word of the specified value Usage result S WAP W source Example int source 0x12345678 287 int result result S WAP W source result 0x56781234 21 SETBIT Description Set specific bit to be ON or OFF Usage result SETBIT source bit_pos 1 Example short source Ox4 short bit pos 2 result result SETBIT source bit_pos 1 result 1 22 XORSUM Description Use XOR to calculate checksum Usage checksum XORSUM source sizeof source Example char source 5 Oxl 0x20 0x3 0x48 0x5 short checksum checksum XORSUM source 5 ecksum 0x6f 23 DELAY Description Set a delayed time Usage void DELAY int dwMilliseconds Example int dwMilliseconds 1000 DELAY dwMilliseconds delay 1000 milliseconds 24 GETBUFFERLENGTH This function is applied for free port communication only 288 Description Get buffer length from communication port PortID Serial Port ID COM1 0 COM2 1 Success return buffer length fa
127. Power supply DC24V 415 Power 4 consumption W Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 IP 65 ont panel Ambient temperature for 10 to 65 C running Ambient humidity for 10 to 90 RH running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Configuration software SK Workshop 4 0 0 Detailed parameters of SK 7 0A Main technical parameters Number of network interfaces 27 Number of USB main interfaces Opening dimension 211x145 mm USB device i l interfaces Number of COM i 2 interfaces Display size 7 length width 16 9 Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate interface Power supply DC24V 15 Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test for running i hum Ay OF 10 to 90 RH non condensable running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC software Detailed parameters of SK 7 2A pS Main technical parameters Number of network interfaces Number of USB main interfaces Opening dimension 186x156 mm USB device l interfaces Number of COM i 2 interfaces Display size 7 length width 16 9 Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate USB RS232 RS422 RS485 interface Power supply DC24V 15 Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test 29
128. Preface Thanks very much for purchasing the SK series touch screen products of Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd is a national hi tech enterprise involved in research and development of industrial visual touch control products core technology of human machine interface as well as development manufacture and selling of advanced industrial control products With over 6 years of development it has accumulated great strengths and become leading in the related national and even global industry by virtue of its strong R amp D and innovation capability core technologies that are not based on any system and for which the Company has 100 independent intellectual property right and high cost effectiveness of the products Samkoon s SK series human machine interface HMI products are mainly used in industrial control to realize visual touch control With excellent performance they are increasingly widely used in various industries such as textile machines dyeing machines plastic and rubbery machines plastic injection molding machines packaging machines ultrasonic wave equipment electronic welding machines printing machines food making machines medical machines woodworking machines lifting equipment intelligent buildings water treatment equipments power system rail transport coal system petrochemical system air conditioning industry processing machines tire industry mon
129. Pro Ta Meen a na AT AN iit A E E ANE 230 52 3 BW ICH SIALO MENT SeT E E E at nalts 233 5 2 4 Loop stricture prostrani asen an a a a E E a aa a E E 234 525 a WINS a a knee nd tale katie nd valet allan adn pa alleles tidal 235 5 2 6 Break StAleINeM oeiia a tei ceaeab E E A plese hited oles bas 236 I2 continue state menise ceca cheat baceearns cheat aden cient acne aca teen aoe 236 5 2 8 SCC HOM SUMMA ALY aa aa E acount snaad amen ske wetenad menencoumcanademeadanees 237 5 3 Macro TUNCHIOM IMITOGU CON iensen a a sieankemtoonts 238 ope ml le How to use macro function for prograMMINng cccccccsceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesesseeeeeeeeees 238 53 2 Function button introduction in Macro eCitOL cc cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 239 5 3 3 LOW AG MEW CLE ALE IMA CKO srest EEE EEE E E NAT RS 240 5 3 4 How to insert library function in the program ccccccccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeasaeeessseseeeeeeeees 242 53 5 How to use intemal storage area in Maiore e E E 243 5 4 QuickStart A simiple tiacroDlock casccchsacscas dais iaoataasadeaseidlncatesastastebakessdonendendancdueddviasteaddemesads 244 525 APPENA ariar E E 253 O line simao o SI Works hoD e E A A E etoods 261 6 1 Offline simulation Of SK WOrksSh p a ere ai e e e e e a e 261 6 2 On line simulation of SK Workshop cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeasseeeeeesseeseeeeees 268 System soting Of SK WOLKSNOD saccccn at oeann E EN E EE aT ENET
130. SS Hour Minute Second HH MM Hour Minute Font Here you can choose common font or digital font Font size Here you can change the font size according to actual needs Text color Here you can change the color of the time display text Alignment Here you can have the time displayed on left side on right side or in the middle left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 5 14 Date display of Sk Workshop Date Display control is mainly used to display system date Click Date Display control icon s 9 dialog as shown in Figure 4 111 will appear 207 in the tool bar and then a Date display l Date display Format Separator Font Font Size C Left onoono 12 06 12 Border Color Bis Color Fattern said YY MM DD Alignment O Center Figure 4 111 Date display dialog Format Format of date display including 9 formats for example gt Separated by YY MM DD Year month day MM DD YY Month day year DD MM YY Day month year gt Separated by YY MM DD Year month day MM DD YY Month day year DD MM YY Day month year gt Separated by YY MM DD Year month day MM DD YY Month day year YYYY MM DD Year month day MM DD YYYY Month day year DD MM YYYY Day month year YYYY MM DD Year month day MM DD YYYY Month day year DD MM YYYY Day month year YYYY MM DD Year month day MM DD YY
131. See Figure 4 32 Figure 4 32 An example of an ellipse circle drawn 4 3 8 Polygon of Sk Workshop Choose Polygon command in Draw menu or click Polygon command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw polygon in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a polygon will be drawn left click the mouse or press down and hold and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be the starting position of the polygon to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically Move the mouse to other appropriate positions and each time the left key is clicked a side of the polygon will be drawn Right click the mouse to complete polygon drawing See Figure 4 33 Figure 4 33 Drawing a polygon gt To change the shape of the polygon first click the polygon and then several green dots will appear on the polygon frame depending on number of sides of the polygon indicating that the polygon has been chosen Then move the mouse to any of these dots and the mouse will change to Press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to a desired 110 target position of this point of the polygon to change the lengths and positions of the two lines connecting these two points Finally release th
132. Size Center CG Right Figure 4 77 ASC character display dialog In this dialog you can set the monitor address of the connected device to be displayed font size of the texts to be displayed and some other properties gt Monitor The control reads the value of a specified address and displays it on the control gt Total word number Maximum number of characters that can be displayed for the monitored address gt Font size Size of the characters to be displayed gt Swap between higher and lower bytes Change the higher bytes of the monitored address with the lower bytes gt Password If this option is chosen the control does not display specific characters but 663K 99 instead gt Use UNICODE Display the value of the monitored address with Unicode codes gt Align Align the displayed characters on the left in the middle or on the right basing on user selection Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern If transparent option is chosen the BG color setting will be ineffective 200 Refer to Bit Button control for use of the Visibility tab 4 5 11 ASCII character entry of Sk Workshop abl Pe Click ASCII Character Entry icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 105 will appear l ASCII Character Entry i Border Co FG Color
133. Tick Col Axis Tick Col ixis Tick Col Axis Tick Col a Humber of Majed a3 Humber of Majja a Time space fol Display Time Show Marks Format HH MM Tick i Font izei i Tate Hour Minute ees F Shown how an Second Figure 4 60 XY Axis tab of Trend Chart X Axis Show Ticks Defining whether to show scales of X axis Show Y Axis Grid Defining whether to show grids of Y axis Axis Tick Color Changing the color of X axis tick Grid Color Changing the color of X axis grids Number of Major Number of major ticks of X axis Number of Sub Number of sub ticks of X axis Display time Set the format of time display and the font size of the time displaying text Time range module Set the time range displayed in the trend chart Y Axis Show Ticks Defining whether to show scales of Y axis Show X Axis Grid Defining whether to show grids of X axis Axis Tick Color Changing the color of Y axis tick Grid Color Changing the color of Y axis grids Number of Major Number of major ticks of Y axis Number of Sub Number of sub ticks of Y axis 135 Show Marks Defining whether to show marks of Y axis Font Size Changing font size of marks on Y axis Min Minimum value of ticks of Y axis Max Maximum value of ticks of Y axis Total Digits Maximum digits of the data displayed Fractional Digits Maximum fractional digits of the data displayed Display multiple axes Whether to display
134. Type Here you choose the address type for data transfer including bit word double word Number of Word Bit Here you enter the length of the data to be transferred from 1 to 32 2 Address Source Address Source address of the data transfer The type of this address must be the same as the address set in Address Type option in Attribute above Destination Address Destination address of the data transfer The type of this address must be the same as the address set in Address Type option in Attribute above The source address and the destination address should not be the same PLC 4 4 17 Multifunction button of Sk Workshop Multifunction Button can be used to complete multiple steps of user defined operations by single control It helps to simplify user operations and make operation more convenient Create a new Multifunction Button or double click an existing Multifunction Button to enter the property dialog 158 8 Function eneral Label Advanced Visibility m moon Border Color BG Color Pattern Solid Available Functions Already Add Funetions cet Coil Set Coil L Reset Coil Reset Coil LBO Coil Turn _ Screen Jump to Screen Ho Screen Jump Setting Data User Intput Add Coil Inching tate Macro Use Macro e Function tab 1 Button appearance Here you can set shape color and pattern of the button 2 Available functions Multiple functions are listed for users to
135. When the Display Type is Horizontal you can choose Left or Right for this option When the Display Type is Vertical you can choose Up or Down for this option gt Use touch address to change the flow direction to reverse if the value of the Touch Address is the same as the value of the Valid State set by the user the flowing direction of the flowing block will be changed to the opposite direction to the Flowing Direction For example if the Flowing Direction set by the user is Left this option is chosen the Touch Address is LB2 and the Valid State is 1 then when the value of LB2 is 1 the flowing direction of the flowing block is changed to right and when the value of LB2 is 0 the flowing direction is changed back to left gt Blocks Blocks refer to the quantity of the flow units from 1 to 30 gt No border When this option is checked the border of the Flow Block will be hidden gt Flowing speed The choices include fixed flowing speed and dynamic flowing speed Fixed flowing speed Three flowing speeds are available that is Fast Normal and Slow This speed is set by the manufacturer as a default Dynamic flowing speed This speed is depending on a word address and the value of the address is only valid between 1 and 10 When the value of the address is 0 the flowing block will not move when the value is 1 the flowing block flows at the maximum speed when the value is 10 the block flows at the minimum
136. YY Month day year 208 DD MM YY Day month year DD MM YYYY Day month year gt Font Font of the text displayed gt Font size Here you can change the font size according to actual needs gt Text color Here you can change the color of the date display text gt Alignment Here you can have the date displayed on left side on right side or in the middle k gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern 4 5 15 Day of week display of Sk Workshop Day of week Display control is mainly used to display day of week Click Day of week Display control icon fe in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 112 will appear 209 a Day of Week Display State T Border Color sunday i Bi Color Fattern Figure 4 112 Day of week display dialog gt State You can set different border colors foreground colors background colors and patterns for different states by changing the value of the state Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Click Text tab and you can modify text display properties here such as the text to be displayed such as changing Sunday to Chinese border interval font size tex
137. a a a z Modify the password a 60441 cache of user 1 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 1 to cache region password at 1 auto 2 60449 password of user 1 reset after completion Modify the password a 60451 cache of user 2 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 2 to cache region password at 1 auto a 60459 password of user 2 reset after completion Modify the password a 60461 cache of user 3 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 3 to cache region password at 1 auto 60469 password of user 3 reset after completion Modify the password 60471 cache of user 4 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 4 to cache region password at 1 auto 60479 password of user 4 reset after completion Modify the password 60481 cache of user 5 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 5 to cache region password at 1 auto 60489 password of user 5 reset after completion Modify the password 60491 cache of user 6 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 6 to cache region password at 1 auto 60499 password of user 6 reset after completion Modify the password 60501 cache of user 7 16 characters in length Enable modifying Modify the password of user 7 to cache region password at 1 auto a 60
138. a SK series touch screen uses RJ45 connector Modbus device terminal is RJ45 2 Software setting 400 Y Select Modbus in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Modbus device for PLC setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen RTU Master RTU RTU_S ASCH ASCIL S Master RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 8 7 8 NONE EVEN ODD NONE l 1 2 l 0 255 0 0 255 Yes Yes Yes Note The function code for writing RTU S and ASCII S data is 0x10 regardless of data length e ifthe PLC station number is 0 it is in broadcasting mode 3 Operable register and address range ddddd 0 65535 Bit output coil ddddd 0 65536 Bit input coil read only ddddd DD 0 00 65535 15 Bit bit of 16 bit input register read only ddddd DD 0 00 65535 15 Bit bit of 16 bit output register ddddd 0 65535 Word 16 bit input register read only ddddd 0 65535 Word 16 bit output register ddddd 0 65535 Double word input register reversing to 3x double word high low 16 bit read only ddddd 0 65535 Double word output register reversing to 4x double word high low 16 bit Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e DD indi
139. aa 201 4 6 7 INMessage boardsol SK W O1KShOp onson eae eee ees 204 4 6 8 Data group display of SK Workshop ccccccccessssssesseeeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeaaaasseeesseseseeeeeess 205 4 6 9 User defined keyboard of SK Workshop ccccccccccssssssssseeeececceeeeeeeeeeeaaeesseseseeseeeeeees 207 AGIO RECIPE SEIECIOMOL SK WOLKS MOP iacieiece nce tata cieiihadetatinnd adh trades dittia diniioadetaeds 210 4 6 11 Recipe data display of SK Workshop sersem er e E a E a eRe 211 4 6 12 Operation record display of SK Workshop ccccccssssesssssseeecceeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 213 4 7 Control operation introduction Of SK Workshop cccccsssssssssseeeccecceeeeeeeeeassaeseeeeeseeeeeeeees 215 MaC e al ine eirraei on astonien A A A A tations 217 5 1 Mmitroductionto lan tase act c aii te eee ela Se ea Sie eee oo a 217 5 1 1 Data typeof laneta e nianna a der ueshusnandeeenen 217 aol Initial value of variable and type CONVETSION ccsseeseesseeeccceceeeeeeeeeaasaeeesseseeeeeeeees 222 lee Basic operatorand CX PECSSTOM gccet discos su aticashuineionslcy Moan boemdosedde MeawhdessoncdceMeomhoaniowsten ste 223 5 1 4 e CIMenSIOMAL Atay scott aaa ea eh kh ee aS eh lad le doe ld aes 224 5 1 5 SE Cl Olir SUMIIN ALY E AT T E S ESE AS EAS S S 224 5 2 C Language programming preliminary ccccccccccccccccceceeesseesesseeeseccceceeeeeeeeeaasseeeseeseeeeeeees 228 SAd SOMEN LOFC 0 0 2 4 20 Bena e E T A 228 522 Branc Structure
140. aaa Atata AI PTB Aaa PSB PA A PIS Aaa BIG I Batata BATS DE WaT aa WH Fee ma Fie Installation opening size Side Figure 1 11 Installing dimensions of SK 104AS SK 104AE Installing dimension of SK 12 1A Figure 1 12 shows the product dimensions mm of SK 121 AS SK 121AE The outline dimension is 33825365 and the installing opening dimension is 330x246 338 mm Sam koon m pug Front The back J40 m m OFS g Installation opening size Figure 1 12 Installing dimensions of SK 121 AS SK 121AE 1 4 Structure of the touch screen The overall structure of Samkoon touch screen consists of display area indicator light power supply and communication interfaces The colors of all models of touch screens are designed according to relevant industrial standards with high dirtying resistance and being suitable for use under bad conditions of plants Indicator lights are equipped on the front panel to indicate equipment failure The power supply module and the communications interfaces are all located at the bottom of the touch screen meeting design standards 1 4 1 Power supply The power supply interface of Samkoon SK series touch screen is located in the back panel It uses DC24V power supply 15 and isolated power input effectively shielding from interference and enhancing the anti interference capability of the whole system Figure 1 13 is a view of the power supply module Figure 1 13 Power
141. ab See Figure 4 78 167 a Bit Button m e e m m Genaral Label Advanced Visibility Touch Availability Controlled by Bit Control Bil Available tO 1 O T C Display element invalid logo C Controlled by User Level Hotificati State 1 Hotice register Address Type 1B Bit Unsigned w SetValue Figure 4 78 Advanced tab of bit button Controlled by bit When this option is checked if the Effective State is 1 then the Bit Button can be effectively touched when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 1 if the Effective State is 0 then the Bit Button can be effectively touched when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 0 Controlled by User Level You can choose several options basing on the actual needs After setting the touch level of this control will be compared with the Default User Level in the User Password Setting in the Touch Screen Parameter Setting to determine whether the control is touchable For example if option 2 and 3 are chosen in the Effective Level Controlled in the Advanced Tab of the control and the User Password Setting in the Touch Screen Parameter Setting is as shown in Figure 4 79 168 HET Parameter Setting x HI Parameter Setting Set User Password li HMI connected to the printer Settings stead f User 1 Star User 2 H Etar eee nicniad user
142. addresses of the connected equipment iia XY trend chart used to create a XY trend chart control in the current screen to monitor the proportion between the values of two continuous addresses of the connected equipment ie Data group display used to create a data group display control in the current screen to display several groups of data in the trend chart PX Historical trend chart used to create a historical trend chart control in the current screen to display historical data in the trend chart S Historical record display used to create a historical record display control in the current screen to display historical data collected A Alarming control used to create an alarming box control in the current screen to display the date time and messages of each alarm Dynamic alarming bar used to create a dynamic alarming bar in the current screen that can display alarming message in the form of left or right rolling a messages of historical alarms Historical alarming dialog used to create a historical alarming dialog in the current screen to display the date time and Ty DA Timer used to create a macro timer in the current screen to control execution of macros min Message board used to create a message board control in the current screen so that you can write on the control Test toolbar Offline simulation used to directly execute offline simulation command Online simulation u
143. addresses set by designers during recipe setting of PLC or other connected devices by touching this button on the touch screen Read recipe from PLC Used to set the function of the Function Button to read recipe from PLC Then you can read the recipe parameters saved in corresponding continuous data register addresses which are write addresses set by designers during recipe setting of PLC or other connected devices to the touch screen by touching this button on the touch screen Set time and date Used to set the function of the Function Button to set time and date Then you can set internal time and time of the touch screen by touching this button on the touch screen Clear alarm Used to set the function of the Function Button to clear alarm Then you can clear chosen and confirmed historical alarm information by touching this button on the touch screen Previous recipe Used to set the function of the Function Button to previous recipe Then you can open the previous recipe of the current recipe by touching this button on the touch screen If the current recipe is the first recipe or there is only 1 recipe the recipe parameters will not be changed by touching Next recipe Used to set the function of the Function Button to next recipe Then you can open the next recipe of the current recipe by touching this button on the touch screen If the current recipe is the last recipe or there is only 1 recipe
144. ally three options are provided that is Local FLASH U disk and SD card and you can choose a suitable option basing on actual needs The default setting is Local FLASH gt System alarming Enable system alarming Whether to use the system alarming function If this option is chosen whenever a system alarm appears an alarming message will be displayed on the top or bottom of each screen basing on user setting Alarming bar background color text color font and font size These are used to define the display of the alarm You can choose these options basing on actual needs Alarm bar display mode Always means always display of the alarm Periodic means periodic display and disappearing producing an effect of flashing Alarm bar position The position where the alarm bar will appear The screen saver time is effective only if screen saver is enabled After the screen saver picture appears you can simply touch the screen to go back the original screen 3 3 Downloading configuration project of SK Workshop After completion of compiling screen configuration you need to click bed Save button on the tool bar or use shortcut key Compile tool or Compile command in Ctrl S Then you can compile the configuration screen by clicking Download menu During the compiling by the system the compiling information will be displayed real time in the information output windo
145. alue chosen in Clear Screen State all the contents written on the control will be cleared automatically Refer to Visibility tab of Bit Button for the Visibility tab 228 4 6 8 Data group display of SK Workshop Data group display A data group or block refers to the data in a group of continuous addresses such as LW12 LW13 LW 14 and LW15 Data Group Display element can display the contents of several data groups at the same time for example the two data groups of LW12 LW15 and RW12 RWI15 You can use this to view and compare the data of different registers It can also draw reference curves of several data groups with the displayed point number being the horizontal axis coordinates and the each address value in each data group as the vertical axis coordinates so as to accurately and visually get the change trend of a number in a specified period At most 8 polygons can be displayed The icon of this control in the toolbar is ie Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 127 will pop up H DataGroupDisplay Kil axis ll Visibility ee Bis Color Detection Start Using Color Check Address Read Trigger Leve Channel Number Current Channel Control Address Visible Dots Show Data Point Painting Line Marker Bottom Colour Clear Trigger L Figure 4 127 General tab of data group display Background color Background color of the trend chart The change color cannot be seen u
146. amming software other than communication cable for plc connected with touch screen Please contact us for technical support as soon as possible if communication is blocked 7 System setting of SKWorkshop 7 1 Setting of communication screen of Sk Workshop The setting of communication screen means to set the communication parameter of touch screen and connecting device SK 12 1A SK 10 4A SK 10 2A SK 8 0A SK 7 2A SK 7 0A SK 7 2A SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7F have COM1 and COM2 two ports and can communicate with two different PLC at the same time The parameter of each communication screen has to be set SK 5 0A SK 4 3A SK 4 0A SK 3 5A have one port use COM1 in software and can communicate with one connecting device Double click link 1 in the link and pop up the dialog box as shown in Figure 7 1 i Communication Port Properties rerer al Parameter Link ID Link Hame Connecting I a HMI Site Setting tOM port master slave mode port 1 Connection 5 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N CPU Fort a a i dUe yA Figure 7 1 Dialog box for setting of COM1 communicate screen Users can obtain different types of PLC in option Device Service in page and still can acquire different models of the PLC in its rear option Besides users can change Connection Name and Interval of PLC Contiguous Address Click the tab Parameter in the dialog box as shown in figure 7 2 297
147. an Alarm Controls is put in screen The number of its text lines is set to 7 and other attribute values are default Then a Dynamic alarm bar is put Its attribute setting is as shown in figure 7 25 332 l Alarma Bar Border Colo Sample M S BG Color Fattern PE w Uption ta show alarm cont e Select all alarm con Text Color Ls Attribute Speed Bl a Direction Left Right Alarm sort Time C By Time Reversal Figure 7 25 Dialog box for attribute setting of dynamic alarm bar Six digit button controls are put finally The write address of digit button controls is LB1 LB6 And Alternative Monitoring and Monitoring address is same to write address are set for each digit button controls After completion of setting click the button Save in toolbar to save the project Operate the option Off line Simulation in Download in menu bar and click digit buttons of addresses LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 Then you can see that the alarm information of LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 in Digital Alarm is displayed in both Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar When click LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 again all values of them are 0 due to Alternative function set for digit button And the alarm information of LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 in Digital Alarm is displayed in neither Alarm Controls nor Dynamic alarm 29 bar gt Language It can input different alarm informa
148. anda NA 200 400 series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Nanda NA 200 400 series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Nanda NA 200 400 series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Nanda NA 200 400 series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen RENGEN COM1 COM2 NA 200 400 403 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Nanda NA 200 400 series PLC terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting v Select Nanda Auto Technology in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Nanda NA 200 400 series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item PLC Communication port Baud rate Data bit length Parity check bit Stop bit length PLC station number HMI station number Support functions Offline simulation Online simulation Extension mode U Nanda NA 200 Register Name 2 2 2 2 Nanda NA 400 Register Name Default Parameters Nanda NA 200 RS232 9600 8 NONE Operable register and address range Setting Range Nanda NA 200 400 RS232 RS422 RS485 1200 2400 4800 9600 19
149. appear and you can enter a number here as the mid point value For example if 70 is entered then the bars change as shown in Figure 4 108 when the value of the monitor address increases from 0 TO eo a0 100 Figure 4 108 204 3 Modifying bar graph Move the mouse to the bar graph and left click and then 8 small green dots will appear around the bar graph Move the mouse to a dot press down the left key and drag the mouse to change the size of the bar Range tab of Bar Graph This tab is mainly used to display the value of the monitor address with different graph color and background color within preset range See Figure 4 109 Witte Graph Variable ol Low Limi High ling Low Color High Color FG Color Fe Calior he Delor a BG Color ae Figure 4 109 Range tab of bar graph gt Range display If this option is chosen you can set the lower limit higher limit lower level color and higher level color and then value of the monitored read address will be reflected with different colors in the set range gt Variable range The values of Lower Limit and Higher Limit are changing depending on the address entered by the user gt Lower limit When the value of the monitored read address is lower than this limit the pattern color and background color of the control will be the pattern color and background color set in the Lower Level Color 205 gt Higher limit When the value of t
150. ar below the user area or be changed by mouse dragging Fie Graph 2878 y 465 Enter address in control When you need to set a PLC address during property setting you can directly enter the address using keyboard The address name is not case sensitive gt State combination box In the tool bar there is a State Combination Box and here the state of Bit Button Bit Lamp Multistate Switch Multistate Lamp Graphics Move Message Display and Picture Display can be displayed and modified ON OFF 9 2 a gt When one of the above controls is chosen its current state is displayed in the State Combination Box You can change the current state using the drop down menu gt Address Find With this function you can see the use information of an address including a list of the controls using this address You can double click this information item to choose the control FindAddr Enter the Address You Want to Find The Letter Requested Case sensitive gt Enter an address and click Find and then the results will be shown in the information output window 239 Searching for lwd my Position Sereenl Flow dynamic piece flow Position Sereenl HumEntry Write Address Position Sereenl HumEntry Monitor Address 3 occurrence ls have been found Choose a result and double click it to choose the controls using this address Address Table Click Address Table the system will give
151. aracter string 3 Character may be any character in the character set However the figure can not be involved in numerical operation after been defined as character For example 5 and 5 is different S is character constant that are not involved in operation 8 Character variable The character variable value is character constant i e single character Its type specifier is char The form and written rules of character variable declaration is same with that of integer variable For example char a b As each character variable is assigned to a byte memory one character is saved only The character value is kept in the memory unit with ASCII code For example the decimal ASCII code for x is 120 and the decimal ASCII code for y is 121 Give x and y to character variable a and b a x b y Actually it is to store 120 and 121 BC in a and b unit a0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 bO 1 1 1 1 O 0 1 Therefore they can be regarded as integer C language allows to give character value to integer variable and give integer to character variable as well It can output character variable as integer and output integer as character The integer is 2 byte and character is single byte When the integer is processed as character the low eight bytes are involved only Practice charint a 49 char b char d b a 10 d a b Practice char cl c2 cl a c2 b cl c1 32 c2 c2 32 245 9 Character string constant Character string
152. aracter string occupies one more byte than assignment one by one It is used to store the ending sign of character string 0 The actual storage of array c in memory is C program 0 Wherein 0 is added by C programming system automatically As 0 sign is adopted the array length is not normally defined in initialization assignment of character string but processed by system automatically If in the mode of character string the input and output of character array becomes simple and convenient Except the initial value assignment with character string 1t can input and output the character string of one character array with printf function and scanf function at one time not requiring input output each character with do statement one by one 5 1 5 Section summary l C data type Basic type construction type pointer type and void type Classification and characteristics of basic type Type Specifier Byte Number Range Char l C character set Int 4 214783648 214783647 Short int 4 214783648 2 14783647 Long integer long int 8 922337203685477808 922337203685477807 Unsigned 4 0 4294967295 Unsigned long 8 0 1844744073709551615 Float 4 3 4E 38 3 4E 38 Double 8 1 7E 308 1 7E 308 Constant suffix L or for long int U or u for unsigned 251 F or f for float 4 Constant type Int long int unsigned float char char string symbol constant and escape character 5 Data type conversion Auto conversion The system real
153. as a minimum e Memory When Windows 9X operating system is used the memory should be 128MB or above When Windows NT operating system is used the memory should be 256MB or above When Windows 2000 or XP operating system is used the memory should be 256MB or above Graphics card Compatibility with Windows system graphics memory of 1MB or above allowing for running at 1024 768 256 colors e Hard disk The minimum hard disk occupation of Sk Workshop configuration software is 200MB e USB interface is required e Two key mouse and keyboard If the computer configuration is lower than the above requirements Sk Workshop is likely unable to be installed and operated Recommended configuration e CPU Intel Pentium 800 or above or equivalents e Memory When Windows 9X operating system is used the memory should be 256MB or above When Windows NT operating system is used the memory should be 512MB or above When Windows 2000 or XP operating system is used the memory should be 512MB or above e Graphics card Compatibility with Windows system graphics memory of 1MB or above allowing for running at 1024 768 65535 colors Hard disk Over 200MB 38 2 3 Installation of Sk Workshop configuration software SKWorkshop is a 32 digit application specially designed for standard Microsoft Windows systems Before installation of this software please confirm that the software and hardware of the computer meets the above mentioned m
154. ates or languages gt Font size Font size of the text contents entered You may choose different font sizes for different states or languages gt Color word space and position Used to set the text color word space and alignment mode under the current state When the total numbers of languages is more than 1 in the Language option of the Project Manager and the language other than language 1 is chosen these three function options will be invalid and the same text color word space and position as that in language 1 will be applied 3 Picture Click Picture tab in the Multi state lamp property dialog and then a property setting dialog as shown in Figure 4 91 will appear 185 fi NultiState Lamp General Text Picture Visibility eee Attribute ET p O Library ba File Delete Picture Po ee z aa in to A i v Fit to Object Figure 4 91 Picture tab of multi state lamp This tab is mainly used to load pictures for different states By default the picture for each state is void and you can change the picture to be displayed according to actual needs The steps are as follows Choose the state to be modified in the list choose whether the required picture is from system C library or saved in Windows click button E and add a picture from the system library or a directory of Windows Then you can see pictures corresponding to different states when you click the states in the list In ad
155. ation 361 Multi screen penetration Local Remote slave Remote slave station ID1 station D2 COMI com2 comi1 F COM2 COMI F COM2 PLC or control devices Figure 8 13 connection diagram of multi screen penetration E Local HMI software setting Double click the created connection and pop up communication port property setting Select COM1 in connection port Taking MITSUBISHI penetration as an example the COM1 connection of HMI is MITSUBISHI FA2N PLC The communication parameters in communication parameter should be consistent with that of PLC or connection device shown as Figure 8 14 and Figure 8 15 Communication Port Properties General Parameter Link ID Link Hame l Connecting I HMI Site Gennecti ona v Melsec FXZN CPU Fort Figure 8 14 General page of property setting for local HMI communication port 362 4 Communication Port Properties Other HMI Address PLC Address Data bits Check HOHE Over time time 5 ims 1 1 Spare set parameters Figure 8 15 Parameter page of property setting for local HMI communication port New create a connection select COM2 in the connection port select Samkoon in the connection service select Penetrate on the right The parameter is recommended to 19200 8 NONE 1 which is shown as Figure 8 16 and Figure 8 17 v Note the communication parameter should be consistent with that of connected remote slave station ID a
156. beelguabetedeus bavi 105 ASAD Scale praph Or SK W OL KSNOD sien hese eaS e smh E EE neck us suctaet TEAN 107 A513 Open ibrary Or Se W OL SHO Pes tet csecteavtasteiesesead er e A e ASS 108 45 14 Build lbrary of SK W Orkshop csucne 02 E A E E Aan 110 4 4 Advanced controls of SK Workshop cccccccccccccssssssssseeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeaasseesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 112 4 4 1 GIF display of SK Workshop c 0sssssseeeeeeceeeeeecccccecccesassesseeeeeereeeeceeesecceesaaeees 112 4 4 2 Trend charco SE WoOrkShODerieteii oake lente lease e atest lon Shs allen a whee ee 114 4 4 3 XY Trend chart Of OK WOrkshOp ach cicsinc eisai elt A N 119 4 4 4 Historical trend chart of SK Workshop cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaasaeeeeees 120 4 4 5 Dy manne Circle OF SKY OLK SHOP ix n acevo atte veteusuausedes E a e NA 125 4 4 6 Dynamic rectangle of SK WorkShop cccccccccccceceeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeenees 126 4 4 7 Alarm controlotl SK WorkShop nasran a her ho ar E ee ee 128 4 4 8 Dynamic alarm bar of SK Workshop cccccccsssesssssseeeecceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 130 4 4 9 Historic alarm display of SK Workshop cccccccssceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 131 44 10 Graphics move OL SK W OrkShOpyssc2isaAcerenaeictieedtncuebondsatisactueeshadivntaadinensbadiniontannes 133 AAT Metro Sik Workshopen eres be So ala Sade 135 4 4 12 Historical data
157. bjects while press Shift key or press the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse This command can make the configuration screen more beautiful This group command includes several commands that are Top Align Bottom Align Vertical Centering Left Align Right Align Horizontal Centering The Same Width The Same Height and The Same Height and Width gt Top Align Top Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the top boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Top Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click Top Align button It in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Top Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move upward to align basing on the top boundaries See Figure 4 16 for a contrast before and after top align top align before top align after Figure 4 16 Contrast before and after top align gt Bottom Align Bottom Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the bottom boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Bottom Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click Bottom Align button Yin the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Bottom Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move downward to align basi
158. block will realize simple operations as following make initialization for numeral entry display control with array element value of char source 4 2 3 4 5 by Init macro then read the external input data by numeral entry display control then trigger ADDSUM macro by pressing button and display the execution result through numeral entry display control Detailed operations are shown as following Step 1 lt Create a macro gt Click the circled icon macro shortcut button and pop up the dialog box as shown in Figure 5 7 Macro Editor Step 2 lt Create macro Init gt Click new add button in the window of macro editor and pop up the dialog box as Figure 5 8 Macro Editor Input tag name Init in the edition box tag name and the source program code as shown in Figure 5 9 code edition of macro compiler 268 amp Bacro List Compile successfully list Hew Ctrlti Figure 5 7 Macro Editor 269 i Eta ae Editor include MacroInit h void Macro main IN p HMarcoiInit ToDo Specification of variables Variable Hame JDataClass Bytes BJ Write Prop tddress Type Address mmection Ty FLC Station iclick the l right mouse bes Debug Information Output Figure 5 8 Macro Compiler Macro name is composed with Arabic numerals 0 9 English characters a z A Z and underscore _ As shown in Figure 5 9 Macro Compiler input th
159. cates the hexadecimal and the input range is 0 15 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 19 Modicon device driver 401 This device driver is used by SKWorkshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Modicon NEZA TWIDO M218 series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Modicon NEZA TWIDO M218 series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Modicon NEZA TWIDO M218 series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Modicon NEZA TWIDO M218 series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Modicon NEZA TWIDO M218 series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Modicon COM1 COM2 NEZA TWIDO M218 SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Modicon NEZA TWIDO M218 series PLC terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting v Select Modicon Corp in the connection device service v Select the correspond
160. ch button in the overlain controls the screen will be switched after this button is executed and the buttons behind this screen will not be executed Similarly if a pop up input keyboard is in the overlain buttons the keyboard will pop up and the buttons behind the button will not be executed Layer 1 Step 1 Executing commands of control 1 Layer 2 Step 2 Executing data inputting pop up keyboard Layer 3 No execution 5 Macro Macro is an advanced control method for touch screen which provides more strong functions for touch screen Through programming for macro command the touch screen is given the same functions as logic and arithmetic operation with PLC Using the macro flexibly is capable to achieve many strong functions that are unavailable for conventional components and to perfect the human computer interface more SKWorkshop V4 0 provides new full macros that are different from the script language mode of other human computer interfaces and these macros are compatible with standard C Language ANSI C89 As there are many literatures about C Language and this information are available easily this chapter will not introduce syntax and basic knowledge in details to review the relevant basis of different macros but emphasize the establishment and usage of macros by instances This chapter will explain basic C Language briefly relevant usage of macroinstruction and considerations 5 1 Introduction to C language 5 1 1 Data type of
161. choose and the chosen function will be executed when the button is pressed Set Coil Set ON the address entered Reset Coil Set OFF the address entered Coil Turn Change the address entered to opposite If the bit is 0 change it to 1 if it is 1 change it to 0 Coil inching Set ON the input address when this is touched and set OFF when released Screen Jump Jump to the chosen screen You can choose the target screen by changing this option 159 Screen Index ed Eg Setting Data Write the set data to the set address You can choose Data Type Write Address and Set Data to be written Data Type 16 Bit Insig EES mman Write Add Set Data User Input Input a value and write it to the set address You can choose Data Type and Write Address When this function is executed a data entering dialog will appear you can enter data of chosen type in the dialog and then the data will be written to the set address Function User I fx Data Type 16 Bit iasi E w Write Add Choose a function and click Add to add it to the list of chosen functions When both User Input and Coil Inching are chosen only User Input is effective and Coil Inching will not be executed 3 Functions added When you choose a function it is displayed in the Functions Added area Double click it or click Modify to set or modify it and click Delete to delete it 160 During operation o
162. cle command in Draw menu or click Ellipse Circle command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw ellipse circle in the window gt To change the size of the ellipse circle first choose it and move the mouse to any of the 8 green square dots on the frame I OA of the ellipse circle When the mouse becomes t or or press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to an appropriate position Then release the left key of the mouse So far the size of the ellipse circle has been adjusted T Changing width of ellipse circle 109 li Fu Changing height of ellipse circle Changing both width and height of ellipse circle gt After completing the above steps the ellipse circle has default settings in transparency line type line width line color and filling pattern You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the 2 ellipse circle and double click or click Properties button La in the tool bar after choosing the ellipse circle At this moment a property dialog similar to that in rectangle drawing will appear gt You may adjust the properties of the ellipse circle using the pull down and fine tuning button Sk Workshop provides 15 frame line types 10 frame line widths and 21 filling patterns for ellipse circle to make the graph more beautiful and vivid
163. cluding constant setting value inputting password inputting adding and subtracting 67 Screen button command used to set screen switch in the current screen including opening a screen opening the previous screen closing and opening a screen and closing a screen Corresponding to Function command used to set in the current screen a control that realizes certain function of the operating system including closing back light confirming alarm restarting entering touch screen setting mode writing a recipe to PLC reading a recipe from PLC setting date and time clearing alarm the previous recipe the next recipe saving the current recipe moving alarm upward moving alarm downward paging down alarm paging up alarm adjusting coordinates system parameters changing user level logging off user level touch sound ON OFF alarm sound ON OFF clearing all historical data clearing historical alarm and HMI protection unlocking tj Multi function button used to create a multi function button in the current screen to perform several functions by one click Step button used to create a step button control in the current screen to perform cyclic switchover of states Radio button used to create a radio button control in the current screen so that you can click a specified state area to realize specified state E Drop down box button used to create a drop down box button control in the current screen for view and
164. constant is a character string included in double quotes For example CHINA C program 12 5 they are legal character string constants The character string constant is different from character constant Their differences are described as following 1 Character constant is included in single quotes while character string constant is included in double quotes 2 Character constant is single character only while character string constant contains one or several characters 3 A character can be given to a character variable but a character string constant can not In the C language there is no corresponding character string variable 4 The character constant occupies one byte in the memory The bytes of character string constant are equal to the bytes of character string plus 1 Save character 0 ASCII code 0 in the increased byte This is the ending symbol of character string For example the byte of C program in memory is C program 0 Although the character constant a and character string constant a has one character both their memory occupation is different a occupies one byte in the memory which is indicated as a a occupies two bytes in the memory which is indicated as a 0 symbol constant 10 Symbol constant In the C language a constant can be expressed with an identifier which is called symbol constant It must be defined before usage Its general form is define symbol constant Wherein define is a p
165. ction Ethernet option in the Connection Type There are two COM ports in SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7D SK 5 7F SK 7A SK 7 2A SK 8A SK 10 2A SK 10 4A SK 12 1A If only one PLC is connected the parameter of COM port depends on the COM port actually used SK 3 5A SK 4A SK 4 3A and SK 5A have only one COM port so you can simply choose COM1 The serial number of connection is an internal parameter that cannot be changed During configuration you may also set communication properties in the project manager and set other parameters in the communication properties 3 1 3 Communication interface setting dialog Click Next in Figure 3 2 and a New Screen dialog will pop up In this dialog you can set name and background color The default name of a new screen is the serial number of the screen and the default background color is blue When we create a 78 new screen for the first time SK Workshop software will allocate a serial number for the screen indicating the ordinal number of the screen and starting from 1 For example the serial number of the fifth screen is 5 Such serial number cannot be modified To change the background color of the new screen click the small black triangle on the right bottom corner and then a color selection dialog will pop up SK Workshop provides abundant color options Over 200 colors are provided in the color selection box for quick selection by the user If you are not sat
166. d Please store and use the machine under the environment specified in the operation instructions and user manual Storage or use under such adverse environment as high temperature high humidity frost dust corrosive gas oil stain organic solvent lubricant great vibration and shock or it may cause electric shock fire malfunction and the like Please transfer on screen data during operation only when the safety is ensured Otherwise mechanical damage or failure may be caused by mis operation Do not turn off the power while the software is working communicating with the equipment connected or it may cause data loss machine damage or failure Please use and operate under the software action environment specified in this Manual or it may cause failure or mis action Please confirm reliable and firm connection with communication cable or it may cause failure or mis action Contents Hardware ANAnU Alles tcccnacentidniemietiniess mina Ried mia RiNia eI E min E aie E 8 1 1 Gre a rE E Meare RECTAN RS AE E T MICRA E E AEE E ERE E E REEE E Ree Te Or 8 1 2 Mode and aisle PO Mepeenenene renee nee ete Reese noe Rene nee ne nae Rea enad ner ee nee cree ne sae are ee ee 8 13 Installing dimension Of SK Workshop cccccccccccccccsssssesssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeasasseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 9 1 4 Sucre or TNE TOUCH Sereen a E A A A A T A monica R 17 1 4 1 PO WEE SU DIY ernia a EE E E E A EE 17 1 4 2 Front pane kora eaa a A A E A A
167. d You may choose different font sizes for different states or languages Color word space and position Used to set the text color word space and alignment mode under the current state When the total numbers of languages is more than 1 in the Language option of the Project Manager and the language other than 211 language 1 is chosen these three function options will be invalid and the same text color word space and position as that in language 1 will be applied To modify the contents of the text first choose the item to be modified and then type in the new text in the edit box below gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become T Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 5 16 Static picture of SKWorkshop Static Picture control is mainly used to display a picture either from the library of the system or from other files with different formats You can choose the picture source according to actual needs The picture loaded by this control can be used as a background of a graph to beautify the project interface 1 Click Static Picture icon igi in the tool bar and a dialog as shown in Figure 4 114 will appear ga General wm sToooo Picture Picture Library O File Picture Po
168. d address up to 32 states Click the multi state Lamp button icon E in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 88 will appear 181 fi NultiState Lamp 1 Text Ficture Visibility State lo Border Color Bi Color Pattern selia E A m Data Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int Moni tor Addrey Total States 3 State Type Value O Bit register O Customize status Figure 4 8 Multi state lamp dialog l General gt State You can change this state value and modify the border color pattern color background color and pattern of the control under different states State type it is assumed that the number entered by the user is n Numerical value The written value is a numerical value from 0 to the total number of states less 1 Register bit The written value is the No n power of 2 For example We assume the monitored read address is LW3 and the total number of states is 8 After setting and clicking OK click on the screen to add the control into the screen add an value entering control in the screen set both the write address and monitored address to LW3 and then save the project Click the number entering control in simulation or screen and enter a desired state value in the pop up keyboard We assume the value entered 1s 2 then the value of the monitored read address is 1 and the control will display the texts under state 1 that is the text contents under State 1
169. d command in the Download menu to complete both compiling and downloading After that a dialog as shown in Figure 3 12 will pop up Use USER dowr Use of Ethernet d Figure 3 12 Download dialog Click Download then the progress bar in the middle will show the downloading progress After completion of downloading a window will pop up to prompt that the USB downloading has been completed Click OK to complete the process See Figure 3 13 87 Download configuration engineering Pegan to download configuration Are download system parameters Font file is being downloaded Is updating resource files Is being downloaded driver files Harting for calibration data ry SEForkshop i Has been completed and ok to restart HMI SRR R HERR HARARE RRR RRR R ARERR RRRRRRRR RR RR RRR RR RARER RRR RR RRR RRR ee 107 Use USE dowr O Use of Ethernet d Figure 3 13 Downloading completed Then connect the touch screen with PLC and observe in the touch screen whether the configuration results are correct Refer to Wiring part for connection between PC PLC and HMI Do not disconnect the power supply of the touch screen or PC or the data cable during data transfer and do not carry out other operations otherwise the data transfer may be adversely impacted Please install USB driver well before downloading otherwise HMI cannot be connected with PC and thus the downloading cannot be completed SKWorkshop
170. d semicolon behind the bracket of expression In this case the loop body will be regarded as void statement and not executed repeatedly All of these are the common mistakes in programming which must be attached great importance 5 2 6 break statement Break statement is used in switch statement or loop statement only It is for exiting switch statement or local loop and directing to the subsequent program As the transferring direction of break statement is specific the statement marks are not required The general form of break statement is break As shown in the above example the break statement is used in switch statement and for statement for skip Break statement provides several exits for loop statement which makes programming more flexible and convenient in some circumstances 260 5 2 7 continue statement Continue statement is used in loop body only Its general form is continue Semanteme finish this loop and not execute the other statement behind continue statement in the loop body any more turn to judge and execute the next loop condition Pay attention this statement only ends the loop on this layer and will not exit the loop 5 2 8 Section summary l 2 3 From the execution process the program is basically classified into three basic structures sequence structure branch structure and loop structure The most basic unit in program execution is statement There are five kinds of statements in C
171. d the movement range should be between the Y Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Refer to the introduction of Multi state Lamp control for setting of Text and Picture tabs Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab The position of graphics move can be controlled through the value of the last two digits of the monitor address Maximum X Y coordinate is the maximum size of the screen 4 4 11 Meter of Sk Workshop Meter control can display the value of the current linked variable using a pointer needle Generally a meter is a semicircle or circle Use of meter helps to show variables visually The steps to insert Meter control and modify its properties are as follows AN 1 Click Meter control icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 67 will appear 147 ga Deter Shape Heedle Color Bis Color Heedle Type Fine Line Backer ound Transparent Direction Clockwise O Counterclockwise Figure 4 67 Meter dialog gt Needle Color Here you can change the color of the pointer gt Needle Base Color Here you can change the color of the pointer base gt BG Color Here you can change the background color gt Transparent background Set transparent background for the control gt Pointer type There are four options those are thin straight l
172. dard List v 6 m E Langue ze SB Link Sh Link 1 ch ym Setting a HMI Parameter Seo EES HMI Status FLC Control O Clock S File Protection T HMI Protection Variable table B Screen 000 Sereentl O01 screent OU screeni Window Historical Data Loz f Alarm Log 5 Recipe Recipe 1 E lata Transport Figure 7 15 Screen option of right Key Click the root Screen with right key Then click Add Screen in popped up menu to pop up the dialog box of new screen In this dialog box set Screen Name and Background Color Then click OK to add one screen There are two ways to open other screens 1 double click screen name in Project Manager 2 click screen name with right key and select Open in popped up menu Delete screen click screen name with right key and select Delete in popped up menu to delete the screen View screen attribute 1 click screen name with right key and select Attribute in popped up menu to pop up dialog box of attribute setting or 2 select Screen Attribute in option Screen of menu bar to view or modify Copy screen right click the screen name and select copy in the pop up screen to copy the screen set the new screen name and click confirm to complete 321 7 4 Window of SK Workshop Method of adding new window is same to that of adding new screen The operation of Open Delete or View Window Attribute is a
173. develop individualized PLC communication drive upon request of users Two communication drives can be loaded at the same time in SK 12 1A SK 10 4A SK 10 2A SK 8 0A SK 7 2A SK 7 0A SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7D and SK 5 7F 4 Resources Sk Workshop provides abundant resources The picture library of SK Workshop includes 3D indicator light 3D button television 3D tank 3D pipe electron bars and the like In addition many pictures are provided with animation properties and can be used to design vivid animation It also allows for user defined picture library and inserting pictures from Windows SKWorkshop also provides controls that have abundant functions such as trend diagram and alarming controls and the like meeting the requirements of various configurations 2 2 Requirements of Sk Workshop for computer 2 2 1 Software requirements of Sk Workshop for computer 37 SK Workshop configuration software can be run in the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows NT Server 4 0 or later release e Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 or later release e Microsoft Windows 98 Me 2000 XP or later release SK Workshop will refuse to be installed if the operating system does not meet the above requirements Recommended system It is recommended to use Windows XP SP3 as the operating system 2 2 2 Hardware requirements of SK Workshop for computer The minimum hardware requirements of SK Workshop are e CPU Pentium 3 800MHz
174. disassemble a graph assembled using Assemble command to the original elements After disassembling the original properties of the elements can be recovered Disassemble command is a reverse command of Assemble command The assembling steps are as follows gt First choose the graph objects to be assembled then press Assemble command in the Edit menu or H button in the tool bar or call the right click menu and choose Assemble command in the Assemble option Figure 4 6 shows the contrast before and after assembling Figure 4 6 Contrast before and after assembling The disassembling steps are as follows gt Choose a graph object assembled using Assemble command and then choose Disassemble command in the Edit menu or 95 Disassemble command Kia in the tool button or call the right click menu and choose Disassemble command in the Assemble option Figure 4 7 shows the contrast before and after disassembling Figure 4 7 Contrast before and after disassembling Several objects can be selected using Shift key Before assembling please consider whether the elements to be assembled still need touch or monitoring after assembling as the assembled object is a whole object and the elements can be no longer touched or monitored 4 2 2 Layer of Sk Workshop Layer command is a group command used to adjust the display sequence of intersected graph objects in the screen Each graph in SK Works
175. display of SK Workshop cccccssssssessseeecceceeeeeeeeeeessaseessseeeeeeeees 137 4 4 13 Message display of SK Workshop ccccccccccccceeceeceeceaeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaseeeeeses 138 AANA PIOW DIOCK OL SK W OL KS OD ereen ice cdr oes eal oaia A noes etme ceded tees 140 AAS TaMerOl SKK WorkShop ariaa R acl AAE eee A ANA 142 4 4 16 Data transfer of SK Workshop ccccccccsssssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaseeessseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaaas 144 4 4 17 Multifunction button of SK Workshop ccc cceesssssseeccecceeeeeeceaeaeeeesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaas 145 4 5 Basic controls of OK W OF KSN OP ennir a a a aaa aaa aaa aia 148 4 5 1 Bit DUO OF SK W OLKSNOp 2 225 Siete ieee inde each ents 148 4 5 2 Word Dutton OF SK WOrkSHOp o sensce s ichconad scree sddnswandcdtecniadedsoussddesswiaddbancnncdaaunadsieaedees 156 4 5 3 PCa Or SRW OF SOP tees teetcrsd ennsdiscecise EE last etademadode E 158 4 5 4 Sereen DUTLON OF SK WOLKSNOD vecsecort cp ieandonticasicp o o E n N 160 4 5 5 Function button of SK Workshop ccccccccccccscccesssssseeeeseeeeeeececccceeeceeessssesseseeeenss 162 4 5 6 Multi state lamp of SK Workshop cccccccsssssssssseeeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 165 4 5 7 Multistate switch of SK Workshop ccccccccccccececeeceeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaeeeenses 169 4 5 8 Numeric display OL SK VW OLKS NOB i ietaascie se ndaivsactssis can desmncanacoswgsadeumseiaianecentartoneocenuoyie
176. dition you can also choose Fit to Object option If this option is not checked you can change the border interval and position of the picture in the control to beautify the control gt Fit object size If this option is chosen the size of the graph is the same as the control in the General tab and the Edge Distance and Position options will be invalid and hidden gt When importing a picture from external files there will be a Transparent option which is used to change a specified color to transparency Refer to the introduction of Bit Button for Visibility tab 186 After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen 4 5 7 Miulti state switch of Sk Workshop Multi state Switch has functions basically the same as the functions of Multi state Lamp except that in Multi state Switch data can be entered in addition to the display function The operations are as follows Click the Multi state Switch icon F in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 92will appear NultiState Switch venereal Text Picture Advanced j Visibility ID Mz0000 eee Shape m State ig A hal Border Color FG Color Bis Color Fattern State Type O Value Bit Register Customize status values Style Key entry Data Type
177. dress Address of the data register presented by the bar graph the same to read address Max The maximum value of the monitored read address that can be presented by the bar graph When the value of the monitored read address is higher than this value the bars will be full and will not reflect the change in the value of the monitor address Min The minimum value of the monitored read address that can be presented by the bar graph When the value of the monitored read address is lower than this value the bars will be empty and will not reflect the change in the value of the monitor address Variable range When this option is chosen the values of Max and Min are changing depending on the address entered by the user Data type of the address is the same as the Data Type chosen by the user Bipolar Bar Bars that can extend to both sides along with the change in the value of the data register Middle point Middle point value of the bipolar bar 203 Bar Graph BS Color Border Color F Transparent Direction O Upward Dowrew ar d O LeftWard C Rightward Data Type 1B Bit Unsigned Int Monitor EE F Variable range Figure 4 107 Bar graph dialog For example if the Max is 100 the Min is 10 the Direction is Upward and this Bipolar Bar option is checked a Middle Value entry will
178. ds Vertical If this option is checked vertical grids will be displayed indicated by a green tick in front if no indicated no display Horizontal If this option is checked horizontal grids will be displayed indicated by a green tick in front if no indicated no display gt Title Bar Here you can set Font Size Font BG Color Text Color and whether to display time and date Refer to the language functions of Alarm Display for the language related options gt Data Here you can set Font Size Text Color and maximum Rows gt Use control address This address occupies 12 consecutive address offsets The meaning of each address is as follows Address offset Controlled object of the control register address 0 indicates displaying all data 1 indicates displaying some of the data means that the starting ending time restriction will take effect _ a a a a l in Data tab Checked columns will be displayed indicated by a green tick in the box if no indicated no display i Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 151 4 4 13 Message display of Sk Workshop Functions of Message Display are similar to the functions of Multi state Lamp except that Message Display control has more total states up to 128 states The icon of this control in the tool bar is Click this button and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 71 will appear fia Bessage Display x ID mnoooo
179. e of each alarm Graphics move Used to create in the current screen a graph display box whose picture state and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Meter Used to create in the current screen a meter to monitor the change in the value of single address of the connected device Multi state switch Used to create in the current screen a multi state button to monitor change in the value of single address of the connected device by means of state change Historic record display Used to create in the current screen a display control to display the message saved by the historical record collector Message display Used to create in the current screen a display control to display preset messages e Screen menu Screen menu consists of commands used for screen operation including New Screen N Screen Properties P and Delete Screen D See Figure 2 33 Sereen lE Setting S De U New Screen Screen Properties IE Delete Screen D Figure 2 33 Screen menu New screen Used to create in the current project a new screen Screen properties Used to open the property dialog of the current screen where name and background of the screen can be set Delete screen Used to delete the current screen 59 Before deleting a screen please ensure that the screen to be deleted is the current screen and whether there are useful controls in th
180. e 173 4 5 9 INUMErIC Enthy orok WorkshOpws bn se ea ee ee Gees 176 4 5 10 ASC character display of SK Workshop ccccccccccssssssseseseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeessesseesseseeeeeeees 181 4 5 11 ASCII character entry of SK Workshop ccccccccccccccsssssssssssssssseeecccceeeeeessseeaeeeeeeees 182 AS2 Bak SraplsOr Sk Works hOr a a oats aheabide NEN cs 183 AS AS TimedisplayOrok Workshopen aise tice eles sedan Sela a ele owe ask 187 45414 Datedisplay of SKW Orkshop iin iiievctatettsaelessten eteaderadeedaricee teal 188 4 4 15 Day of week display of SK Workshop ccccccsssssesseeseececceeeeeeeeeeessseeseseeseeeeeeeees 190 AS l6 Stane picture OL KW OLS HOD sic sect as ae ara a a ees Gasca oa aaen 192 ASAy Picturerdisplay OL5K W Orkshopieesdstes Soe ee ae ee eee aa 193 4 6 New functions of SK WOLkSHO tess secede clan edccssehsdestaeerdcationdeaduesvariesadestagendeatiandeslnseeeecel 194 4 6 1 Parise Hart OF SIG W OF KS HOP tage diet ca ngncttscadsetpuadanedesiadsesenodunteseauehesademaidisdecnnadenewisaa eae 194 4 6 2 SEP PUORO SK WOKS HO Dianeine n N ateamtesombeeet 195 4 6 3 Radio b tton oft SK WorkShODizrisa ernir E E TA EA A A in a 197 4 6 4 Dropdown box of SK Workshop ccccccccccccccccceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeaasaaeesseeeeseeeeeess 198 4 6 5 Slider analog switch Of SK Workshop cccccccccccssssssssssssseeeeecceceeeeeseeeeaaessesesseeeeeeeeess 200 4 6 6 ATT ALI OM OR SK VV OK SIO Pics icalsaerecioteatad cuzee ea e a e
181. e PC will not identify the touch screen after connection and thus configuration projects cannot be downloaded Appropriate installation method should be chosen according to the version of Windows 1 The steps of installation under Windows XP 2000 and 98 are as follows e Start up Windows e Place the installation CD into the CD drive e Double click USBDriver file to start installation See Figure 2 20 48 GSbDriver InstallShield Wizard x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for USB Driver The InstallShield Wizard wall install USB Driver on your computer To continue click Next i Cancel Figure 2 20 Install the USB driver e After the installation has completed you can connect the touch screen with the PC via USB 2 Installation under Windows VISTA e Manual installation in required under Windows VISTA e Start up Windows e Connect the USB cable of the touch screen to the PC and then a page as shown in Figure 2 21 will appear a gt Soe Es Windows Z SEC 3C2410X Test B D RJE Lag as D SHS SiS Peel Windows SRS hiaai Seer DESEA Windows TE Prie ESS Eaa P TES itRe ETE O pine LE BES Sees Pes er Figure 2 21 VISTA identifies the driver e Select Ask me later and then open the device manager to find the touch screen equipment Right click on the equipment and choose to update the driver See Figure 2 22 49 itl DVD CD ROM A8 cy IDE ATA ATAP SuN ao E tA Eg BH
182. e Protection HMI Frotection Variable table E Sereen OOO Screen FA Window EY Historical Data Loge T Alarm Log Recipe i ed Data Transport Coordinate Left Te Size Width Height SamKoon Figure 2 27 Interface and areas of the software Title bar Displaying version number of SK Workshop 52 Menu bar Displaying command menus of SK Workshop All these menus are drop down menu Tool buttons Shortcut buttons of some commands Displaying corresponding buttons of file edit drawing and some other functions Picture area window A window for designers to configure and edit graphs Project manager Tree menu for communication connection parameter setting screen management alarming setting recipe setting and historical data collection Information output window Displaying prompt messages such as input output information and error prompt when the designer are editing and compiling configuration Status bar Displaying current configuration status including coordinate of mouse control type coordinate of control size of control and the like Menu bar of SKWorkshop Menu bar of SKWorkshop configuration editing software provides users with abundant menu options and here you can find almost all tool commands and editing commands required during configuration The menu bar consists of File menu Edit menu Draw menu Object menu Screen menu Setting menu Download menu and Hel
183. e Setup installs SEWorkshop on your computer Extracting files C Program Files SRWorkshopiSEKWorkshop exe Figure 2 10 Installation dialog After completion of installation click OK to complete the installation process as shown in Figure 2 11 fe Setup SEPorkshop Completing the SKW orkshop Setup Wizard Setup has finished installing SEWorkshop on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup Finish Figure 2 11 Installation completion dialog After that an icon of SK Workshop V4 0 0 will appear on the desktop as shown in Figure 2 12 44 Figure 2 12 Shortcut icon e You can also click SKWorkshop in Start All programs SK Workshop4 0 0 to run SKWorkshop configuration software fs SKWorkshop El Uninstall Sk orkshop MAEF m SE orkshop 2 4 Uninstall of SKWorkshop configuration software There are two uninstalling methods as introduced below The first method First select Start Program SK Workshop in Windows and then select Uninstall option See Figure 2 13 PAG M ii SEn orkshop E Uninstall SEW orkshop m EN or k h op Figure 2 13 Select Uninstall Second click Yes in the pop up dialog and wait for automatic deletion of the software by Windows system After completion of the deletion process c
184. e a free line will be drawn left click the mouse once and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be an end of the free line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a curve automatically along the movement track of the mouse Then left click or right click the mouse to complete free line drawing See Figure 4 28 Figure 4 28 Drawing a free line gt After completing the above steps the free line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the free line and double click or click Properties button Gil the tool bar after choosing the free line At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear You may adjust the properties of the free line using the pull down and fine tuning button SK Workshop provides 6 line types 30 line widths and 6 line end arrows for free line 4 3 5 Rectangle of Sk Workshop 106 in the tool buttons and then move the Choose Rectangle command in Draw menu or click Rectangle command button i mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw rectangle in the window gt To change the size of the rectangle first choose it and move the mouse to any of the 8 gr
185. e address to 1 by clicking this bit button that is setting the write address of the connected device to ON state and displaying 1 ON state Set OFF If this option is checked after downloading to HMI you can set the value of the write address to 0 by clicking this bit button that is setting the write address of the connected device to OFF state and displaying 0 OFF state Inching This option includes two choices those are Press down as 1 and Press down as 0 If Press down as 1 is chosen after downloading to HMI when the bit button is touched you can set the value of the write address of the connected equipment to 1 ON by pressing down the button while set to 0 OFF by releasing the button If Press down as 0 is chosen when the bit button is touched you can set the value of the write address of the connected equipment to 0 OFF by pressing down the button while set to 1 ON by releasing the button Momentary If this option is checked after downloading to HMI you can set the value of the write address of the connected device to 1 ON by pressing down the button and then 1 ON state is displayed and set the value to 0 OFF by releasing the touch button and then 0 OFF state is displayed Write address You can either enter an address by clicking the address input button i or directly type in an address The address name is not case sensitive Sk Workshop will give corresponding bit address symbols 164 basing on
186. e case sensitive Figure 7 10 Dialog box of file protection You can set password when file needs a password to open Double click the option Protect File in Project Manager Select Use Password to Protect File in popped up dialog box and enter password in the corresponding column Then click OK to pop up the dialog box of password conformation When the user closes the project and opens it again it will pop up the password input box shown as Figure 7 11 317 ga Password Figure 7 11 Password input confirmation box The file can be opened only when password is entered by user 7 2 7 HMI protect of Sk Workshop The main function of HMI protect users can set that HMI can be used normally within a time limit if the time set by user is exceeded HMI will skip to the designated screen set by user in advance making HMI cannot be used again If you want to reuse the HMI users have to enter the correct unlock password through the function HMI Unlock in function button Double click the option HMI Protect in Project Manager to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 7 12 HEI Protect Use HMI Protect Function _ Es OB Ge oe Ge ee ee ED Preferences Setting a Time Limit 2012 6 8 pa a 50 28 n aa a aa l Sereen L Setting protection function remove protection me A Remove the password use function button Figure 7 12 D
187. e click the Numeric Display dialog When this control is executed in HMI a keyboard will pop up on the screen for users to enter the data Fractional digits Setting of this parameter will impact the data display effect If the data type chosen is 16 32 digit positive integer or 16 32 digit integer the number displayed will be the return number subject to decimal point left movement by the number of digits as set in this parameter For example if the return number is 212 and the number of fractional digits set here is 2 then 2 12 will be displayed If the data type chosen is 32 digit floating point number then the decimal point will not be moved but only the set fractional digits will be displayed For example if the return number is 2 123 and the number of fractional digits set here is 2 then 2 12 will be displayed Total digits The sum of the number of integer digits and fractional digits If the integer length of the number to be displayed is longer than the set value the integer length displayed will be the integer length of the actual number For example if the return number is 2123 the data length is 2 and the number fractional digits are 1 then 212 3 will be displayed Advanced tab of Numeric Display has powerful functions including Scaling and Range Display See Figure 4 97 192 H Nameric Display General Picture Visibility Scaling Taini Offset Range Display Variable Low Limit High Lim
188. e color display 1 6 3 Communication module This module is designed with high resistance against interference high voltage and lightning It has enhanced communication accuracy and reliability and supports RS232 485 and 422 communications 1 6 4 Memory module FLASH with power failure retention is used as ROM providing rapid access and a high capacity for all models up to 128M 1 6 5 Power supply module High precision switch voltage stabilizing power supply is used with lower power consumption 1 7 Industrial environment Samkoon series touch screens meet the standards of EN50022 and EN50024 and the requirements of FCC Class A They have strong resistance against interference and meet the requirements of industrial application environment for electromagnetic compatibility 1 8 Wiring Samkoon SK series touch screen requires DC 24V power supply Figure 1 18 shows the connection of the touch screen with PLC and PC AC220V or 380V Computer When which the PLC connect can choose AC transition DC anyone of the serial 24V Figure 1 18 Connection diagram of SK series touch screen USB cables for connection with PC are supplied along with the machine 2 Quick start of Sk Workshop 36 This chapter introduces installation of Sk Workshop configuration software including installation of configuration program and equipment drive as well as basic functions and main characteristics of the software It als
189. e contents in the following circle 270 l Cia aie Editor nit har source 4 3 4 5 6 LWO source O LWL s0urce 1 gt LW2Z so0urce 2 Wsa soaurce 3 wALW LYL LW2 L Lys Specification of variables mection T LE Stat read write read write sigraze l aes storage l read write Figure 5 9 Code Compile in Macro Compiler Step 3 lt Tag Setting gt As shown in Figure 5 8 variable setting it records the tag name tag type and other property settings Double click the tag name window or right click the shortcut menu to select new tag and pop up the dialog box as shown in Figure 5 10 Macro Code Tag Make settings for the tag property in Figure 5 10 Macro Code Tag Then click OK to save the settings 271 a Hew macro instruction variables variable name dataClass ood o wl Figure 5 10 Macro Code Tag Tag Name input LW0 LW 1 LW2 LW3 SumLW respectively in the tag name Data Type set 16 bit integer Read write select readable and writable read write Address LW0 0 LW 1 1 LW2 2 LW3 3 SumLW 4 After setting completes it is shown as following Figure 5 11 Variable Hame DataClass Bytes B Trite Fro ddress Typ Address wmection T LE Stat 1 Leo 16 Bi t rera internal ae internal 2 Lil read write Lif 1 eee i 100 E H Unsigned storage l a w Fig
190. e displayed Font Here you can choose common font or digital font Font size Here you can change the font size according to actual needs Alignment Center alignment by default Left Align the data to be displayed on the left side of the display box Center Align the data to be displayed in the middle of the display box 191 Right Align the data to be displayed on the right side of the display box Justification Zero Suppres by default Zero Suppres Zeros in front of the effective digits will not be displayed For example if the number of the monitored address is a 16 digit positive integer and its value is 00123 then the number displayed in the display box will be 123 Leading zero Zeros in front of the effective digits will be displayed For example if the number of the monitored address is a 16 digit positive integer and its value is 00123 then the number displayed in the display box will be 00123 Leading space Zeros in front of the effective digits will not be displayed but be replaced by space For example if the number of the monitored address is a 16 digit positive integer and its value is 00123 then the number displayed in the display box will be 123 Text color Font color of the data to be displayed Refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern To reset the contents and properties of Numeric Display you can doubl
191. e filling pattern and transparency See Figure 4 38 Figure 4 38 An example of a text graph gt After the font properties are modified click OK button to close the dialog Then in the picture editing window the mouse tk will become Move the mouse to a position where text will be displayed left click the mouse and drag it to another appropriate position before left clicking again The system will automatically draw a rectangular cell that is a text box gt To modify or re input the words of the text double click the words and type in new words with keyboard Enter key can be used to change a line during such inputting gt To change the size of the background box of the text cell first choose the text cell move the mouse to the edge of the text I box press down the left key and drag the mouse when it becomes or or fa and finally release the key at appropriate position Changing width of text cell I Changing height of text cell fa Changing both width and height of text cell gt The Visibility tab has the same functions as the Visibility tab of other buttons 4 3 11 Table graph of SK Workshop Choose Table command in Draw menu or click Table command button Lal in the tool buttons and then a Table dialog will pop up See Figure 4 39 113 4 Table Cell Horizontal 4 E Vertical Hur 4 F fe meme e e m a e a l M Grid Vertical Line Type 1 Horizontal Line Color
192. e in the current screen Ellipse Used to draw an ellipse of any size in the current screen Polygon Used to draw a polygon of any shape in the current screen Text Used to create a transparent rectangular box in the current screen in where any words can be typed Open library Used to open the picture library of the system Build library Used to generate a picture library file basing on the pictures drawn by the user for the purpose of future use Set OFF status Used to set all digit operation objects in the current screen to OFF status Set ON status Used to set all digit operation objects in the current screen to ON status Table Used to create a table of specified number of rows and columns in the current screen Scale Used to draw required scale e Object menu Object menu consists of a group of touch keys and functional keys including Bit Button Word Button Screen Button Function Button Bit Lamp Multi state Lamp Numeric Display Numeric Entry ASCII Character Display ASCI Character Entry Bar Graph Time Display Date Display Day of Week Display Static Picture Picture Display GIF Display Trend Chart XY Trend Chart Dynamic Circle Dynamic Rectangle Alarm Control Dynamic Alarm Bar Historic Alarm Dialog Graphics Move Meter Multi state Switch Historic Record Display Message Display Multi function Button and Flow Block Object menu corresponds the third row of the tool bar See Figure 2 32 Bit butto
193. e left key to complete drawing gt After completing the above steps the polygon has default settings in transparency line type line width line color and filling pattern You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the polygon and double click or click Properties button L in the tool bar after choosing the polygon At this moment a property dialog similar to that in rectangle drawing will appear gt You may adjust the properties of the polygon using the pull down and fine tuning button SK Workshop provides 15 frame line types 10 frame line widths and 21 filling patterns for polygon to make the graph more beautiful and vivid See Figure 4 34 Figure 4 34 An example of a polygon drawn 4 3 9 Fan chart of Sk Workshop Choose Fan Chart command in Draw menu or click Fan Chart command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw a fan chart in the screen by clicking the mouse See Figure 4 35 Figure 4 35 Draw a polygon gt Move the mouse to any of the green dots in the rectangle and at this moment the mouse shape will become F Then you can change the span of the sector by moving the mouse along an arc course 4 3 10 Text graphs of Sk Workshop Choose Text command in Draw menu or click Text command button A in the tool buttons and then a Static Text dial
194. e of single address of the connected device by means of state change 55 Corresponding to Message display command used to create in the current screen a display control to display preset messages 68 Recipe data display used to create a recipe data display control in the current screen which can be used to display the data of user specified recipe Keyboard component used to create a keyboard component in the current screen for use of user defined keyboard Controls in the Object toolbar in the second row A Corresponding to Time display command used to insert in the current screen a time control to display time al Corresponding to Date display command used to insert in the current screen a date control to display date imi Corresponding to Day of week display command used to insert in the current screen a day of week control to display day of week aa Corresponding to Static picture command used to insert in the current screen a static picture from local disk Corresponding to Picture display command used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying several pictures a Corresponding to GIF display command used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying static or animated 32 frames pictures with an extension name of GIF Corresponding to Dynamic circle command used to create in the current screen a dynam
195. e other expressions such as assignment expression even a variable For example if a 5 statement and if b statement are allowable As long as the expression value is not 0 it is true If the expression value in if a 5 expression is always not 0 the subsequent statement will be executed This kind of situation may not take place in the program but the syntax is legal Another example program segment i1f a b printf od a else printf a 0 Semanteme of the statement assign b to a if it is not 0 this value is output otherwise it outputs a 0 character string This kind of application usually occurs in the program 2 Inif statement the conditional judgment expression must be included in bracket and ended with semicolon 256 3 In the three forms of if statement all statements should be single statement If a group several statements are required execution with conditions this group of statements must be bracketed with to form a compound statement Pay attention that no semicolon is allowed behind For example if a gt b at 2 BFF else a 0 b 10 Conditional operator and conditional expression If the single assignment statement is executed only in the conditional statement it is usually realized by conditional expression which not only simplifies the process but also improves the operation efficiency Conditional operator and is a ternary operator which means three values
196. e screen Deleted screens cannot be recovered by means of Undo e Setting menu Setting menu consists of the following commands Preferences Setting P Alarm Setting A Recipe Setting R File Protection M Macro Editor Converter Global Macro and Initial Macro See Figure 2 34 Setting DownLoad D He Preference Setting IF Recipe Setting hh File Frotection M f Macro Editor a global Macro Fal Init Macro Add Customize Keyboard Figure 2 34 Setting menu Parameter settings By clicking this menu item you can open the parameter settings window where you can set and modify a range of parameters including the touch screen model mode startup screen screen saver time flash frequency alarm sound touch sound and initial grade and its password etc Alarm settings By clicking this menu item you can open the digital alarm window and analog alarm window where you can set parameters such as the volume of alarm sound time for scanning alarm and address for reading alarm etc Formula settings By clicking this menu item you can open the formula settings window where you can set the parameters of the formula needed by yourself File protection Used to open file protection password setting window where password can be set for the purpose of protection Macro editor Used to open the macro editor to add modify compile or delete a macro Global macro Used to open global macro setting interface
197. e the historical data records into disk Save historical data OFF after completion Send historical alarm Send historical alarm files to SD card and auto OFF after files to SD card completion Send historical data files to SD card Send historical data files to SD card and auto OFF after completion Send historical alarm files to U disk Send historical alarm files to U disk and auto OFF after completion Send historical data files to U disk Send historical data files to U disk and auto OFF after completion Send current project to U disk Send current project to U disk and auto OFF after completion Send current project to SD card Send current project to SD card and auto OFF after completion Save the user level ON write the current modified user level password into file password OFF auto reset after completion Real time alarm occurs When there is real time alarm this bit is ON System under screen saver status When it is under screen saver this bit is ON Copy operation When it is ON it sends the operation records to U disk It becomes 60143 records to U disk auto OFF at completion Copy operation When it is ON it sends the operation records to SD card It becomes 60144 records to SD card auto OFF at completion 8 2 LW LW 60000 Bcd code range of effective value 0 59 345 sooo 00 i 00 Z 00 sonos a 0 a System operation 60007 time hour System has operated for _ hours System operation
198. e this control is executed the value of LW1 will be added by 5 but will be no higher than 65535 After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen Subtract After you set the data type the write address the constant and the maximum value the value of the register corresponding to the write address will be deducted by the constant set each time the Word Button is touched However the value of the write address cannot be less than the minimum value set by you For example if the write address is LW1 the constant is 5 and the maximum value is 0 then each time this control is executed the value of LW1 will be deducted by 5 but will be no lower than 0 gt Total digits Total number of digits including the decimal gt Fractional digits When the data type is not 32 digit floating point number and the fractional digits are set to n then the maximum value entered should be reduced by 10 For example if the data type chosen is 32 digit positive integer and the number of fractional digits is 3 then you can only enter a value between 0 and 99999 999 gt Enter Password This option has the same functions as Enter Value option except that there is no option of Fractional digits The Label tab of Word Button is the same as the Label tab of Bit Button except
199. e user is 32 digit positive integer and the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW3 and LW5S will be read respectively with the following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the circle center The value of LW3 is the Y coordinate of the circle center The value of LWS is the radius of the circle 137 Thus if the chosen Data Type is 32 digit positive integer the control can read three data from the monitored address adding 2 to the address each time according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of circle center Y coordinate of circle center and radius of the circle Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 6 Dynamic rectangle of SK Workshop With similar functions to Dynamic Circle Dynamic Rectangle is also used to change the position and size of the graph basing on the change in the value of the monitored address and thus to show real time change of the monitored address on a dynamic basis id Click Dynamic Rectangle icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 62 will appear i Dynamic rect Visibility Droo Data Type 16 Bit Int Moni tor Addre Controllable Rectangle T F F Fosition ranspare GE C Size Solid Bir Color Border perder O OOO Line Widt 1 a Figure 4 62 Dynamic rectangle dialog 138 This control reads values of four addresses to respectively define X c
200. e write to the control address gt Background color Background color of this object 220 gt Text color Text color of this object gt Control address Write address gt Use macro If this option is chosen macros chosen by the user will be executed if the object is touchable State setting tab This tab shows all states items texts and numerical values To change the item number choose Total State Number in the Item List Setting tab Click State Setting tab and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 121 will appear fi Combox Ea Advanced Visibility a11 languages Use the first lang Languag language w 0 1 ferrar False notity E start using Font System yt Font Size v Figure 4 121 State Setting tab of dropdown box gt Language Use unified Font and Font Size for all states For different languages there may be different Font and Font Size settings gt State The system will list all the items used at present and each item indicates a state and will be displayed in the list This field is read only gt Value You may set value for each item basing on the following rules 2al a Read If the system detects any change in the contents of the Control Address the object will check the contents and the value and choose the first conforming item If no item is conforming it will jump to error state and trigger the error notification bit if any b Write Whe
201. ecified number to 60359 U disk at 1 Copy the historical alarm within specified number to 60360 SD card at 1 Copy the historical alarm within 60361 specified time to U 349 60362 60363 60365 60367 60373 60379 60409 60415 60417 60423 60429 Copy the historical alarm within specified time to SD card at 1 Export the start number of historical alarm Export the end number of historical alarm Export the start time of historical alarm Export the end time of historical alarm Export the historical alarm to U disk file name at SD card Copy the historical data within specified number to U disk at Copy the historical data within specified number to SD card at l Copy the historical data within specified time to U disk at 1 Copy the historical data within specified time to SD card at 1 Export the start number of historical data Export the end number of historical data Export the start time of historical data Export the end time of historical data Export the historical data to U disk file 6 words in length as year month day hour minute second 6 words in length as year month day hour minute second 24 characters in length 6 words in length as year month day hour minute second 6 words in length as year month day hour minute second 24 characters in length 350 R W a a 3 X a R W a ad
202. ects at the top Corresponding to Bottom align command used to align the bottom boundaries of the chosen objects at the bottom gjo Corresponding to Horizontal centering command used to horizontally center the graph objects chosen ofa Corresponding to Vertical centering command used to vertically center the graph objects chosen E Corresponding to The same width command used to set the same width for the graphs chosen The minimum left coordinate is taken as the baseline Corresponding to The same height command used to set the same height for the graphs chosen l Corresponding to The same height and width command used to set the same height and width for the graphs chosen The minimum left coordinate is taken as the baseline H Corresponding to Equal horizontal space command used to arrange two or more controls at equal horizontal space 65 i Corresponding to Equal vertical space command used to arrange two or more controls at equal vertical space i Corresponding to Horizontal overturning command used to overturn the chosen graph s with the axis of the vertical center line Corresponding to Vertical overturning command used to overturn the chosen graph s with the axis of the horizontal center line iti 7 2 F r Corresponding to Zoom in command used to zoom in the current screen by 1x For further zoom in click this but
203. ed address can be bit address only Then this control will display corresponding picture basing on 0 1 state of the monitored address gt Value When this option is checked the total number of states can be up to 32 and the different pictures can be displayed basing on the value of the monitored address If the value of the monitored address is 0 picture of state 1 will be displayed and so forth 213 gt Auto change When this option is checked the total number of states can be up to 32 and the control needs not to display picture basing on the value of the monitored address but display pictures in turn within the range of the total state number set by the user after the user defines a picture for each state sets Auto Change Frequency and downloads the setting to HMI Picture tab of Picture Display is similar to Picture tab of Multi state Lamp so you can refer to the latter for reference Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 6 New functions of SKWorkshop This chapter mainly introduces the use of the new controls of SKWorkshop 4 6 1 Fan chart of SKWorkshop The functions of fan chart also called pie chart are similar to the functions of meter It is used to read the value of the monitored address and
204. eeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeneees 302 7 8 Recipe conmlicuration Of SK W OrkshOpi4 4 tierie he ES 304 Ta Setting of global macro Of SK Workshop cccccccsssssssssseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeaesseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaas 308 7 10 Setting of initial macro Of SK Workshop cccccccssssssssssseececcecceeeeeeeeaeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 309 System reserved TESISter of SK Works DOD ranie a a a a n EE 310 10 11 12 8 2 TN sera sere ete E T a Reece reed E T 312 8 3 TR A eset cttw cus te E AEE EEN ANE E nd cue EN E ET AE 318 Connection method of SK Workshop multi screen multi unit ennoeooseeeoooooenenenennnssssssssssseeerreee 319 9 1 One unit multi screen connection method of SK Workshop ccccccsssssesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 319 92 One screen multi unit connection method of SK Workshop ccccccssssssesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 323 9 3 Penetration connection method of SK Workshop cccccssssesssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseseessseseeeeeeeees 325 Devicediiyo rol SK WOTKSNO 5 ean manent meneame am en on TO TOME TON SON OO e a OREN SRTI OE OO 329 10 1 ANUS C6V ICG CHiViel e han ea en a ea 332 10 2 Allen Bradley device drive such ccnsazs asses ut Mant A 334 10 3 Delade vice CIVL ree a N E A E 335 10 4 Emeron devie driverene E N e N N 337 10 5 E EATA EAE E E E cela eae E E E en aise 338 10 6 AEA D A S e PE E T A oe A A talent O dats E AO ence 340 10 7 GEdEVICE OTIVA TAE A EO E AES E A EEA neuen Dues 341 10 8 ET
205. een TaiAn TP03 COM1 COM2 series SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Tai An TP03 series PLC terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting Y Select TaiAn Technology in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of TaiAn TP03 series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC Communication port Baud rate Data bit length Parity check bit Stop bit length PLC station number HMI station number 0 255 Online simulation Yes Extension mode 3 Operable register and address range Y 000 0 377 Bit output relay dddd 8000 8511 Bit special auxiliary relay 410 PB dddd 0 4095 Bit step relay ddd 0 511 Bit timer ddd 0 255 Bit counter oe dddd 0 7999 Word data register a dddd 8000 8511 Word special data register ddd 0 511 Word current value of timer ddd 0 199 Word current value of counter ddd 200 255 Double word current value of counter Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double
206. een square dots on the frame of Fu the rectangle When the mouse becomes t or or press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to an appropriate position Then release the left key of the mouse So far the size of the rectangle has been adjusted fh Changing width of rectangle Fu Changing height of rectangle Changing both width and height of rectangle gt After completing the above steps the rectangle has default settings in transparency line type line width line color and filling pattern You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the rectangle and double click or click Properties button Lal in the tool bar after choosing the rectangle At this moment a property dialog as shown in Figure 4 29 will appear Line Hidth O Ml Line Cola Fad Pattern Selia w Backer ow EE O perem Figure 4 29 Rectangle properties dialog gt You may adjust the properties of the rectangle using the pull down and fine tuning button SKWorkshop provides 15 frame line types 10 frame line widths and 21 filling patterns for rectangle to make the graph more beautiful and vivid See Figure 4 30 107 Figure 4 30 An example of a rectangle drawn 4 3 6 Rounded rectangle of Sk Workshop Choose Rounded Rectangle command in Draw menu or click Rounded Rectangle command button gt in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing wind
207. eft align before Left align after Figure 4 19 Contrast before and after left align gt Right Align Right Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the right boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Right Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click Right Align button SI in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Right Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move right to align basing on the right boundaries See Figure 4 20 for a contrast before and after right align Right align before Right align after Figure 4 20 Contrast before and after right align 101 gt The Same Width The Same Width command allows designers to set the same width for several graph objects chosen basing on the width of the highest graph object considering the top boundaries without changing the heights of the graph objects and with the top left coordinates of the graph objects being fixed To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click The Same Width command in Align option in Edit menu or click The Same Width button in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click The Same Width command in the Align option in the right click menu See Figure 4 21 for a contrast before and after such processing Make same width before Make same width aft
208. eft click The process of pressing down the left key and then releasing 1s called Left click in this Manual It can be used to select menu items select object select tool button edit configuration and confirm setting Figure 2 43 Sketch of mouse Double click The process of quickly and continuously clicking the left key twice is called Double click in this Manual It can be used to set properties for placed objects set properties of screen and window set properties of touch screen connection change settings of the touch screen create historical data collection create recipe and create alarm control After such clicking a dialog will appear for operation Right click The process of pressing down the right key of mouse and then releasing is called Right click in this Manual You can open a right click drop down menu by right clicking an object or open a right click menu by right clicking a blank space In addition you can also cancel screen editing status and recover the mouse shape Drag The process of moving the mouse while pressing the left key is called Drag in this Manual It can be used to select several objects move objects or move pop up editing windows 73 2 8 2 Mouse shape When using SK Workshop software the shape of the mouse may change with the operation to distinguish different operation types and provide convenience for users Table 2 1 below shows the allowable operat
209. eing the same as the original The shortcut key is Ctrl S Save As Used to save the current screen configuration with the file name and directory being changeable Quit Used to quit SK Workshop configuration software e Edit menu Edit menu consists of commands used to edit screen text and drawing as well as some auxiliary commands including Undo U Redo R Cut T Copy C Duplicate D Paste V Delete D Select All A Align Layer Rotary Assemble Mirror Zoom Pan View Grid Grid Width Border Scale The Forward Screen The Backward Screen Open Screen Property Information Output Window Project Manager Find Address and Address Table Grey commands are invalid under the current environment and can be used only when the object to be edited is chosen Some commands in Edit menu are group commands which are marked with a small triangle on the right side of the line In addition each command has a shortcut key This menu is a drop down menu as shown in Figure 2 30 Undo Used to cancel the last operation The shortcut key is Ctrl Z Redo Used to recover the last operation The shortcut key is Ctrl Shift Z Cut used to delete the object chosen and copy it to the paste buffer area The shortcut key is Ctrl X Copy Used to copy the object chosen to the paste buffer area The shortcut key is Ctrl C Duplicate Used to copy several graphs chosen in horizontal and vertical directions increasing the address b
210. elements with the same category in order is called array In C language the array belongs to construction data One array can be split into several array elements These array elements are either basic data or construction data Therefore the array can be classified into numerical array character array pointer array structure array according to the category of array element This section will introduce the numerical array and character array others will be described in the successive sections If the array type declaration uses array in C language it must be made type declaration first The general form of array declaration is type specifier array name constant expression Wherein type specifier refers to any basic data or construction data Array name refers to the array identifier defined by users The constant expression in square bracket indicates the quantity of data elements which is also called array length For example int a 10 int array a contains 10 elements float b 10 c 20 float array b contains 10 elements float array c contains 20 elements char ch 20 character array ch contains 20 elements For the array type declaration there are several points as following 1 The array type actually refers to the value type of array element For the same array the data type of all elements is the same 2 The writing rules for array name should conform to that of identifier 3 The array name should not be same with othe
211. en uses DB9F connector Koyo SN series PLC terminal is 6 pin crystal plug 2 Software setting Y Select Koyo Electronics in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Koyo SN series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC Koyo SN Series Koyo SN Series RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 ODD EVEN ODD NONE 391 Offtne simulation a Online simulation 3 Operable register and address range a i Note O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 15 LG device driver This device driver is
212. ent screen Corresponding to Properties command used to open property page of the chosen key Corresponding to Lock command used to lock the chosen key in the screen so that it can be no longer moved Corresponding to Unlock command used to unlock the chosen key i Address search button used to search whether an address has been used with the searching results shown in the information output window a Address browsing button used to browse all the addresses used by all the controls in all or specified screens S Corresponding to Search macro command used to check whether a macro has been used with the result displayed in the information output window Corresponding to Macro manager command used to view the macro use by all controls in the specified screen or all screens a Corresponding to Project manager command used to open and close the project manager window A Corresponding to Information output window command used to open and close the information output window Object toolbar Controls in the Object toolbar in the first row Corresponding to Bit button command used to set in the current screen a touch key for bit operation of the connected device including bit setting resetting inching and alternation Corresponding to Word button command used to set in the current screen a touch key for word operation of the connected device in
213. ent with three methods initialization assignment dynamic assignment by inputting function and assignment statement The numerical array can not be overall assigned input or output with assignment statement but assigned for array element one by one with do statement 5 2 C language programming preliminary 5 2 1 Statement of C program The execution part of C program is constituted by statements and the program function is also realized by execution statement C statement is classified into five categories 1 Expression statement 2 Control statement 252 3 4 1 3 4 Compound statement Null statement Expression statement Expression statement consists of expression and semicolon Its general form is expression Execution of expression statement is to compute the expression value For example x y z assignment statement y z operate statement with addition but the result is not kept It has no actual significance i Increment 1 statement 1 value increases 1 Control statement Control statement is to control the program process so as to realize various structures of program It is composed of special statement delimiter There are nine control statements in C language which can be classified into three kinds 1 Conditional judgment statement if statement switch statement 2 Looping execution statement do while statement while statement for statement 3 Go to statement break statement go to state
214. er Figure 4 21 Contrast before and after The Same Width gt The Same Height The Same Height command allows designers to set the same height for several graph objects chosen basing on the height of the highest graph object considering the top boundaries without changing the widths of the graph objects and with the top left coordinates of the graph objects being fixed To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click The Same Height command in Align option in Edit menu or click The Same Height button in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click The Same Height command in the Align option in the right click menu See Figure 4 22 for a contrast before and after such processing Make same height before Make same height after Figure 4 22 Contrast before and after The Same Height gt The Same Height and Width The Same Height and Width command allows designers to set the same height and width for several graph objects chosen basing on the height and width of the highest graph object considering the top boundaries with the top left coordinates of the graph objects being fixed To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click The Same Height and Width command in Align option in Edit menu or click The Same Height and Width button in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click The Same Height and Width command in the Align option in the righ
215. er is used by SKWorkshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of SYSMAC C CPM CS CJ series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of SYSMAC C CPM CS CJ series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate SYSMAC C CPM CS CJ series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of SYSMAC C CPM CS CJ series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with SYSMAC C CPM CS CJ series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector SY SMAC C CPM CS CJ series PLC terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting VY Select OMRON in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of SYSMAC C CPM CS CJ series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Default Parameters Setting Range PLC SYSMAC C CPM Series SYSMAC C CPM CS CJ Series Communication port RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 405 Baud rate Data bit length Parity check bit Stop bit length PLC station number HMI station number Support functions Offline simulation Online simulation 9600 EVEN 1200
216. er limit When the value of the monitored read address is lower than this limit the pattern color and background color of the control will be the pattern color and background color set in the Lower Level Color Higher limit When the value of the monitored read address is higher than this limit the pattern color and background color of the control will be the pattern color and background color set in the higher Level Color After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen gt Range check Mainly used to check the value entered by the user to ensure it does not exceed the maximum and minimum values set by the user gt After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen 4 5 10 ASC character display of Sk Workshop ASC Character Display is used to display the ASC characters in the connected device Click ASC Character Display icon pa in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 104 will appear 199 l ASCII Character Picture Monitor Address Total Alignment O Left Display Visibility Forder Color FG Color Tees Bis Color Text Color Ss Fattern L Solid w Font
217. eral tab of historical trend chart BG Color Used to set background color for the trend chart The change in the color can be seen only after clicking OK button Transparency Change transparency of the background color Data collection The default setting of this option is Historical Data Collector in the Project Manager Total number of curves Number of pens which is number of register values up to 8 Background color Color of the area where the pen i e the line will be moved Use control address This address occupies 50 consecutive address offsets used to change options of each pen such as whether to display pen maximum value of pen minimum value of pen ending time of control minute range of control time minute maximum Y axis display at the time of single axis control minimum Y axis display at the time of single axis control whether use multiple Y axes and recover to original state Address offset Controlled object of the control register address Lee Total number of pens Whether to display pen 1 132 Whether to display pen 2 7 MAX MIN om Whether to display pen 3 D S gt p lt MIN 4 GN Whether to display pen 4 MAX 6 7 CO 19 MIN NO Whether to display pen 5 22 MAX NO NO Go MIN NO 4 N GN Whether to display pen 6 MAX NO 6 7 N TN oO 29 MIN Go Whether to display pen 7 W N z gt xX
218. ers can right click the edition window of source code and it will pop up the shortcut as Figure 5 5 window close open Click close display variable setting window and close display information output window to close open the corresponding window Users can adjust the edition box size as required Instruction 4 variable setting Variable name input the variable name required in the program Data class select the corresponding data class of variable name so as to distribute the corresponding memory size Word length set the occupied memory of corresponding variable automatically depending on the data class Read write set the read write property of variable in the memory cell of touch screen Address the defined physical memory address of variable in the touch screen Select ALL Ctrlta Figure 5 5 Shortcut menu Variable setting instruction when the external requires interaction with touch screen such as data exchange and data acquisition it provides the interface to change the behavior characteristics of touch screen dynamically 266 Special tips the variables required in the program should be put in the variable definition part the variable definition starts from code 5 3 4 How to insert library function in the program Click function button and pop up the dialog box as Figure 5 6 Select the corresponding library function in the function name list box click confirm button and the functi
219. es printing machines food making machines medical machines woodworl 20 998 x 29 697 Bae lt Pe wl gt Figure 2 37 Help file Version number and copyright statement of SKWorkshop are shown in Figure 2 38 fi About SEWorkshop 4 0 1 obWorkshap Y4 0 1 Copyright Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Tech Harning Unauthorized Reproduction Copying Fart or ALL of the Contents of this Software fould Constitute a Tort Figure 2 38 Version number statement Translation menu This menu is used to switch between Chinese and English version as shown in the following figure Language Selection Eea if v English Click Chinese the language of the software will be simplified Chinese Click English the language will be English 62 Right click menu To provide convenience for users a right click menu is set in the software meeting the operation habit of Chinese and the style of Windows Many functions used in configuration can be found here Commands in right click menu include Properties Insert Library Cut Copy Duplicate Paste Delete Select All Align Layer Rotary Assemble Image Ratio Grid Grid Width Simulation Status and Screen See Figure 2 39 Attribute Insert Library Cut T Ctrlti Copy E Ctrl c Paste F Ctrlty A Delete M Del Select AL A Ctrlta Align Layer Assemble j Loom iHi Grid Emulation Mode j Screen lF Figure 2 39 Right click menu
220. ess in PLC supporting MODBUS protocol All register names of PLC supporting MODBUS protocol can correspond to the register name in MODBUS protocol The connection method and system setting of touch screen are as shown in figures 8 8 8 9 and 8 10 358 Touch screen is primary station PLC as slave station 1 ES 485 signal FLC ES 485 CORAUD CATO ES 485 signal ES 485 signal KS 232 signal l FLE ES 485 i COBBUnIicatio ES 232 E5 485 converter ES 232 signal p e Slave staton 4 SSS 1G FLC ES 485 COBBUnicatio m port Figure 8 8 Connection mode of One screen with multiple devices 4 Communication Port Properties Teneral HMI Site Farameter Local v Setting tom port master slave mode port l Figure 8 9 Select touch screen as primary station 359 H Communication Port Properties ey Gener al Parameter Communication Parameters Other HMI Address FLO Address g A Communication a Overtime time S j i E re default Se Ror tines h Address Model E on ice F Hw PLO Continuous add Jz Spare set parameters Spare parame Spare paramet Spare parame Figure 8 10 Select expanded mode when touch screen is primary station PC address in communication port attribute will become invalid when the system is set as per above method When user clicks input address on some controls the address input window as shown
221. ess range dddd dddd dddd dddd ddd ddd dddd ddd ddd dddd ddddd 0 1037 0 1037 0 8767 0 1023 0 639 0 639 0 9023 0 639 0 639 0 9023 0 16383 Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only Thinget XC XCM Series RS232 RS422 RS485 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 Yes Yes Yes Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 7 8 EVEN ODD NONE 1 2 0 255 0 255 input coil output coil internal coil flow timer status counter status Word data register Word current value of timer Word current value of counter Word FlashROM register Word expansion internal register e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 28 Yokogawa device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Yokogawa FA M3 series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Yokogawa FA M3 series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Yokogawa FA M3 series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical man
222. et E Trigger _ Synchronize Time With FPLC Figure 7 9 Dialog box of clock setting Download the system clock to HMI whether download the clock information of system into HMI Write time to PLC 316 gt Data type and length are default value gt Write address write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address gt Write mode Timed Treat the set time interval to be time unit Write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address circularly Triggered Write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address when the trigger address bit is 1 Synchronize time with PLC gt Data type and length are default value gt Read address read information in PLC address gt Read mode Timed Treat the set time interval to be time unit write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address circularly Triggered Write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address when the trigger address bit is 1 7 2 6 File protect of Sk Workshop It means that whether the file requires a password to open Double click the option Protect File in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 10 Protect File Use Password to Protect File Fassword Confirm passwe Notice After the file to encrypted pass To open please remember your pa Passwords ar
223. f Techwayson V80 series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Techwayson V80 series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Techwayson V80 series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Techwayson V80 series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Techwayson V80 COM1 COM2 series 412 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Techwayson V80 series PLC terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting VY Select Techwayson Technology in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Techwayson V80 series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC Stop bit length HMI station number 0 255 oe Online simulation a E 3 Operable register and address range dddd 1 2048 Bit input coil read only dddd 1 9999 Word 16 bit hold register Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only Read only
224. f each item is a 16 bit positive integer the total bytes of data types for all data items should be 2 2 2 2 2 That is to say the total bytes of data types for all data items are equal to 10 Then the 323 required memory is 20 10 2 60 Wherein 16 bit data type occupies 2 bytes and 32 bit data type occupies 4 bytes b Supposing the data type of LH1 and LH3 is a 32 bit positive integer when the data type of LHI and LH3 is a 32 bit positive integer the address on data item page is arranged as LHO LH1 LH3 LH5 LH6 the total bytes of data types for all data items should be 2 4 4 2 2 That is to say the total bytes of data types for all data items are equal to 14 Then the required memory is 20 14 2 68 Read address read initial address of data be introduced in details in page Data Item e Sampling method V Timed start to read data with time interval set by user Triggered start to read data when the trigger address value is 1 yV Clocked start to read data with time interval set by user e Sample full processing V Stop sampling if this option is selected when the sampling times is equal to the set Number of Sampling stop reading data from memory If this option is not selected when the sampling times is equal to the set Number of Sampling continue to read data from memory However the last group of data will be removed and the new acquired data will be added behind V Notice when current
225. f the configuration all these function chosen will be executed when the Multifunction Button 1s pressed 4 Macro When Use Macro is chosen there will be a list of available macros Choose a macro and then it will be also executed when the Multifunction Button is pressed e Label Advanced and Visibility tabs e Refer to Bit Button for introduction of Label Advanced and Visibility tabs 4 5 Basic controls of Sk Workshop This chapter mainly introduces the use of basic controls of Sk Workshop 4 5 1 Bit button of SK Workshop Bit button is used to operation and display the ON OFF state or 1 0 state of the bit address of the device connected to the touch screen Bit button is a fundamental and the most frequently used control The steps to set a bit button are as follows 1 Click Bit Button icon FE in the tool bar and then a dialog will pop up for setting of bit button properties See Figure 4 73 161 Bit Button Border Color Bis Color Fattern L_Jse1ia Function Set OH Set OFF Dot Write Address F Morni tor Macro Use Macro Figure 4 73 Bit button dialog 2 This dialog has four property tabs that are General Label Advanced and Visibility Click the tab to enter the corresponding property setting page and then to set the properties gt General Shape Click Shape button Shape and then a Shape dialog will pop up in this dialog you can choose desired shape simply b
226. ferent Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 387 10 12 Inovance device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Inovance Hlu H2u series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Inovance Hlu H2u series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Inovance Hlu H2u series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Inovance H1u H2u series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with H1lu H2u series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS422 SK series touch screen Inovance H1lu H2u COM1 COM2 series eR SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Inovance H1lu H2u series PLC terminal is MD8M 0 2 Software setting Y Select Inovance Technology Corp in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Inovance H1u H2u series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC H1lu H2u H1u H2u RS422 RS232 RS422 RS485 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200
227. fferent data operations including addition subtraction multiplication and division or modular arithmetic increment and decrement 2 Relational operator It is used for comparison operation including greater than gt less than lt equal to be equal or greater than gt be equal or less than lt and unequal to 3 Logical operator It is used for logical operation including And amp amp Or and Not 1 4 Bit operation operator The data for operation is taken as binary bit including bit and amp bit or bit not bit or 4 left shift lt lt and right shift gt gt 5 Assignment operator It is used for assignment operation including simple assignment composite arithmetic assignment and composite bit operation assignment amp gt gt lt lt 6 Conditional operator This is a ternary operator for conditional evaluation 7 Comma operator It is used for combining several expressions to one expression 8 Pointer operator It is used for two operations as content of and address of amp 9 Size of operator It is used for size of operation of data 248 10 Special operator It includes bracket subscript etc 5 1 4 One dimensional array In the program design the array organizes several variables with same category in ordered form for convenience The set containing data
228. g This page includes 8 user passwords and each password has 8 levels for option Default user level the current user level defaults NULL Uploading configuration if this option is selected the project can be uploaded from HMI to PC otherwise not Enter password in uploading it requires password in project uploading Highest permission password this password can start the controls at all permission level Enabling upload this password can upload the HMI configurable project to PC Y Y VV VV WV Permission operation this password can make operations at all permissions The connection setting between touch screen and printer is shown as Figure 7 3 310 A HEI Parameter Setting HMI Parameter Setting enh HERET Printer ports Settings FERAE Baty ep E ee ai F Print date Print time F SE Ea i Baud rate Printer port FERE Hah EN Print date Frint time Download set Download images options Clear History Alarm E Keep pictures for thi Start the Program Sc Put the pictures int Clear History Data notice To Suggestions will Download Ree Figure 7 3 Connection setting between touch screen and printer gt This page displays some parameter setting when HMI connects printer The users may make the corresponding configuration as the printer model gt Download se
229. ge Message Figure 4 63 Alarm display dialog gt In this dialog you can set color and size of the display box pattern and color of grid and time font and color of title You can also set alarm text size color and row number in alarm list box If the Rows are set to 5 the control can display 5 rows of alarm information at the same time When there is a new alarm the previous alarm will be replaced gt Language For different languages the font size font time date and message contents may be different while the background color and text color are the same as the first language gt Choose all alarming information If this option is chosen this alarm display control will display all conforming alarming information in Digital Alarm and Analog Alarm in the Project Manager otherwise only the specified alarming information chosen by the user will be displayed gt After setting these parameters press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to draw an Alarm Control on the screen See Figure 4 64 141 Figure 4 64 Size of Alarm Control is determined by the number of Rows and the maximum character length of the alarm information The size and position of Alarm Control can be adjusted using the mouse When the number of alarming messages is more than the line number set this alarming control will add one line automatically and display the alarming information in the form of rolling texts
230. ght to left Horizontal placement of the control and from left to right arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 2 1 0 From top down Vertical placement of the control and from top down arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 0 1 2 From bottom up Vertical placement of the control and from bottom up arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 2 1 0 State type Refer to the state type of Multi state Lamp 219 gt Current state Set the background color and text color of the text under the current state gt Refer to the Text and Picture tabs of Multi state Lamp for the parameter setting in Text and Picture tabs gt Refer to the Advanced and Visibility tabs of Bit Button for the Advanced and Visibility tabs 4 6 4 Dropdown box of SK Workshop Dropdown box object can display multiple items in a list and you can view and choose items in such list Once an item is chosen the corresponding value will be written to the control address of the character register aa Combox ID CREOOOO Color BG Color Lo o ees r Total Status 1 ata Type lb Bit Unsigned Ir ki mMM Control Addr e Macro Use Macro Figure 4 120 General tab of dropdown box gt Total state number Set total number of states of this object Each item is a state and will be displayed in the list This number can b
231. gure 4 122 General tab of slider analog switch Scale position Change the position of the scale markings by choosing different options Scale direction Change the direction of the scale markings by choosing different options Write address When the slider is dragged the set value of the current write address can be written and displayed on a real time basis Dynamic range If this option is chosen the values of the maximum and minimum are determined dynamically by the address chosen by the user Otherwise they will be determined by the type of the Data Type chosen by the user Refer to Scale tab of Meter for the settings in Scale tab Refer to Advanced tab of Bit Button for the Advanced tab and Visibility tab 223 4 6 6 Animation of Sk Workshop Animation You may define the movement track of an element and control the state of the element and its position in the movement track by changing the data in the character register The system uses two consecutive registers to control animation element The first is used to control the state of the element while the second to control position of the element The icon of this control in the toolbar is After clicking the icon you can specify movement points of the control in the screen note Up to 64 track points can be specified Right click the mouse to end the point specifying process Double click this control and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 123 will pop up 28
232. h screen of Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd include PLC single chip transducer and some other industrial control devices SK series touch screen can establish communication connection with PLC from most manufacturers in the world including MITSUBISHI OMRON SIEMENS ALLEN BRADLEY MATSUSHITA DELTA FATEK etc In addition it can monitor and control some special industrial control devices via special protocols as MODBUS RTU ASCII HOSTLINK and some customized protocols The I O driver of different PLC for each manufacturer is made into file When the users specify a PLC in establishing item the system will know what drivers to be used and other complicated programming is not required by engineering designer SKWorkshop is the matched configuration software of SK series touch screen from Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Through the configuration it can realize convenient operations for various types of register or relay for 367 most PLC or devices The operation mode includes read only write only and read write which is able to satisfy all requirements of your industrial control For the convenience to connect different devices Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd could develop device drives according to the requirements of user which requires the users to provide corresponding protocol documents of communication devices only Any users for the requirement can contact with Shenzhen Samkoon Automation
233. have an option to match the touching conditions and then this control is not touchable in simulation or initialized screen Minimum press down time Indicates how long in second should the control be pressed down to take effect in simulation or screen 169 Notification When the control is touchable if you click this control and enter a value in the pop up keyboard the system will write a user specified state value 1 or 0 to the Notification Bit address set by the User Notification register When the control is touchable if you click this control and enter a value in the pop up keyboard the system will write a user specified state value Set Value entered by the user to the Notification Register Address set by the user The default user level is 1 that is the minimum level Designers can change the user level in the Change User Level option in the function buttons after entering correct password Effective touch means that there are actual actions after the control is touched for example successful setting resetting inching and alteration Notification will be given only upon effective touch Taking numeric entry for example when you touch numeric entry button a keyboard will pop up At this moment although the numeric entry button has action against the touch no write operation will be carried out to the write address so there will be no notification If the keyboard is quitted by pressing ESC no
234. he background color of the dynamic circle control Solid If this option is not checked the circle will be a hollow circle without background color if this option is checked the circle will be filled with the background color defined in BG Color option Border If this option is not checked the circle will have no border line and thus the border line color cannot be changed If this option is checked the circle will have border line and the border color can be changed through the Border Color option below For example If the Data Type chosen by the user is 16 digit positive integer then the control can read continuously three data from the monitored address according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of circle center Y coordinate of circle center and radius of the circle If the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW2 and LW3 will be read respectively with the following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the circle center The value of LW2 is the Y coordinate of the circle center The value of LW3 is the radius of the circle The touch screen will read from three addresses no matter whether Center and or Radius option is checked and the meanings of these addresses remain the same For example if only Radius is chosen and the monitored address is LW1 then the value of LW3 controls the radius of the circle If the Data Type chosen by th
235. he model there are C model D model and F model additionally Different kinds of HMI have different resolutions S indicating the HMI model is standard E indicates economic HMI gt Display mode to adjust the horizontal or vertical display mode gt Startup setting of touch screen Start screen the startup screen while the touch screen is powered on Screen saver time the set screen saver time Flicker frequency make setting of flicker frequency for the object or control with flickering mark which can be changed the speed by direct entry and clicking spin button Alarm sound if the alarm is set the touch screen may make a sound to inform of users There are two options as with sound and without sound in the right drop down list Touch sound it can set the touch screen sound from the right drop down list Screensaver picture select one picture as the screensaver picture You can exit the screensaver picture by touching the touch screen Load picture if there is the option it will display the selected loading picture after the touch screen if powered on When it remains the setting time it will shift to the startup screen which may give some hints or considerations for users in the screen Flicker screen in alarm when there makes alarm the background with alarm control or alarm bar screen will be replaced by screen background color The flicker frequency is same with the above description g
236. he monitored read address is higher than this limit the pattern color and background color of the control will be the pattern color and background color set in the higher Level Color gt After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen When the value of the monitored read address is higher than the lower limit and lower than the higher limit the pattern color and background color of the bar graph will be the pattern color and background color set in the General tab Refer to Bit Button control for use of the Visibility tab 4 5 13 Time display of Sk Workshop Time Display control is mainly used to display system time Click Time Display control icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 110 will appear Generel Border Color Fis Color Bi Color Pattern Format Font Font Size Ali gmment E Left Cente 206 gt gt gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become N Draw a rectangle in the picture area by Figure 4 110 Time display dialog Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Format Format of time display including two formats that is HH MM Hour Minute HH MM SS Hour Minute Second HH MM
237. he window gt Move the mouse to a position where a line will be drawn left click the mouse once and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be an end of the polygonal line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically Move the mouse to a position where you want to change the direction of the line left click the mouse once and then a small green rectangle will appear At this moment the line from the first end to this green rectangle will not move along with the mouse Then move the mouse to another position where you want to change the direction of the line and left click again When a desired polygonal line has been drawn right click the mouse to complete See Figure 4 25 104 Figure 4 28 Drawing a polygonal line gt After completing the above steps the polygonal line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the polygonal line and double click or click Properties button Gi in the tool bar after choosing the polygonal line At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear You may adjust the properties of the polygonal line using the pull down and fine tuning button SK Workshop provides 6 line types 30 line widths and 6 line end a
238. hop has a layer and graph objects on upper layer are always displayed on top of the objects on lower layer Thus we can use this command to adjust layer level of graph objects By default objects created later are on upper layer than those created earlier There are four Layer commands that are Move object forward Move object backward Move object one layer forward and Move object one layer backward To execute these commands first choose one or more graph objects in the current screen and then choose corresponding Layer commands in Edit menu or the tool button Move object forward This command is used to move the chosen object to the top layer of all the graph objects in the current screen Thus the parts of other graphs intersected with this graph will be covered by this graph Figure 4 7 shows a contrast before and after such moving First choose an object in several graphs and then choose Move to Top command in Edit menu or command button Ehl in the toolbar buttons or call the right click menu and choose Move to Top command in the Layer option See Figure 4 8 for a comparison before and after combination biect before the forward Object moved forward after Figure 4 8 Contrast before and after moving object forward Move object backward 96 This command is used to move the chosen object to the bottom layer of all the graph objects in the current screen Thus the part of this graph intersected with
239. hortcut key of Ctrl C used to copy the object chosen to the paste buffer area bell Corresponding to Paste command with the shortcut key of Ctrl V used to copy the object in the paste buffer area to the current screen K Corresponding to Delete command with the shortcut key of Ctrl Del used to delete a chosen object from the screen Corresponding to Move object forward command used to move the chosen object to the top layer of the screen th Corresponding to Move object backward command used to move the chosen object to the bottom layer of the screen E Corresponding to Move object one layer forward command used to move the chosen object one layer forward i Corresponding to Move object one layer backward command used to move the chosen object one layer backward p g J y J y ai Corresponding to Assemble command used to assemble several graph objects chosen to one combined object i Corresponding to Disassemble command used to disassemble an assembled graph object to the original objects It is a reverse operation of Assemble IP Corresponding to Left align command used to align the left boundaries of the chosen objects on the left Corresponding to Right align command used to align the right boundaries of the chosen objects on the right mi Corresponding to Top align command used to align the top boundaries of the chosen obj
240. hortcuts Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the following HH Start Menu folder To continue click Next If you would like to select a different folder click Browse Figure 2 7 Installation folder selection dialog Choose whether to create a desktop shortcut and then click Next as shown in Figure 2 8 42 ie Setup SEWorkshop Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing SEWorkshop then click Hext Additional icons Figure 2 8 Choose whether to create a desktop shortcut Then a confirmation dialog will appear showing the installation directory installation folder and whether to create a desktop shortcut chosen by the user Click Next as shown in Figure 2 9 ie setup SEForkshop Ready to Install Setup 15 now ready to begin installing SEWorkshop on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click want to review or change any settings a SS SS SS SSS SS SS SSS SS SS SS SSS Destination location C Program FilesSEKW orkshop Start Menu folder okWorkshop Additional tasks Additional icons Create a desktop icon Figure 2 9 Installation confirmation dialog Then an installation dialog will appear where you can click Cancel to cancel the installation as shown in Figure 2 10 43 ie Setup SEPorkshop Installing Please wait whil
241. i tes53 High Color Low Color Text Color a Text Color m Low Color Low Color Oooo o Figure 4 97 Advanced tab of numeric display gt Scaling When this option is checked the data displayed will be Value of monitored address x Gain Offset gt Range display gt Range display If this option is chosen you can set the lower limit higher limit lower level color and higher level color and then value of the monitored read address will be reflected with different colors in the set range gt Variable range The values of Lower Limit and Higher Limit are changing depending on the address entered by the user gt Lower limit When the value of the monitored read address is lower than this limit the pattern color and background color of the control will be the pattern color and background color set in the Lower Level Color gt Higher limit When the value of the monitored read address is higher than this limit the pattern color and background color of the control will be the pattern color and background color set in the higher Level Color For example if the BG color and text color in General tab are defined with Range Display checked as shown in Figure 4 98 193 Wameric Display CC General i Picture Advanced Visibility Shape Border Color Il Fi Color gg8g Bis Color Text Color Pattern asia Range Display Variable Low Limit 10 High Limi t20 High Color
242. ialog box of HMI protect Take an example to describe the use method of this function gt Select Use HMI Protect Function gt Suppose the Total Number of Password level is set to 3 in the dialog box then click 1 button icon and select application date in column Time limit of Parameter Setting suppose to be 2009 04 01 enter application 318 time in next column suppose to be 12 00 00 select the prompt screen when time limit is reached in option Prompt Screen suppose to be screen 1 enter unlock password in option Unlock Protection Password suppose to be 1111 Now setting of level 1 HMI protect is finished gt As above click 2 button icon 2 select application date in column Time limit of Parameter Setting suppose to be 2009 04 05 enter application time in next column suppose to be 12 00 00 select the prompt screen when time limit is reached in option Prompt Screen suppose to be screen 2 enter unlock password in option Unlock Protection Password suppose to be 2222 Now setting of level 2 HMI protect is finished gt As above click 3 button icon 3 select application date in column Time limit of Parameter Setting suppose to be 2009 04 10 enter application time in next column suppose to be 12 00 00 select the prompt screen when time limit is reached in option Prompt Screen suppose to be screen 3 enter unlock password in option U
243. ic circle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device fe Corresponding to Dynamic rectangle command used to create in the current screen a dynamic rectangle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device i Corresponding to Flow block command used to create a flow simulation control in the current screen af Corresponding to Graphics move command used to create in the current screen a graph display box whose picture state and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Animation used to create an animation control in the current screen to move the controls ny Corresponding to Meter command used to create in the current screen a meter to monitor the change in the value of single address of the connected device T Fan chart used to create a fan chart pie chart control in the current screen to read the value of the monitored address and present it to the control 69 with height change or left right movement of bars Bar graph used to insert a bar control in the current screen to show the change in the values of the monitored address ie Trend chart used to create a trend chart control in the current screen to monitor the value change trend of continuous
244. id under current operation status See Figure 2 40 dhiii P A BRE RH D r AeA E O D E E a PA HO N OD G6 Banguagele A TE tet tte ON OFF bundi e a Pd A a E A MATMA TT TE OAE EAGAR E a R a ln Pee E O E E a A lll TN O Figure 2 40 Tool bar As shown in the figure above the commands in the tool bar are corresponding to the commands in the menus The functions of the buttons are as follows Standard toolbar Corresponding to New command with the shortcut key of Ctrl N used to create a new blank project ed i Corresponding to Open command with the shortcut key of Ctrl O used to open an existing project file saved in Windows with an extension name of drw YU Corresponding to New Screen command used to create a new screen in the current project 64 kl Corresponding to Save command with the shortcut key of Ctrl S used to save the current screen configuration that has been changed with the file name and directory being the same as the original Corresponding to Undo command with the shortcut key of Ctrl Z used to cancel the last operation t Corresponding to Redo command with the shortcut key of Ctrl Z used to recover the last operation I Corresponding to Cut command with the shortcut key of Ctrl X used to delete the object chosen and copy it to the paste buffer area w Corresponding to Copy command with the s
245. ies two addresses DDD dddd 0 0 255 8192 Double word DB block storage block number DD 0 255 each block word dddd 0 8192 8 bit register each double word occupies four addresses Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 DDD indicates the block number and the input range is 0 255 word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 23 TaiAn device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of TaiAn TP03 series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of TaiAn TP03 series PLC through the serial port of 409 touch screen so as to operate TaiAn TPO03 series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of TaiAn TPO3 series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with TaiAn TP03 series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch scr
246. ight of the rectangle Thus if the chosen Data Type is 32 digit positive integer the control can read four data from the monitored address adding 2 to the address each time according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of the rectangle Y coordinate of the rectangle width of the rectangle and height of the rectangle Controllable Only Position is chosen The width and height of the rectangle does not change with the corresponding values of the monitored address the position of the rectangle changes with the corresponding values of the monitored address Only Size is chosen The width and height of the rectangle changes based on the anchor point defined with the position remaining unchanged The meaning of the four anchor points is as follows Upper left The upper left corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes towards the lower right comer Upper right The upper right corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes towards the lower left comer Lower left The lower left corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes towards the upper right comer Lower right The lower right corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes towards the upper left corner 139 Solid If this option is not checked the rectangle will be a hollow rectangle without background color if this
247. igure 3 1 New project dialog Figure 3 1 shows a New Project dialog Please choose a project name the path for project file saving the model and the show model and then you can click Next to set the communication port The concrete model selection depends on the model of the touch screen actually used by the user A project name cannot include the following characters lt gt 3 1 2 Communication port setting dialog This dialog is used to set communication parameters of the communication port of the touch screen Correct setting of communication parameters is vital for successful communication between the touch screen and PLC The particular parameters depend on the model of the PLC to be connected Link name Name of the communication port Link type Communication manner Device server Model and brand of PLC model of CPU Link port Selecting a proper COM port 71 PLC continuous address interval Setting interval of PLC addresses The default value is recommended Hew Link Link ID Link Hame OMi Connecting Figure 3 2 Communication setting dialog Figure 3 2 shows a communication port setting dialog Designers can choose appropriate options in this dialog basing on the actual conditions To use Ethernet connection choose Direct Conne
248. il return 1 Usage int GETBUFFERLENGTH PortID Example int bufferlen PortID PortID 0 bufferlen GETBUFFERLENGTH PortID 25 CLEARBUFFER This function is applied for free port communication only Description Clear buffer of communication port PortID allows to Serial Port ID COM1 0 COM2 1 Success return 1 fail return 0 Usage int CLEARBUFFER PortID Example int Clearresult PortID PortID 0 Clearresult GETBUFFERLENGTH PortID 6 SKWorkshop off line simulation This Chapter mainly gives the introduction of usage and steps for offline simulation 6 1 Offline simulation of Sk Workshop Use SKWorkshop self contained function of off line simulation to verify the correctness of configuration screen before transmitting screen into HMI and connecting HMI with connection device e Operation process 289 Save currently edited project and select the off line simulation command in download menu to pop up the window of off line simulation In this window you can use mouse to click other than touch screen to realize partial functions of touch screen as shown in figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 Diagram of SK 4 3A off line simulation In simulation window select the right key to pop up following menu Exit About Exit close window of off line simulation when the current window of WINDOWS displays off line simulation you can also press ESC on keyboard to exit off line simulati
249. ine thick straight line diamond and triangle gt Direction Here you can choose clockwise or counterclockwise movement of the pointer gt Data Type Here you can choose different data types according to actual needs gt Monitor Address An address the value of which will be displayed in the meter and pointed by needle gt Max Maximum value of the monitor address allowed gt Min Minimum value of the monitor address allowed Click the Scale tab to set scale properties See Figure 4 68 148 m8 Deter Display Color Humber of Humber of v Avis 7 2e v Marks Font Size Min Total Dig Fractiona Figure 4 68 Scale tab of meter In this tab you can set scale color number of main scales number of sub scales whether to display axis whether to display marks and the like 3 In screed edit area press down left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to draw a Meter control See Figure 4 69 for an example of Meter S0 100 160 180 Figure 4 69 149 4 Choose the Meter graph and then you can move the mouse to any of the 8 small green dots on the graph to change the size of the control or double click the control to modify the properties of the Meter Meter control has fixed width height ratio so when you adjust the size of the control the width and the height change simultaneously Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 12 Historical data d
250. ine to be 5 in popped up dialog box Values of all other attributes are default value A table will generate automatically in screen after clicking OK as shown in figure 7 19 Figure 7 19 Display data table in historical data collector Above table has following applications Date read date of some address value Time read time of some address value Column kui display value of LW1 address read at some time Column 3 display value of LW4 address read at some time Column 4 display value of LW5 address read at some time J a N y Column View display value of LW2 address read at some time V R N Column 5 display value of LW7 address read at some time For example the read address is LW2 the sampling length is 3 the sampling sum is 10 the time interval is 1 s when sampling mode is time triggered each data type on the data item page is defaulted v When the stop sampling in disposal as full is not selected it will read LW1 LW2 and LW3 once every other 1 second As the total sampling is 10 groups it reads out 10 groups of data at the 10 second As the stop sampling is not selected it will continue to read data As the three properties of sampling 326 length sampling sum and data type needs a fixed memory to save the data when the data group reaches to sampling sum the first acquired data is removed and the latter data will move u
251. ing Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC V VH VB M Series V VH VB M Series Communication port RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 Baud rate 19200 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 Data bit length z 7 8 Parity check bit EVEN EVEN ODD NONE Stop bit length l 1 2 PLC station number 0 0 255 HMI station number 0 0 255 Support functions Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Yes Extension mode No 3 Operable register and address range Register Name Address Format Input Range 000 0 777 Bit input contact 000 0 777 Bit output contact 414 ML dddd 0 8999 Bit internal relay M dddd 9000 9255 Bit special internal relay PS dddd 0 999 Bit step relay ddd 0 255 Bit timer status ddd 0 255 Bit counter status O D dddd 0 8999 Bit data register Oo DD dddd 9000 9255 Word special data register ddd 0 255 Word current value of timer ddd 0 199 Word current value of counter ddd 200 255 Word current value of 32 bit counter Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device
252. ing item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Modicon NEZA TWIDO M218 series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range NEZA Series NEZA TWIDO M218 Series PLC RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 Stop bit length 1 1 2 HMI station number 0 0 255 MO ll Online simulation Yes Extension mode 3 Operable register and address range NEZA Series MW Se ESE Al a b vora data TWIDO Series 402 M ddddd 0 65535 M218 Series MX Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 20 Nanda device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Nanda NA 200 400 series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of N
253. ing number in C language has suffix The figure with suffix f or F is the floating number For example 356f and 356 is equivalent Float variable The float variable includes single and double Their type specifiers are float and double In the Turbo C the single occupies four bytes 32 bit memory and it is ranged between 3 4E 38 3 4E 38 which provides seven effective figures only The double occupies 8 bytes 64 bit memory and the value is ranged between 1 7E 308 1 7E 308 which provides sixteen effective figures The form and written rules for float variable declaration is same with that of integer For example float x y x y is single float double a b c a b c is double float The float constant is not classified into single and double All float constants are processed as double a EEEE b SEEEEEEE a lt 33333 33333 b lt 33333 33333333333 Practice float int a 32 float b double d b 12345678 d b 100 244 d d a d d 58 123456 7 Character Characters include character constant and character variable Character constant Character constant is a character within single quote For example a b are the legal character constants In the C language the character constants are always characterized as following 1 Character constant must be included in single quote rather than double quotes or other brackets 2 Character constant must be single character rather than ch
254. inimum requirements Install SK Workshop4 0 0 using the installation CD provided along with the product The detailed installation steps are as follows e Start up Windows Place the CD into the CD drive e The contents of the CD are shown in Figure 2 1 Please check the contents of the CD ait orun R fa autorun USE driver Hoy AutoPlay Meru Lo EJ Linasoft ge Samir sah ATM ag Setup Cigale Gal st Setup 5 193 a W ShenZhen Samkoon alt or wm 3 16 x 16 By Be Readme Kr BT 4 EE a ai apm Figure 2 1 Contents of the installation CD If any part of the contents is missing please contact the Company and we will provide sincere service to you e After inserting the CD a window of SK Workshop installation program will pop up Open the CD directly and execute Setup _V4 0 0 exe Then an installation window as shown in Figure 2 2 will appear AUTO manion i Technologyicolitd mE Install USB drive Tm IE Thenie you iar Techinalace Co il a a Deam maheni Cog ak ie Tesh aoe a i ot a rerio porte ec andy ey Re Demanui se tuning pe in wth is g EESE h sanimanationiea paita eR IMPS tual proppen Pr Pasei neneng e 055229419028 T 29419038 2941906 eo ete mS 4 Pax OSS 204 Figure 2 2 Automatic running page 39 e In the installation window select Install SK Workshop4 0 0 that is left click the red circle in Figure 2 2 to start installation e In
255. ints to be noted in while statement 1 The expression of while statement is usually the relational expression or logical expression As long as the expression value is true not 0 it can continue loop 2 Ifthe loop body contains one or more statements it must be bracketed with to form the compound statement 3 Note the loop conditions to avoid endless loop 2 Do while statement 258 General form of do while statement do statement while expression Wherein the statement is loop body and the expression is the loop condition Semanteme of do while statement First execute the loop body statement for one time then judge the expression value If the value is true not 0 the loop is continuous otherwise the loop ends The difference between do while statement and while statement is that do while executes first and judges late Therefore do while will execute the loop body for one time at least But while statement judges first and executes late If the condition is unsatisfied the loop body statement is not executed for one time while statement and do while statement is usually mutual re write In this example the loop condition is rewritten to be n Otherwise one more loop will be executed There are some points to be noted in do while statement 1 In the if statement and while statement no semicolon is added behind the expression while the expression of do while statement must be ended with semicolon
256. ion over data and address The data type should be the same as the type of the data to be indicated 2 Text Click Text tab in the Multi state lamp property dialog and then a property setting dialog as shown in Figure 4 90 will appear H NultiState Lamp General Text Picture Visibility All language use the first languag tape the property will the Attribute TE Text Language Font Font Size Color ford Interve0 Position O O O O O Figure 4 90 Text tab of multi state lamp 184 gt Text of the first language used for all languages This option is used for multiple languages cases that are when the total numbers of languages is more than 1 in the Language option of the Project Manager If this option is chosen the language of the control will not be changed along with the language switch gt Language This option is used for multiple languages cases You can choose different languages and enter different texts under different states getting prepared for multiple language controls Thus when Switch Language option is chosen in the function buttons and a target language is chosen all the text controls in the screen will use specified language after clicking this function button For different languages text contents font and font size may be different but color word space and position are the same gt Font Font of the text contents entered You may choose different fonts for different st
257. ions of different mouse shapes Choosing object and left clicking tool button Drawing a graph Inputting text Enlarging object horizontally Enlarging object both vertically and horizontally Readjusting Enlarging object both vertically and horizontally Rotating object Table 2 1 Different mouse shapes and corresponding meanings 2 8 3 Shortcut keys Table 2 2 below lists common shortcut keys Designers can use these keys to quicken the configuration Shift left click Select several objects at the same time Move the object chosen left right up and e3Tl down Table 2 2 Shortcut keys 2 8 4 Common terms of SK Workshop Table 2 3 below lists some frequently used terms in this Manual 74 Choose an object Configuration Command button Shortened name of user application system Introduction of this concept is to make the complex computer technologies closer to common engineering users Files generated by SK Workshop are called project files with an extension name of shm and can be saved to a directory specified by the user General designation of operation object and operation environment For example window part data graph and the like can be all referred to as object Choosing an object refers to the process of clicking a window or object to make it operable The chosen object including window is also called current object Configuration refers to the process of defini
258. is 16 bit Therefore the indicated figure value is limited The decimal unsigned constant is within 0 65535 and the signed range is 32768 32767 The unsigned octal number is ranged within 0 0177777 The unsigned hexadecimal number is within OX0 OXFFFF or 0x0 OxFFFF If the figure is beyond the above range it must indicate with long integer The long integer is suffixed with L or 1 For example Decimal long integer constant 158L decimal 158 358000L decimal 358000 Octal long integer constant 012L decimal 10 077L decimal 63 O200000L decimal 65536 Hexadecimal long integer constant OXI15L decimal 21 OXASL decimal 165 OX10000L decimal 65536 There is no difference between long int 158L and basic int constant 158 As 158L is the long integer C compiling system will assign 4 bit space for storage As 158 is the long integer C compiling system will assign 2 bit space for storage Therefore pay attention to operation and output format to avoid mistakes The unsigned number can be indicated with suffix The unsigned number of integer constant is suffixed with U or u For example 358u 0x38Au 235Lu are the unsigned number Use prefix and suffix together to indicate different figures For example OXAS5Lu indicates the hexadecimal unsigned long int A5 and the corresponding decimal is 165 3 Integer variable The integer variable can be classified as following l Int Its type specifier is int which occ
259. is graph intersected with other graphs will be covered by other graphs Figure 4 10 shows a contrast before and after such moving 97 First choose an object in several graphs and then choose Move to Lower Layer command in Edit menu or command button LE in the toolbar buttons or call the right click menu and choose Move to Lower Layer command in the Layer option See Figure 4 11 for a comparison before and after combination spy o a The object of a The object of a aver a Ormer back again back twice Figure 4 11 Contrast before and after moving object one layer backward 4 2 3 Rotary of Sk Workshop Rotary command is a group command allowing designer to rotate one or more graph objects by any angle There are many rotatable graph objects such as line circle rectangle and graphs in the picture library of the system controls assembled graphs and polygons gt Horizontal overturning Horizontal rotation allows designers to overturn a chosen graph object or several graph objects by 180 around a vertical center line Use of the horizontal overturning command is simple First choose one or more graph objects then click Horizontal Overturn command in Rotary option in Edit menu or click horizontal overturn button dt in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Horizontal Overturn command in Rotary option in the nght click menu See Figure 4 12 for horizontal overturning of single graph object
260. isfied with any color in this box you can define a color by yourself by clicking Mon the right bottom For the purpose of such definition first choose a base color in the dialog and then drag the mouse in the square color area in the middle Then you may also drag the mouse in the rectangular box on the right to finalize the color At last click Add to self defined colors on the right bottom and then click OK to complete color definition Alternatively you may also enter the composition values of the three primary colors in the boxes above the Add to self defined colors button to get a self defined color See Figure 3 3 and 3 4 g a Hew Screen Sereen Ham Backer ound Default BG Color Fis Color Fattern cUecO cl Figure 3 3 New screen dialog 79 Select Color Basic colors Custom colors Add to Custom Colors Alpha channel Figure 3 4 Color selection dialog Then click OK and then the system will immediately open the screen you created just now After that the new screen creation is completed and you can use SKWorkshop to configure your project screens Screen name cannot be led by space and numbers and cannot contain other special symbols 3 2 Setting parameters and adding graph objects with SK Workshop 3 2 1 Setting parameters In the Setting menu you can choose to modify the settings and you can also modify parameters by double clicking touch sc
261. isplay of SK Workshop In actual use some data generated by PLC or other connected devices may change all the time such as alarm information Sometimes we need to view some historical data and in SKWorkshop we can do this using the Historic Data Collector SKWorkshop provides a collector of historical data and you can enter Historic Data Collector dialog in the Project Manager If the project is a new project you need to right click the Historic Data Collector and choose Add a Historic Data Collector option After that double click it to enter Historic Data Collector dialog Refer to Chapter VI for detailed introduction of the Historic Data Collector Click Historic Record Display button fe in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 70 will appear Historical data display ID mnooo Frame Title bar FG Color 1 Border co Font Size iy Text Color a Font Rows 5 s BG Color DO Tf use control address Text Color aes Control Address p Time DispTi Language Font Size 10 Date Lisplate DD MM TY F Humb er Figure 4 70 Historic record display dialog 150 General tab gt FG Color Click the color in the box to change the foreground color of the Display gt Border Color Click the color in the box to change the border color of the Display gt Grid Define whether to display grids and the color of gri
262. ister are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to avoid mis operation over data and address Fractional digits Setting of this parameter will impact the data display effect If the data type chosen is 16 32 digit positive integer or 16 32 digit integer the number displayed will be the return number subject to decimal point left movement by the number of digits as set in this parameter For example if the return number is 212 and the number of fractional digits set here is 2 then 2 12 will be displayed If the data type chosen is 32 digit floating point number then the decimal point will not be moved but only the set fractional digits will be displayed For example if the return number is 2 123 and the number of fractional digits set here is 2 then 2 12 will be displayed Total digits The sum of the number of integer digits and fractional digits If the integer length of the number to be displayed is longer than the set value the integer length displayed will be the integer length of the actual number For example if the return number is 2123 the data length is 2 and the number fractional digits are 1 then 212 3 will be displayed 66399 gt Password input If this option is chosen the characters entered by the user will be displayed as during the entering and display process gt If Use Macro option is checked a lis
263. ister names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 8 HaiWell device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Haiwell E S H series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Haiwell E S H series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Haiwell E S H series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Haiwell E S H series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Haiwell E S H series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen HaiWell E S H COM1 COM2 series SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Haiwell E S H series PLC terminal is MD4M 2 Software setting v Select Haiwell Technology Corp in the connection device service vY Select the corresponding items in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Haiwell E S H series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC Haiwell E S Series MicroLogix DF1_CRC MicroLogix DF1_ BCC Communication port RS232 RS232 RS
264. ital Alarm and Analog Alarm in the Project Manager otherwise only the specified alarming information chosen by the user will be displayed gt Font size Here you can change the word size of the alarm text gt Text color Here you can change the word color of the alarm text gt Speed Movement speed of the alarm information gt Direction Movement direction of the alarm information either from left to right or from right to left gt Alarm sort Display sequence of the alarm information Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern If Off line Simulation is to be called the Font Size must be 16x16 if not other font sizes can be used 143 Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 9 Historic alarm display of SK Workshop Historical alaram display The main function of Historic Alarm Display is to display previous alarm information This control has the same operation steps as Alarm Display so you can refer to the introduction of Alarm Display for reference The icon of Historic Alarm Display in the tool bar is 2 The following dialog will pop up after clicking this button Bis Color Border Col Tf use control address Control Address gt Use control address Title Language Font Size Font Bir Color Text Color Time Date Message Message Humber Date Clear Alar
265. iting commands of SK Workshop ccccccccccccccssssssssseseseeeeccceeeeeeeeesasaaasessseseseeeeees 88 4 2 1 Assemble and disassemble of SK Workshop ccccccccccccceceececceseeeessesseseceeeeeeeeeeaaaas 88 A 2 2 Layer or SE VV OL eS IO 0 eile ce valine a a a a e a i 89 4 2 3 Rotary ot OK WOrKSNO Deiric erinan E T E il eye 91 4 2 4 TS of SK W OF KS HOP ctacase cds tein chad na nudes tepiue nce aebelc hist ece eet eees 92 4 3 Drawing basic graphs with SK Workshop ccccccccccccccccccesessessseeeececeeeceeeeeeaaaeeeeesseseeeeeeees 96 4 3 1 MATEO TSW OLS Op sre odes wae tortinrc dasa we reeds oath ai bottndisaria ie toipncie thc tote inode 96 4 3 2 Poligonal neor SK Works hopar airan a cl ell oe iO el we cil eel as 97 4 3 3 C rve Arc Of SK WorkShop ccc erwin dena dotace es adit dedi a ldadedenadaies 97 4 3 4 Pree line Or SKC W OFKSNG Pisses ccsercsnsiases asauern ati E ae teeees E e E S 98 4 3 5 Rectansle Ol SI W OFS HO Porn a E E 99 4 3 6 Rounded trectanele of SK Workshop asean kien cee eee eee 100 4 3 7 Bllipse Circle of SK WOLKSHOD eccirni a R esteem a 101 4 3 8 Polygon of SK Workshop ss0esecceeeeecccccccceenssssseseseeececeeecceceececesscseesseeeeeess 102 4 3 9 Pate mare OF OK W OLS HOD i seetet aches cision EE EAA tel sonnets 103 ASANO Vexteraphs Or SW OrkSMOpiecetcd sacs oitsu sree atari at asst a eee 103 4 3 11 Table graph of SK WorkShop wissccccseccnsts cccvssacelecsseedcceehetedeus be iiacshedelcas
266. itoring and control equipments teaching instruments advanced manufacturing system and equipments and general equipment control industries The Company has become leading in the domestic market and won wide favorable comments of users by virtue of excellent product quality stable software operation and powerful product functions In view of the various design and construction requirements of industrial control projects technicians of Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd devoted themselves to development and application of generic configuration screen editing software To meet the needs of the wide industrial control circle in the whole world for configuration screen editing software Shenzhen Samkoon launched this SK Workshop4 0 0 generic industrial automation configuration screen editing software for the users in the whole country and even the whole world SK Workshop generic industrial automation configuration editing software is a kind of configuration software used to quickly construct and generate embedded computer monitoring and control system Based on the Company s rich experience in configuration software development and application over the years this software uses currently advanced computer software technology uses window as the unit constructs graphical interfaces for user operation system and provides users with engineering solutions through field data collection and processing and by means of animated drawings alarm pr
267. ivision of four address values of LW1 V Low L when the address value of item is less than its limit and option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm V Low when the item value is equal to or greater than the limit for option Low L and is less than limit for option Low and the option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm V High when the item value is more than limit for option High and less than or equal to limit for option High H and the option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm V High H when the address value of item is more than its limit and option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm e Click some item in list box The meaning of option Use selected or not is same to that in Digital Alarm Log Users can refer to Use in Digital Alarm Log 7 7 Alarm display controls of Sk Workshop Select in toolbar and set the display content and parameter of alarm bar in its dialog box as shown in figure 7 28 335 l Alarma Bar Border Colo Sample M Haa BG Color Fattern Text Uption ta show alarm cont Font Size w Select all alarm con Text Color Attribute Speed
268. izes auto conversion for the hybrid operation of different types of data which converts from small byte data to big byte data For the mutual assignment of different data the system also converts automatically which converts the right data type into left one Forced conversion It is converted by forced conversion operator 6 Priority and associativity of operator Generally speaking the unary operator has higher priority and the assignment operator has lower priority The arithmetic operator has higher priority and the relational and logical has lower priority Most operators have left associativity unary operator ternary operator and assignment 7 Expression Expression is the formula composed with connection constant variable and function of operator Each expression has one value and type The evaluation of expression is made according to the sequence specified by priority and associativity of operator 8 Array 1 Array is the commonest data structure in program design The array contains numerical array int array float array character array and pointer array structure array to be described later 2 Array may be one dimensional two dimensional or multi dimensional 3 The type declaration of array consists of type specifier array name and array length elements quantity of array The array element is also called subscript variable The array type refers to the value type of subscript variable 4 Make array assignm
269. kshop C Documents File Edit View Draw H and Settings dministrator R M TEST sha Screenl D A Setting A HI Parameter Ses EEA HMI Status ERN PLC Control language1 x ti tk E Clock a amp File Protection HMI Protection Variable table Sereen 000 Screenl E Window G Historical Data Log F Alarm Log G Recipe an A ER eae 1 languagel P amp fi fk Data Transport x 494 y 278 Coordinate Left Top Size Width Height _ SamKoon 4 Simulate or download to HMI when the users click button 1 button 2 and button 3 separately all controls with text in the project will display in the text at defined language which is shown as following figure The above figure is the state at language 1 by clicking button 1 306 es herp ee Sr ree ee ere A sia ans sn Gs we ne Sa fa shag k The above figure is the state at language 2 by clicking button 2 The above figure is the state at language 3 by clicking button 3 To realize the multilingual function of the overall project it has to enter the different contents for different languages in each control or each objective with text entry the operation is same to item 1 In this case the project can be switched to the specified language while the language switch of function button is used 307 7 2 2 Parameter setting of touch screen of SK Workshop The HMI model selected for project can be designated at the time
270. l equipped with two serial interfaces and a B type female USB interface USB COMI COM p 4 Fa ch EE OS Tz f aI PFC connector FLC communication interface Figure 1 15 Side panel of SK series 20 1 4 4 Operation indicator light Operation state indicator lights on the touch screen include power indicator light PWR operation indicator light RUN and communication indicator light COM See Figure 1 16 When the touch screen is powered on the PWR light is on green when the touch screen CPU is running normally RUN light is on yellow and when CPU fails RUN light is off When a PLC is connected the COM light is flashing yellow Table 1 1 shows the display statuses of the three LED indicator lights on _ Figure 1 16 Operation indicator lights of SK series different working state Equipment state Green LED PWR Yellow LED RUN Yellow LED COM C wwa o O o D e O e O connected equipment O LED is off LED ison X LED is flashing Table 1 1 1 5 Technical parameters Detailed parameters of SK 3 5 This model of machine only has economic type but no standard type i Number of COM l interfaces 21 USB device USB main interfaces None i Service life of back light Touch screen plate Communication interface User memory 3W Power supply CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test Protection grade IP 65 fro
271. l of Allen Bradley AB series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Allen Bradley AB series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 Allen Bradley AB SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector AB device terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting v Select Allen Bradley in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents for PLC setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range MicroLogix DF1 CRC MicroLogix DF1 CRC MicroLogix DFI BCC PLC RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 372 Stop bit length 1 1 2 HMI station number 0 0 255 ROO lw Online simulation Yes yy 3 Operable register and address range 0 ddd o 0 0 0 0 255 7 Bit output image register 2 ddd o 2 0 0 2 255 7 _ Bit system status bit 2 ddd 2 0 2 255 Bit system status word ddd ddd 8 0 255 255 Word float register T_ACC T_PRE ddd ddd 4 0 255 255 Word PRE value of timer C_ACC C PRE ddd ddd 530 255253 Word PRE value of counter Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range
272. l of SK Workshop configuration SOftware ccccccccsssseseeseseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaasaeseeenees 42 25 OPE PALI OM ol SKE WOTKShO Posni Ss lens Ss A can ag sake ch esc ain ea 44 2 6 Installation of USB driver of SK Workshop ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeseeeesseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeees 45 2 7 Editing page and system composition Of SK Workshop cccccccccccccsssssssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 49 ZN Editing pagcor OK WOKS HO Pieced chaccut til E E E TA A E 49 22 System composition Of SK Workshop sarsii annn E E O 67 2 8 Basic operations Of SKWo rksShOPunto nreti ue ve sen ee eee eek 68 2 8 1 Use of mouse and shortcut key of SK Workshop cccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeees 68 2 8 2 Moose Shan rasnu ran a A E E O E N aun tuacentes 69 2 8 3 SHOCKEY Soor eS a A A A ae OT T Line 69 2 8 4 Common terms Ol SK WTKR NOP urcenie ti oti a n a a ee aesa es 69 Basic steps of creating a project with SK WorkShop c ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaeeesees 70 3 1 Creatine anew project with SK W O1kShOp x c24cieiiee ince N A E R A 70 3 1 1 New project dialog with SK Workshop ccssssssssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaasseeeseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaas 70 3 1 2 Communication port setting dialog cccccccccccceccceeeseseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeasssaeeeseseeeeeeess T2 3 1 3 Communication interface setting dial ce cceeccssseccecceceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaas 73 3 2 Setting parameters and adding g
273. l to 1 Display Invalidity sign When this option is chosen and the control is not touchable the control will be covered by the picture set in Use Sign option in Touch Screen Parameter Setting indicating that this control is not touchable Effective level controlled You can choose several options basing on the actual needs After setting the touch level of this control will be compared with the Default User Level in the User Password Setting in the Touch Screen Parameter Setting to determine whether the control is touchable 197 For example if option 2 and 3 are chosen in the Effective Level Controlled in the Advanced Tab of the control and the User Password Setting in the Touch Screen Parameter Setting is as shown in Figure 4 103 P HEI Parameter Setting User 1 Star User Z Star Username User 3 Z Star Username user3 A Mem 00s 0e 070a User 4 Star User 5 Star user Passw 6666 M1 Ae A A As Mere Username l S Allows uploading configuration F Upload when password Figure 4 103 User Password setting in the touch screen parameter setting Then if Default User Level is NULL this control is not touchable and in this case you can use Change User Level in Function buttons to change the default level For example if the password entered by the user is 6666 corresponding to User Level 6 but the user chooses only option 1 not matching option 2 or 3
274. language 1 2 3 4 5 Expression statement any expression and semicolon forms the expression statement The general expression statement is assignment statement Function call statement the function call and semicolon constitutes the function call statement Control statement itis used for control program process and composed of special statement delimiter and required expression It mainly includes conditional judgment execution statement loop execution statement go to statement etc Compound statement it is composed by several statements included in Compound statement is regarded as single statement It can be used in any place allowing statement such as loop body Void statement it is composed by semicolon only without actual function Relational expression and logical expression are two important expressions which are mainly used for judgment of conditional execution and loop execution C language provides many forms of conditional statement to form the branch structure 1 2 3 if statement is mainly for one way selection if else statement is mainly for two way selection if else if statement and switch statement are for multiway selection These forms of conditional statement are normally mutual substituted C language provides three loop statements 1 2 3 4 For statement is mainly used to assign initial value for loop variable step increment and loop structure of l
275. larming information saved by HMI when downloading Start up program screen after downloading Whether to enter the restart screen after completion of downloading 84 Clear historical record Whether to clear the historical data saved by the HMI when downloading Recipe downloading Whether to download the recipe of the current project into the HMI gt Picture downloading options Save picture to original format If this option is chosen the picture format chosen by the user when be kept at the time of downloading Convert to JPG If this option is chosen all pictures chosen by the user will be converted to JPG format before downloading to HMI Note As BMP pictures occupy more space it is recommended to choose Convert to JPG option 3 2 4 Saving position and system alarming setting Click Saving position and system alarming dialog as shown in Figure 3 8 HEI Parameter setting Storage Location Historical data str History alarm stor Local FLASH EEE System Alarm Article alarm Text Colors ne Font System C a rer Font Size Article alarm show O Always show O Cycle show Article alarm appe O Top O Bottom Figure 3 8 Saving position and system alarming setting dialog 85 gt Saving position The target directory where the historical data historical alarms and screen shot pictures will be saved Tot
276. lative technical documents for connected device 10 11 IDEC device driver This device driver is used by SKWorkshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Macro Smart FC4A FCSA series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Macro Smart FC4A FCSA series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Macro Smart FC4A FCSA series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Macro Smart FC4A FCSA series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Macro Smart FC4A FCS5A series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Macro Smart COM1 COM2 FC4A FC5A SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Macro Smart FC4A FC5A series PLC terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting Y Select Allen Bradley in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Macro Smart FC4A FCS5A series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Default Parameters Setting Range aa Macro Smart FC4A Macro Smart FC4A Macro Smart FC5A 386 Communication port RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 Baud rate 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38
277. ld be paid attention as following 1 Several same type of variables can be allowed to indicate after the same type specifier Space the variable names with comma There must be a space at least between the type specifier and variable name 2 The last variable name must be ended with 3 The variable declaration must be in front of variable usage It is always at the head of function body Practice lint a b short int c short d 100 a d 20 b a d 243 c atb d d d a c b 5 Float constant Real constant is also called float constant Real constant is also called float constant In the C language the float is indicated with decimal only It has two forms as following Decimal form and exponential form l Decimal form It is composed with figure 0 9 and decimal point For example 0 0 25 5 789 0 13 5 0 300 267 8230 are the legal float number Exponential form mat It is composed of decimal digit exponent symbol e or E and exponent be integer only symbol is possible The basic form is an E n a is decimal n is decimal integer and the value is a 10 n For example 2 1E5 equal to 2 1 10 5 3 7E 2 equal to 3 7 10 2 0 5E7 equal to 0 5 10 7 2 8E 2 equal to 2 8 10 2 The following are the illegal float number 345 without decimal point E7 without figure before exponent symbol 5 without exponent symbol 53 E3 negative sign is incorrect 2 7E without exponent The standard float
278. left in the middle or on the right basing on user selection gt After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen gt Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the Multi state switch is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list Pay attention when selecting Write Address For example when writing ASCII characters to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and the subsequent continuous addresses The length of the occupied addresses is determined by the total character number If the total character number is 12 then the address from V10 to V21 will be occupied If you try using other controls to monitor the value of the occupied address there may be errors Thus pay attention to ASCII character display to avoid mis operation over data and address Other options in General tab of this control are the same as those in ASCII Character Display Refer to Bit Button control for use of the Advanced and Visibility tabs 4 5 12 Bar graph of SK Workshop The main function of Bar Graph control is to present the real time change in the data in the form of bars so that you
279. lick OK button to end the uninstalling See Figure 2 14 and 2 15 SEForkshop Uninstall 2 Are you sure you want to completely remove SKWorkshop and all of its components Figure 2 14 Confirm the uninstalling 45 SEPorkshop Uninstall Uninstall Status Please wait while SRWorkshop 15 removed from your computer Uninstalling SiM orkshop a e a T E a a La Se Ly pay Me ed ati ae phs J Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Cancel SEForkshop Uninstall Figure 2 15 Uninstalling completed The second method First click Start Setting Control Panel of Windows to open the control panel and click add delete programs Then a pop up dialog will appear See Figure 2 16 46 i Add or Remove Programs E mfx Currently installed programs C Show updates Sort by Change or Remove Programs P NJStar Communicator Size 15 36M c fia SKWorkshop Size 173 00M6B Q Click here For support information Used rarely Microsoft Visual C 2008 Redistributable x66 9 0 30729 41468 Size 10 19ME Add Hew Programs Last Used On 6 8 2012 To remove this program From your computer click Remove c om VMware Tools Size 32 50MB Add Remove Windows Components Set Program Access and Defaults Figure 2 16 Add delete program page Second select SK WorkshopV4 0 0 in the page shown in Figure 2 16 and click
280. ll bar to the bottom and choose Library 2 in the User defined Libraries 4 4 Advanced controls of Sk Workshop 4 4 1 GIF display of SK Workshop GIF Display can be used to display animated pictures in GIF format up to 32 frames The operation steps are as follows Click GIF Display icon E in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in 4 53 will appear 122 Gif Display Advanced Visibility ID sLFOOOO Picture 200T06121222499T1 gif View Run Testing Figure 4 53 GIF Display dialog After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen gt Click Advanced tab to enter Advanced properties setting page See Figure 4 54 123 Gif Display General Advanced Visibility Touch Ava g Available 4 Figure 4 54 Advanced tab of GIF display Controlled by bit When this option is checked if the Effective State is 1 then the GIF picture will have animation effect when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 1 if the Effective State is 0 then the GIF picture will have animation effect when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 0 Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 2 Trend chart of Sk Workshop gt Overview of trend chart Displaying continuous values of variables on a dynamic and continuous basis
281. lso same to that of screen Users can refer to previous screen operations The dialog box of window attribute setting is as shown in figure 7 16 8 Hew Findor Window Hame Window a Width 240 Height 180 Display in Middle Display in Title Close Button Window Hame E Figure 7 16 Dialog box of Window attribute Height and width Respectively used to set the height and width of window Display in middle The popped up window displays in the middle of HMI Display in When the option Display in is selected the window displays in the location with X coordinate and Y coordinate points set by user The origin of coordinates is upper left corner of HMI screen Title Select the option Title and enter title name in column Title Name to pop up a window with title bar Close button Whether the window has button for closing Background color Used to change the background color of window 7 5 Historical data collector of SKWorkshop Historical Data Collector is used together with Historical Record Displayer in toolbar The former one is mainly used for parameter setting and the latter one is used to display the accessed historical data If no new Historical Data Collector has been established you can create a new one just like creating a new screen 1 e click Historical Data Collector with right key and select Add Historical Data Collector in popped up menu to create a 322
282. lue of the monitored address is 0 OFF the bit button presents 0 OFF state When Monitor is chosen the monitored address can be different from the write address For example when Set ON function is chosen for this bit button the write address can be set to 1 ON by touching the button However if the current state of the monitored address is 0 OFF then this bit button presents 0 OFF state Generally we choose the option of The Same Monitor Address and Write Address so that the state value written by you can be directly presented or displayed Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the bit button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list When Monitor option is not checked the ON OFF state of the bit button will not change even if it is touched gt Label When Label tab is clicked the Off Text page will be displayed by default See Figure 4 77 165 Bit Button SS ee x Genaral Label Advanced Visibility Language anguagzel ki All languages use the first language Off Text On Text Off Ficture i On Ficture OFF Font System Font Size 10 w Fod Italic F interLline Color Position E F oy ford Inter 0 Na O ae e S ry Blink 9 Ho O Copy to OW State Figure 4 77 Label tab of bit button This tab consist
283. m Date Time Cleat Alarm Text Font Size 10 fate Rows 5 Time Disp HH MM Data Disp DD MM YY DD MM YY Clear Alarm Time This address occupies 12 consecutive address offsets The meaning of each address is as follows 0 indicates displaying all data 1 indicates displaying some of the data Addressee Controlled object of the control register address 144 Sn G08 Bain ine wont To angina gt Refer to Alarm Display for basic operations gt Clear Alarming Date Clear the date of the alarm gt Clear Alarming Time Clear the time of the alarm gt Clear Alarm Clear the line of the alarm message and use this color to indicate alarm gt Confirm Use this color to indicate alarm i Refer to Alarm Display control for the basic operations i Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 10 Graphics move of Sk Workshop Graphics move control is used to make a picture from the library or graph files move in specified direction basing on linked variables or trigger variables With this control you can realize animation effect on the screen The steps to insert Graphics Move control and modify its properties are as follows Click Graphics Move button gt in the tool bar set parameters in the pop up dialog and then click OK See Figure 4 66 145 Graphics Hove 1 i i Picture Visibility l State Doo O w Border Color BG Color
284. me limit the response speed may become low m When the first touch screen is primary station all other screens and PLC are slave station 1 The communication port RS232 connected with PLC connection method and system setting of host are as shown in figures 8 5 8 6 and 8 7 Touch screen is primary station PLC ie slave machine PLC is ES i f37COBBUnI CA tion port ac amit BES 2327 signal Samkoon SE ES 232 E5 485 converter RS 485 Slave station 1 Slave station 2 Slave station 3 Saakoon SE Samkeon SE Sankoon SE Following touch screens are slave stations with same corunurication port Rs 445 Figure 8 5 Schematic diagram of connection mode One device with multiple screens When PLC RS232 is slave station 356 4 Communication Port Properties Fenner al Parameter Link ID Link Name Connecting I HMI Site Local wt Connection Modbus Modbus RITU Slave Figure 8 6 First touch screen selects MODUBUS protocol and is selected to be primary station 357 H Communication Port Properties General Parameter Communication Parameters Other fae al HMI Address 1 Baud rate g600 L PLC Address g Data bits g L Communicati on 20 i pone Overtime time ooo i otop Pits OO Over time time 5 o re default Se Rote tines h L Address Model Standard H F PLC Continuous addi 32 Spare set parameters Spare parame Spare parama c Spare pa
285. mediately reset this value to 0 Number of Data Points per Data The number of values that can be displayed by X axis Sampling Time Sampling frequency Read Address Value of read address presents the value of each pen in Y axis Basing on different data groups and data type read address may be subject to continuous reading 16 digit data or separated reading 32 digit data 125 Variable data points of each data group Set Data Points of Each Data Group on a dynamic basis basing on the value of the address If this option is chosen the default value of the address is the original value of Data Points of Each Data Group gt Detection Enable Whether to enable the detection line reference line Color Color of the detection line reference line Detection address Write the value corresponding to the current position of the detection line reference line into the detection address register gt Use Control Address Set the minimum and maximum value of Y axis on a dynamic basis basing on the value of the control address This address occupies 5 consecutive address offsets and is used to change the maximum minimum value of each pen and to determine whether to recover the original state Address Controlled object of the control register address offset 0 Minimum value the lower 16 bits 1 Minimum value the higher 16 bits 2 Maximum value the lower 16 bits 3 Maximum value the higher 16 bits Whether to recover
286. ment continue statement return statement Null statement The statement with semicolon only is called null statement Null statement executes nothing In the program null statement can be the null loop body Take an example of while getchar n For this statement if the character input from keyboard is not Enter it requires re input Here the loop body is null statement Assignment statement Assignment statement consists of assignment expression and semicolon Its general form is variable expression Its functions and features are same to that of assignment expression It is one of the most popular statements in the program There are some points to be noted in the usage of assignment statement Wow 1 As the expression on the right of assignment sign can be an assignment expression the following form Variable variable expression is established then the nestification is formed Its expanded expression is Variable Variable Expression For example a b c d e 5 according to the right associativity of assignment operator it is equivalent to e 5 actually d e c d b c a b 253 2 Pay attention to the difference between assigning initial value and statement for variable in the variable declaration Assigning initial value to variable is a part of variable declaration The variable with initial value assignment should be spaced with comma to other similar variable but the assignment statement must be ended
287. mode when using HMI in normal condition e Parameter setting mode is used for setting time luminance and IP address 12 Contact Samkoon Human Machine Internface w AR YI 1 setas A RRA BR ZS H Innovation Specialty Leading Win win Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Address Building C6 Hengfeng Industrial Baoan District Shenzhen China TEL 0755 29419068 FAX 0755 29455559 E Mail szsamkoon 163 com Web Http www samkoon com cn 421
288. models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 27 Xinje device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Thinget XC XCM series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Thinget XC XCM series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Thinget XC XCM series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Thinget XC XCM series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Thinget XC XCM series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Thinget XC XCM COM1 COM2 series 3 SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Thinget XC XCM series PLC terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting v Select Xinje Electronic in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Thinget XC XCM series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Default Parameters Setting Range 415 Thinget XC Series RS232 19200 8 EVEN 3 Operable register and addr
289. mple static int a 5 1 2 3 4 5 can be written as static int a 1 2 3 4 5 The dynamic assignment can be made during program execution In this case it can use do statement and scanf function to assign the array elements one by one 250 Character array The array for storing characters is called character array The form of type declaration for character array is same to that of numerical array as previous introduction For example char c 10 As the character and integer is similar it can be defined as int c 10 but each array element occupies 2 bytes in memory The character array may be two dimensional array For instance char c 5 10 is a two dimensional character array The character array is allowed to made initialization assignment in type declaration Take static char c 10 c p r o g r a m gt as an example After assignment the element value is c O c 1 c 2 c 3 c 4 c 5 c 6 c 7 c 8 c 9 for array C Wherein c 9 is not assigned and assigned to 0 by system automatically When assigning initial value for all elements the length declaration can be omitted such as static char c J c 0 p r 0 g r a m in which the length of C array is set to 9 C language allows for initialization assignment for array in character string For example static char c c p 1 0 g r a m can be written to static char c C program or sratic char c C program without The assignment in ch
290. n Used to set in the current screen a touch key for bit operation of the connected device including bit setting resetting inching and alternation Word button Used to set in the current screen a touch key for word operation of the connected device including constant setting value inputting password inputting adding and subtracting Screen button Used to set screen switch in the current screen including opening a screen opening the previous screen closing and opening a screen and closing a screen Function button Used to set in the current screen a touch key that realizes certain function of the operating system including closing back light confirming alarm restarting entering touch screen setting mode writing a recipe to PLC reading a recipe from PLC setting date and time clearing alarm the previous recipe the next recipe saving the current recipe moving alarm upward moving alarm downward paging down alarm paging up alarm adjusting coordinates system parameters changing user level logging off user level touch sound ON OFF alarm sound ON OFF clearing all historical data clearing historical alarm and HMI protection unlocking Bit lamp used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor bit state of single connected device Multi state lamp Used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor word state of several connected devices with continuous addresses Wi Object Sereen F Settings Bit Butto
291. n ford Button More Button j l Humentric Display lel Numerical Input Display jab ASCII Charater Display ASCII Charater Entry Bit Lamp Multistate Switch Multistate Lamp vee ds i Messaze Display Times Date l Static Picture Picture Display LF Display P hel Iynmamic Diagram H Bar Graph my Meter Pie Graph Chart I w Historical data display Alarm 1 Timer Message Board al Recipe selector Be Recipe data display EJ Keyboard Components Figure 2 32 Object menu Numeric display Used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box showing the value of the monitored address Numeric entry Used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box for data entry and showing the value of the monitored address ASCII character display Used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box showing ASCII character words ASCI character entry Used to draw in the current screen an ASCII character display and entry box for inputting ASCII character words Bar graph Used to insert in the current screen bar graph controls You can use up and down or left right movement of bars to observe the change in the value of the monitored address Time display Used to insert in the current screen a time control to display time Date display Used to insert in the current screen a date control to display date Day of week display Used to insert in the current screen a day of week control to display
292. n PLC RS232 is primary station 353 H Communication Port Properties ener al Parameter Link ID Link Hame Connecting I COM1 HI Site Local MM Setting e eie See OM port master slave mode port 1 Figure8 2 Select MODBUS protocol and select to be slave station 354 4 Communication Port Properties Other HMI Address PLC Address Data bits Check Stop Bits Overtime times ims 1 1 Spare set parameters Spare paramd0 Figure 8 3 Distribute station address for touch screen 2 The communication port connected with PLC is RS485 with connection mode as shown in figure 8 4 PLC ES 485 PLC is primary station COBBURIcatico mh port Slave station Slave station 2 Slave station 3 Sakoon SK Sankoon SK Smakoon SK The comnuacate port of all touch screens is RS 485 ES 455 Rass Al touch screens are slave stahons Figure 8 4 Schematic diagram of connection mode One device with multiple screens When PLC RS485 is primary station When the communication port of PLC is RS485 all touch screens are slave stations The system setting is same to the case when the communication port is RS232 Please refer to figures 8 2 and 8 3 for operation 355 When Samkoon SK series touch screens are treated as slave station 255 touch screens can be connected at most However pay attention that when the quantity of touch screen connected exceeds so
293. n device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Delta DVP series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC 1 Communication port RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 Data bit length Parity check bit Stop bit length HMI station number Online simulation Extension mode 3 Operable register and address range x os eee 375 A lt lt CV32 200 255 Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e double words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 4 Emerson device driver This device driver is used by SKWorkshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Emerson EC series PLC
294. n the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 29 ZhengHang device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of ZhengHang A5 series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of ZhengHang A5 series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate ZhengHang A5 series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of ZhengHang A5 series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with ZhengHang A5 series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen ZhengHang A5 COM1 COM2 SK series touch screen uses DBYF connector ZhengHang A5 series PLC terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting VY Select ZhengHang Electronics in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of ZhengHang A5 series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen A5 Series A5 Series RS232 RS232 RS42
295. n you choose an item the system will write its value into the control address gt Lable You can set texts for each item and the Item List object will display the texts of all the items in a list for view and selection by you gt Error notification a For example if the Item Number is set to be 8 then 8 will be the error state Similarly if the Item Number is set to be 11 then 11 will be the error state b When an error state occurs the dropdown list will display the text of the error state gt When an error state occurs the system will set specific bit to ON Off written to Error Notification Address Notification of this bit register can be used to trigger an action to correct the error gt Refer to the Advanced tab of Bit Button for Advanced tab and Visibility tab 4 6 5 Slider analog switch of SK Workshop Slider analog switch Change the value of corresponding character register address by dragging the slider The icon of this control in the toolbar is 27 Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 122 will pop up 222 Slider General i ID s oooo Bis Color Indicator 100 63 87 50 33 17 Liitiitiitiiti i tii oe Bi Color Forder Col to y Scale position IpO Dowd Left Dowr Slippery Cor Directi Lert v Write Address Scale direction Display Type 16 Bit Unsigned v ynamic range Max 85535 Macro Use Macro Fi
296. nd the data bit can be 8 only 363 4 Communication Port Properties ener al Parameter Link ID Link Hame Link Connecting I COM HMI Site Local we OM port master slave mode port 1 Connection Samkoon i Fenetrate Figure 8 16 General page of property setting for local HMI communication port 364 fi Communication Port Properties F EE Farameter Communi cation Farameters Baud rate haeond Data bits Check Other HMI Address PLU Address 1 a Communi cation 20 a ims Overtime time 1000 a ims stop Bits gt ims Retry Times E v Uvertime time 5 ire default Set Spare set parameters Spare paramd0 Spare paraned Spare paramai Figure 8 17 Parameter page of property setting for local HMI communication port Other parameters are defaulted Then the local HMI parameter setting is completed Remote HMI software setting Double click the created connection and pop up communication port property setting Select COMI in connection port Select HMI position as remote The communication parameters should be consistent with the parameter setting whose connection port is COM2 as Figure 8 17 The remote HMI setting is shown as Figure 8 18 and Figure 8 19 v Note the communication parameter should be consistent with that of connected Samkoon Penetrate in the local and the data bit can be 8 only 365 Communication Port Properties ener al Parameter
297. nd write the data or status of Modbus device register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Modbus device through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Modbus device Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Modbus device before using the driver How to establish connection with Modbus device 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 Modbus device customization customization customization SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector The pin at Modbus device terminal is defined as Modbus device RS422 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 Modbus device SR Phewoniaton Tk Tee Penis a a e O Je Nn 0000 0000 O SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector The pin at Modbus device terminal is defined as Modbus device RS485 SK series touch screen COM1 COM2 Modbus device e Paeatninion B o e osoni a 399 O Je N 0000 0000 O SK series touch screen uses 9P trapezoid female connector The pin at Modbus device terminal is defined as Modbus device TCP IP RJ45 connects directl SK series touch screen Modbus COM1 COM2 device ooo o w e o o w o Ce o s a SK series touch screen uses RJ45 connector Modbus device terminal is RJ45 TCP IP RJ45 connects via router SK series touch screen Modbus COM1 COM2 device ooo o w ea oo o w o e o s a
298. ne L Polyline B Curve Arce A Free line Straight Connection Line Curve Connection Line Rectangle R Ellipse E Polygon Y Text T Open Library O Build Library C Set ON Status Set OFF Status Table and Scale This menu can be also used to open and close tool box A A on the left of the command indicates the tool box has been displayed in the screen Using picture elements built with the Tool menu designers can conveniently change the color text size and position of these elements See Figure 2 31 Object Screen Line L FolyLine IE Curve Are A Free Line Rectangle R Round Rect Ellipse lE Folyzon li Arc Text T Open Library 0 Build Library E Pe erhouds s y Set On Status 1 OFF Set On Status 0 I Table E Scale Figure 2 31 Draw menu Line Used to draw a straight line of any direction in the current screen Polyline Used to draw a polygonal line of any direction in the current screen 56 Curve Arc Used to draw a line in the current screen first and then adjust the radian after canceling drawing by right click Free line Used to draw a line of any direction in the current screen along the movement of the mouse Straight connection line Used to draw a 90 polygonal line between two points in the current screen Curve connection line Used to draw a curve with changing radian between two points in the current screen Rectangular Used to draw a rectangular of any siz
299. nes move from right to left BG Color Background color of the area where the pens lines are moving Clear Trigger When the value of the Clear Trigger address changes from 0 to 1 all current pens lines will be cleared When the value of the Clear Trigger address changes from 1 to 0 or has no change no change will be made to the pens 2 Pen tab of Trend Chart See Figure 4 56 127 Trend Chart General Fen XY Axis Visibility Fen 1 Fen 2 Min o Min L Max 1000 Max Figure 4 56 Pen tab of Trend Chart In this tab you can set the maximum value minimum value line pattern and line color of each pen The data type of Max and Min is determined by the Data Type defined in General tab For example if you want to enter floating point numbers to Max and Min you must choose 32 digit floating point number in Data Type option in General tab Otherwise an error will be reported when you click OK button 3 XY Axis tab See Figure 4 57 128 Trend Chart General Pen HY Axis TEE l A AXIS T Axis chow Ticks Show Ticks Show Y Axis Grid Show Axis Grid Axis Tick Color Axis Tick Color Grid Color Grid Color Humber of Major Humber of Maye Time space for Humber of Sub Show Marks Show Marks Font Size Figure 4 57 XY Axis tab of Trend Chart X Axis Show Ticks Defining whether to show scales of X axis Show Y Axis Grid Defining whether
300. ng preparing and editing objects in window environment and setting their status features properties General designation of name type status performance and use of objects Aggregate of commands for certain functions For example File menu consists of commands used to process project files All menus of SK Workshop are drop down menus and a drop down menu can be divided into several levels each level called a sub menu A button corresponding to a command Some command buttons are in tool bar and some are in menus Switch the bit status of an object with bit status display to ON status Switch the bit status of an object with bit status display to OFF status Table 2 3 Common terms 3 Basic steps of creating a project with SK Workshop 3 1 Creating a new project with SK Workshop To create a new project click the New Project command in File menu or the l New Project button in the tool bar and then a pop up dialog for new project creation will appear Select a directory for project saving and choose a name for the project Choose the model of the touch screen corresponding to the project click OK to complete the creation and enter the communication port setting dialog Click Cancel to quit the dialog 3 1 1 New project dialog with SK Workshop Project name The name of the project to be created Path Directory to save the new project file C in default Model Model
301. ng on the bottom boundaries See Figure 4 17 for a contrast before and after bottom align botton align before Figure 4 17 Contrast before and after bottom align gt Vertical Centering Vertical Centering command allows designers to center several graph objects chosen basing on the same vertical line that is the vertical center line of the range from the left boundary to the right boundary of the graph objects To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Vertical Centering command in Align option in Edit menu or click Vertical Centering button ls in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Vertical Centering command in the Align option in the right click menu See Figure 4 18 for a contrast before and after vertical centering 100 vertical center before After vertically center Figure 4 18 Contrast before and after vertical centering gt Left Align Left Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the left boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Left Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click Left Align button in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Left Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move left to align basing on the left boundaries See Figure 4 19 for a contrast before and after left align L
302. ngs to power off held area LW LW0 LW65535 LW50000 LW51999 belongs to power off held area RWI RWIO RWI65535 343 8 1 Read Write Address Description Note Property 7 ve 60000 60099 ON Initialize to ON These bits can be initialized to be ON at system startup R W Trigger the bit and write the current RWI data into device Reset it a 60100 Recipe download after completion Trigger the bit and read the recipe from device into RWI register 60101 Recipe upload area Reset it after completion Trigger the bit and write the recipe from RWI into FLASH Reset it a a 60102 Recipe save after completion Recipe download When the recipe is being written into device this bit is ON it 60103 instruction becomes OFF after completion Recipe upload When the recipe is being read into device this bit is ON it becomes 60104 instruction OFF after completion 60105 Restart HMI Trigger it to restart the system Enable the bit ON to close LCD backlight and enable it OFF to open 60106 Backlight control LCD backlight COMI ON the communication is normal 60107 communication status OFF the communication is failed or is not existed COM2 ON the communication is normal 60108 communication status OFF the communication is failed or is inexistence Storage of COM 1 communication Trigger the bit to store the changed communication parameters into 60109
303. nlock Protection Password suppose to be 3333 Now setting of level 3 HMI protect is finished gt Click OK when the setting of level 3 HMI protect is finished Suppose today is 2009 04 01 08 00 00 Therefore the time limit for level 1 HMI protect is 2009 04 01 12 00 00 There is some time before the time limit Therefore HMI still can be used normally Suppose after 4 hours i e to 2009 04 01 12 00 00 HMI will automatically skip to the screen 1 set by user in advance If user wants to continue to use the HMI and hope HMI still can operate other screens user can add one function button in this screen screen 1 and select the function Unlock HMI When the time limit of level 1 HMI protect is reached click the function button and enter the unlock password of level 1 protect in the popped up password entering box Here the unlock password is 1111 HMI can be used normally when level 1 HMI password is unlocked Suppose the current time is 2009 04 05 12 00 00 which has reached to the set level 2 HMI protect Therefore HMI will automatically adjust to set HMI protect screen screen 2 Like previous operation users have to use function button select Unlock HMT and enter level 2 protect password 2222 Only in this way the HMI can be used normally Therefore we set level 3 HMI protect here As above when the time is 2009 04 10 12 00 00 to ensure the normal use of HMI users still have to use function button select Unlock
304. notification will be generated either Only when you type in a number between the maximum value and the minimum value via the keyboard and then press ENTER key there will be notification and such touch will be an effective touch gt Visibility page will be displayed after you click Visibility tab This page is mainly used to set whether to display or hide the control See Figure 4 80 170 a Bit Button Controlled by Bit Controlled by User Level Frp Fils Fla Fs Fle Fr Els Figure 4 80 Visibility tab of bit button Controlled by bit When this option is checked if the Effective State is 1 then the Bit Button can be displayed on the touch screen when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 1 if the Effective State is 0 then the Bit Button can be displayed on the touch screen when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 0 Controlled by User Level When User Level Controlled is chosen the conditions will be the same as those in the User Level Controlled option in Advanced tab and only when such conditions are met the Bit Button can be displayed on the touch screen If neither of these two options is checked the control will be always displayed on the touch screen gt After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen
305. ns the addresses of which are respectively LB1 LB6 and all function of which is selected to Alternative Put one Alarm Controls and one Dynamic alarm bar controls on screen and carry out off line simulation for them Click some digit button to see whether alarm information is displayed in Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar The example of off line simulation is carried out as shown in figure 7 22 F Samkoon nepi iaie hes See eee m LB Figure 7 22 Off line simulation example of digit alarm If the type is continuous digit it is shown as Figure 7 23 330 Digital Alara Block Hame Digital Alarm Logi Type Continued Bit aM Read Address Li4 Size 10 Seanning Ti Bit Hum Use Message LHA f ner en Ge i ee ee eee eee Figure 7 23 The dialog box of digit alarm at continuous digit That is to say when a digit number bit number of the address is used it makes alarm at bit 1 If the type is word value it is shown as Figure 7 24 331 m Digital Alarm Block Type Read AddresdL 4 O O Size Scanning T Discrete Alarm aa aaan a a S a TA J Figure 7 24 The dialog box of digit alarm at word value That is to say when a value of the address is used it makes alarm while the address value is equal to the value selected in the table In figure 7 22
306. nt panel Ambient temperature 10 65 C for running Ambient humidity 10 90 RH for running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Outline dimension 136x89x39 mm Opening dimension 1248 1 mm Weight About 0 2kg FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Configuration software SK Workshop 4 0 0 Detailed parameters of SK 4 0A This model of machine only has economic type but no standard type Main technical parameters 22 Model SK 040AE Display size 4 0 length width 4 3 Number of COM interfaces USB device l interfaces Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 4 wire high precision touch plate sommun anon USB RS232 RS422 RS485 interface Power supply DC24V 15 Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength LOOV AC Cminuk test for running Ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH for running 23 Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Opening dimension 114x90 mm Configuration SK Workshop 4 0 0 software Detailed parameters of SK 4 3A This model of machine only has economic type but no standard type i Number of COM interfaces Network interfaces USB device interfaces Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 4 wire high precision touch plate Commu meanon USB RS232 RS422 RS485 interface User memory 12M Power supply DC24V 15 24 Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FC
307. ntered value for LW3 is 8 the control will display the text under state 3 User defined state value When this option is chosen there will be a Define State Value button after the Total State Number as shown in 4 93 a BultiState Switch General Text Picture Advanced Visibility Bis Color Pattern Pj teri zontal S State Type O Value E Bit Register Customize status values Style Key entry a E O Data Type 18 Bit Unsigned Int Y Write Address L 3 Monitor Address Identical to Write Address i i lt lt Monitor Address Li s ee Ep Total States al E the values of the Macro Use Macro Figure 4 93 User defined state value chosen for multi state button 188 Click the Define State Value button and then a dialog as shown in 4 94 will pop up Customize status values Figure 4 94 User defined state value dialog In this dialog column S is the current state column which means that when you chose a line the value corresponding to S in the line indicates the current state value Double click the Value column of a line and then you can enter the value to be written under the current state For example we assume State Type of this control is User defined State Value Keyboard Input is chosen for Manner option the write address is LW3 the option The Same Write Address and Monitor Address is chosen and the total number of states is 8 Click Define State Value button and
308. ntil clicking OK Data type Totally 7 data types are provided Read trigger bit The curves will move only when this option is set to 1 Auto reset If the value of Read Trigger Bit address is 1 the address will be automatically set to O after releasing the mouse Channel number Number of data groups and number of pens 229 Current channel You can set address for Control Address of different channels after choosing different channels Control address The same to read address Different control addresses for different channels For this address different starting addresses can be set with different channel number Length of address Len Displayed point number When the data type is 16 bit len 1 when the data type is 32 bit len 2 For example if the starting address of channel 1 is LW1 the data type is 32 bit integer and the point number is 4 then the addresses occupied by channel 1 are LW1 LW2 LW3 LW8 Displayed point number Number of the control addresses to be read for each channel Detection Enable Whether to use the detection line reference line Color Color of the detection line reference line Detection address Write the value corresponding to the current position of the detection line reference line into the detection address register For example If the data type is 16 bit the channel number is 4 the displayed point number is 10 the control address of channel 1 is LW1 the control addre
309. ntrol Speed 10 Change of state According ta time Alterative peri Figure 4 125 Auto control position Profile tab 226 8 Animation Text i W W W I W i ii H H Vectogram size Width Width of the graph control set in the General tab Height Height of the graph control set in the General tab Track Adjust the position of track points by choosing different points gt Refer to Text and Picture tabs of Multi stage Lamp for the Text and Picture tabs gt Refer to Visibility tab of Bit Button for the Visibility tab 4 6 7 Message board of SK Workshop Message board You can write words on this control The icon of this control in the toolbar is Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 126 will pop up 227 fa Bessage Hoard ID mBo000 Alpha 255 Message board border Line Type Line Width 1 n Pattern l aeeelerne se Fen Width Operator scheme Uperator scheme d a F Clear Screen Figure 4 126 General tab of message board Pen color Color of the text written in the control Pen width Width of the line of the texts written in the control Operation mode Operation mode address This address is a word address and is valid only when the value of this address is 0 or 1 0 indicates write operation and 1 indicates erase operation Clear screen address If the value of this address is equal to the v
310. ntry ae F Figure 5 14 Control Layout lt 2 gt Set the corresponding control property Right click the control of numeral entry display and set the write in address of control property as shown in Figure 5 15 275 a Bit Button Genaral Label Advanced ID BBOOOO Border Color BS Color Fattern Function Set OW Set OFF F Monitor Macro F Use Macro Figure 5 15 Numeral entry Display Property Setting Keep the consistency of LW0 LW1 LW2 LW3 SumLW variable address and the corresponding control write address Figure 10 15 bit LW0 LW1 LW2 LW3 LW4 respectively Click OK button to save the setting lt 3 gt Set bit button control property as figure Select bit button control right click it and pop up the dialog box as Figure 5 16 Bit Button Make settings as the circled prompt Click OK to save the settings 276 Bit Button ID EEDDOO Forder Colo on Fis Color BG Color Pattern Selia Fume tion Set OW Set OFF Dot Invert Write Address F Moni tor Macro Use Macro Figure 5 16 Bit Button lt 4 gt Timer property setting Select the timer and right click it and pop up the dialog box of timer property as Figure 5 17 Select the macro name Init and click OK to save the settings Zit General ener al ID Properties Run Condition Always Perform
311. o SS 60290 Screensaver time Display the screensaver time defined in configuration R W Indicate the flickering period of light control the minimum is 0 1 and Flickering period of R W 60291 indicator lamp the unit is s 60292 X position in touch The position of coordinate X in touch R 60293 Y position in touch The position of coordinate Y in touch R Z position without R 60294 touch The position of coordinate X without touch Y position without x touch The position of coordinate Y without touch Touch status 1 touch 0 release R COM1 check Communication parameter check 0 NONE 1 EVEN 2 ODD R 60295 60296 60297 Communication parameter baud rate 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 25600 6 115200 7 187 5K R W 60298 COMI baud rate a 60299 COMI stop bit Communication parameter stop bit 0 1stops 1 2stops 2 60300 COMI data length Communication parameter data length 0 7bits 1 8bits 347 HMI address of os 60301 COMI Communication parameter HMI address PLC address of 60302 COMI Communication parameter PLC address PLC continuous a address interval of 60303 COMI The max continuous address length acquired in single communication COMI a 60304 communication time Communication delay time 60305 COMI retry times System retry times in abnormal communication R W 60306 COMI address mode Address mode 0
312. o introduces in detail the composition of the software system and the functions of each component helping users to understand the overall structure framework of SK Workshop configuration software In addition it introduces the hardware and software requirements of SKWorkshop and the installation process and working environment of SK Workshop helping users to learn use of this software and create application projects 2 1 What is Sk Workshop SKWorkshop configuration software is the configuration visual development system of Samkoon SK series touch screens produced by Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd As integrated development environment software it has abundant and powerful development functions SK Workshop adopts the advantages of Windows system with high user interface consistency and simple interfaces The layout of the menus is close to those of Windows system making it easy to learn so that project designers can easily develop suitable configurations for their projects using SK Workshop Its function and structure features can help users to shorten the process of developing automation projects and the process of system upgrading and maintenance It provides seamless integration with third party applications effectively enhancing the productivity Functions and features of SK Workshop are as follows 1 Screen display The color of Samkoon touch screens reaches 260 000 pigment and compared with the products of other man
313. ocessing flow control report output and so on It is widely used in automation field To help users use SKWorkshop generic industrial automation configuration editing software we wrote this manual to introduce in detail the system structure functions and other aspects of SK Workshop 4 0 0 Users can construct their own configurations by a few simple operations and get rid of fussy programming With this software more users can use human machine interface products masterly This User Manual introduces how to operate the SK series SK Workshop configuration software Please read it carefully to ensure proper use of the software Due to the limited ability of the author it is inevitable that there are some mistakes in this Manual and readers are sincerely invited to find out and correct them If you need further information on this software or more technical supports please contact us and we shall provide sincere service for you Our contact information is as follows Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Address Building C6 Hengfeng Industrial Baoan District Shenzhen China Tel 0755 29419068 Fax 0755 29455559 E Mail szsamkoon 163 com Web Http www samkoon com cn Caution 1 2 3 Without prior consent anyone should not reprint or duplicate all or any part of this Manual The contents of this Manual including specs are subject to change without prior notification The author of this Manual tried the best to
314. of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of GE Fanuc series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Setting Range PLC GE Fanuc SNP X GE Fanuc SNP X GE Fanuc CCM Communication port RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 Baud rate 19200 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 Data bit length 8 7 8 Parity check bit ODD EVEN ODD NONE Stop bit length l 1 2 PLC station number 0 0 255 HMI station number 0 0 255 Support functions Yes No Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Yes Extension mode eS Operable register and address range No ddddd 1 10000 Bit Discrete Input ddddd 1 10000 Bit Discrete Output dada 110000 Bit Intemal Use ddd 1 128 Bit System Use Read only ddd 1 128 Bit System Use Read only ddd 1 128 Bit System Use Read only ddd 1 128 Bit System Use Read only ddd 1 256 Bit Temporary Status dddd 1 7680 Bit Genius Global ddddd 1 10000 Word Analog Input ddddd 1 10000 Word Analog Output ddddd 1 32640 Word Register memory Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 381 e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different reg
315. of Samkoon SK series touch screen is SKWorkshop which provides users with screen configuration drive setting control and some other functions The up to date version of this software is V4 4 0 1 2 Model and description At present Samkoon SK series touch screens have the following models SK 3 5A 320x240 3 5 SK 4 0A 320x240 4 3 SK 4 3A 480x272 4 3 SK 5 0A SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7D SK 5 7F SK 7 0A SK 7 2A SK 8 0A 480x272 640x480 320x234 640x480 320x234 800x480 800x600 800x600 5 0 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 7 7 0 7D 8 0 SK 10 2A 800x480 10 2 SK 10 4A 800x600 10 4 SK 12 1A 800x600 12 1 The length width ratio of SK 3 5A and SK 4 0A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 320x240 The length width ratio of SK 4 3A and SK 5 0A is 16 9 and the resolution reaches 480x272 The length width ratio of SK 5 7A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 640x480 The length width ratio of SK 5 7C and SK 5 7F is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 320x240 The length width ratio of SK 5 7D is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 640x480 The length width ratio of SK 7 0A is 16 9 and the resolution reaches 800x480 The length width ratio of SK 7 2A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 800x600 The length width ratio of SK 8 0A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 800x600 The length width ratio of SK 10 2A is 16 9 and the resolution reaches 800x480 The length width ratio of SK 10 4A is 4 3
316. of the touch screen used by the project Available models include 7D SK 035AE 320 240 SK 040AE 320 240 SK 043 AE 480 272 SK 050AS 480 272 SK 050AE 480 272 SK 057AS 640 480 SK 057AE 640 480 SK 057CS 320 240 SK 057CE 320 240 SK 057DS 640 480 SK 057DE 640 480 SK 057FS 320 240 SK 057FE 320 240 SK 070AS 800 480 SK 070AE 800 480 SK 072AS 800 600 SK 072 AE 800 600 SK 080AS 800 600 SK 080AE 800 600 SK 102AS 800 480 SK 102AE 800 480 SK 104AS 800 600 SK 104AE 800 600 SK 121AS 800 600 SK 121AE 800 600 The default model is SK 070AS 800 480 Here the screen resolution 800 480 in the brackets is not displayed in the dialog Show model Display direction of the touch screen used by the project Available models include Horizontal Configuration with the touch screen being horizontal Vertical Configuration with the touch screen being vertical The default model is horizontal 76 a New Project Project Properties Project Ha Fath Model Isoro Show Model Horizontal Model Parameters Model Siz T inch Resolutio 800x480 Pixels VGA Color Be 144 Colors TFT LUD User Memo 12M Fower Sup DC24 15 COMI RS232 R422 RS485 CONS RS232 R422 RS485 USE 2 Ports B type h Type Ethernet F
317. og will pop up See Figure 4 36 111 Static Text C All language use the first language text Text TEXT l ey r oo Font Size 10 v Font ystem manm e FontBold FontItali Fosition H Word Inter o E C Font UnderLine Fad Pattern Transpare Alpha Back Color Front Colo Figure 4 36 Static text dialog Input the words to be displayed in the text area in the above dialog You can change the font size of the text to be displayed in the drop down menu of Font size The font sizes provided by SK Workshop are 7 56 points You can change the font in the drop down menu of Font Sk Workshop provides almost all fonts See Figure 4 37 Language it can input different texts and set different fonts and font size for different languages Figure 4 37 An example of a text graph 112 gt Left click the small square in front of FontBold Fontltalic in the dialog a green tickle will appear indicating the words will be displayed in bold Italic gt You can change the word interval and line interval by means of the corresponding fine tuning button The range of such intervals is 0 15 gt SKWorkshop provides up to 16 underline forms and you can change the display position of the words in the text box and th
318. on About about dialog box A You can close off line simulation through taskbar Right Key Close e Example of off line simulation As shown in figure 6 2 below you can carry out the off line simulation of edited configuration Use mouse to click value display and input It can be seen that pointer of instrument panel points to 70 if you enter 70 The project designer can better check and find some problems in project configuration screen through off line simulation such as the correctness of selected monitoring address and relationship between controls to ensure good preparations 290 Controls for value input and display Instrument monitoring address is D5 maximum value is 120 7 address of both write and monitor is D5 Samkoon Function button change user level 17 Input and display of ASC words address for write and monitoring D5 bar graph monitoring address D5 Maximum value 120 Week controls GIF picture displayer Text button write address D2 function 5 Button for opening interface Figure 6 2 Example of SK 4 3A off line simulation The following is the operation step for off line simulation Users without installation of SKWorkshop4 0 install the software firstly Double click the shortcut icon SKWorkshop exe on desktop Select the icon 1 for new item or File New Project in menu bar to pop up the dialog box as shown in fig
319. on 3 and return to execute step 2 again During the for process expression 1s calculated for one time and expression 2 and 3 may repeat for several times The loop body may be executed for many times or not executed There are several points to be noted in for statement 1 Each expression in for statement can be omitted but the semicolon must exist For example lt 1 gt for expression expression expression is omitted lt 2 gt for expression expression expression is omitted lt 3 gt for expression expression all expression is omitted 2 When the loop variable has assigned initial value Expression 1 may be omitted as shown in Example 3 27 If Expression 2 or 3 is omitted the endless loop may be caused In this case the loop should be ended in loop body 3 The loop body may be void statement include stdio h void main int n 0 printf input a string n for getchar n n printf od n In this example the expression 1 in for statement is omitted and the expression 3 is not for modifying loop variable but for inputting the characters counting Thus the counting that should be completed in loop body has completed in the expression Therefore the loop body is void statement Pay attention the semicolon behind void statement is essential If this semicolon is missed the following printf statement will be executed as loop body On the other hand if the loop body is not void statement it is forbidden to ad
320. on will be inserted to the cursor location of edition window automatically The functions parameter types and other detailed instruction of library function refer to Appendix 1 i library function function name MIE UM function declaration hons unsigned char sourcel int mm E Use addition to caleulate checksum Usage checksum ADDSUM data sizeof datal J Example unsized char data S i0x1 Oxz 0x3 Ox4 0x20 int checksum checksum ADDSUM data 5 fy checksum Ox 4 Figure 5 6 Function Selection 5 3 5 How to use internal storage area in macro SK Workshop configuration software provides the operation interface for HMI internal storage area Users can make direct operations for the internal storage area in the macro Detailed methods have two kinds 1 Access storage area with keywords LocalBit reference of internal storage area LB LocalWord reference of internal storage area LW RWIWord reference of internal storage area RWI 267 The keyword can be used directly in macro For example if LocalBit 5 LocalWord 1 0 velse LocalWord 1 1 j 2 Establish a linkage between variable and internal storage area by setting of variable Detailed usage refers to macro instance 5 4 QuickStart A simple macroblock 5 4 1 Source code design of macro Let us come to compile a simple macroblock New create a project and select the corresponding touch screen model This macro
321. onvert SamDraw3 3 to Sk Workshop to enter the conversion page Click Open to choose a V3 3 project file to be converted and type in the name of the target V4 0 0 project file Then click Browse to set the path for saving of the V4 0 0 project file Then click Begin to convert and after conversion completion click Close Then you can find the converted file from the stored path Ifa V3 3 configuration project is directly opened using SK Workshop the system will prompt whether to convert it to V4 0 0 and if you choose yes the project will be converted to V4 0 0 and then opened 3 5 2 Choose Upload historical data To upload the historical data from HMI to hard disk 91 historical data Upload por ee F 1le pa E AA ses SS a ae SE i a ae eee eS SE EE EE EE ee File name Start uploading Upload file Stored path Click Browse to choose the path where the uploaded file will be saved File name Set a name for the uploaded file The uploaded file is in the format of CSV that is comma separator file which can be opened and edited with Excel Click OK to start uploading The file will be saved to the set path The operations of choosing uploading recipe and uploading configuration are the same as that of uploading historical 4
322. oop times The loop times and control condition can be confirmed during loop process and the confirmed loop may use while or do while statement Three loop statements can be nested mutually to form the nested loop The loops may be in parallel but not crossed Branch statement can transfer the process out of loop body but it can not transfer process from outside to loop body 261 5 Avoid endless loop in the loop program That is to say the loop variable must be ensured to be modified during operation Change the loop condition to be false gradually thus finish the loop 6 Statement summary in C language Name General Form Simple statement Expression statement Void statement f Conditional statement if expression statement if expression statement 1 else statement 2 if expression statement 1 else if expression 2 statement 2 else statement n switch statement switch expression case constant statement statement default statement loop statement while statement while expression statement for statement for expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 statement break statement break continue statement continue return statement return expression 5 3 Macro function introduction 5 3 1 How to use macro function for programming This section will introduce the basic functions of macro and describe the relevant control functions and application method briefly There are ways to access macro Method 1 select
323. oordinate Y coordinate width and height of the rectangle Reading of these values should be based on the data type set by the user Line width Change the width of the line Category Three categories are available 1 e right angle cut off angle and round angle Remark Take effect only when the line width is higher than 1 For example If the Data Type chosen by the user is 16 digit positive integer and the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW2 LW3 and LW4 will be read respectively with the following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW2 is the Y coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW3 is the width of the rectangle The value of LW4 is the height of the rectangle Thus if the chosen Data Type is 16 digit positive integer the control can read four data continuously from the monitored address according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of the rectangle Y coordinate of the rectangle width of the rectangle and height of the rectangle If the Data Type chosen by the user is 32 digit positive integer and the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW3 LW5 and LW7 will be read respectively with the following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW3 is the Y coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW5 is the width of the rectangle The value of LW7 is the he
324. option is checked the rectangle will be filled with the background color defined in BG Color option l Border If this option is not checked the rectangle will have no border line and thus the border line color cannot be changed if this option is checked the rectangle will have border line and the border color can be changed through the Border Color option below Transparency Change the transparency of the background color of the dynamic circle control Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 7 Alarm control of Sk Workshop Alarm Control can display current alarm information of the equipment digital alarm and analog alarm Before using this control you must configure alarm settings Refer to Alarm Setting for configuration of alarm settings Alarm Control can store real time alarm information and the number of alarms to be displayed is defined during configuration Sk Workshop supports digital alarm information The steps to insert Alarm Control are as follows gt Click Alarm Control command in Tool menu or click Alarm Control button in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 63 will appear 140 AlaraeControl ID Fr ame Text Bits Color Font Size 10 Bor der col Font Size io Text Color Ea Font ge Rows Bits Color e Data Di spDD MM TY o l Time Time Select all alarm content Date Messa
325. or Fattern FG Color fine Width Line Color tine Style Alpha Layer Text Content Figure 4 44 Modify a library graph In the dialog as shown in Figure 4 44 choose the graph and choose the Disassemble function button on the toolbar to disassemble the control from the library Then you can choose and modify a graph disassembled from the original combination Choose the graph to be modified and then you can set its foreground color background color and pattern in the right list After modification choose all the graphs disassembled from the original combination click the Assemble function button on the toolbar and click Save button on the lower right Then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 50 will pop up 119 Save to user defined library Custom Er Custom Library 3 4 5 E T E a Figure 4 50 Save the modified graph to user defined library Choose the position where the modified graph will be saved such as Library 2 in the User defined list on the left and click Save button below the list to save the modified graph To view the graph saved just now you can click the open library command button scroll down the scroll bar to the bottom and choose Library 2 in the User defined Libraries 4 3 14 Build library of Sk Workshop Choose Build Library command in Draw menu or click Build Library command button P in the tool buttons and then a Library List dialog will pop up See Figure 4 51 12
326. ormation saved in the touch screen HMI protection unlocking Used to unlock HMI protection by entering password Recipe reading amp saving Used to read and save a recipe Stand by function 180 Used as stand by function No action will be executed after pressing this button 23 Reload recipe 23 Change language Change the text of all controls of the project to specified language After the system jumps to the system screen the system will close the current project When the system quits the system screen it will restart the project and enter the startup page set in the project The Label tab of Function Button is the same as the Label tab of Bit Button except that in the former there is not ON Text and ON Picture as Function Button has only one state Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Function Button The Advanced and Visibility tabs of Function Button are exactly the same as the Advanced and Visibility tabs of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Function Button After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen 4 5 6 Multi state lamp of Sk Workshop Multi state Lamp is mainly used to display different states according to the value of the monitore
327. ot be changed The number of address can reach up to 4096 y Number of recipe Recipe quantity which can reach up to 512 Note recipe length data type bytes recipe sum 512KB V Datatype Data type of data register yV Write recipe to PLC Set address of related data register of recipe and PLC y Read recipe from PLC Set address of related data register of recipe and PLC 338 V Recipe memory Memory addresses range of recipe in HMI which is generated automatically and cannot be changed y Current recipe Both memory address in HMI and data register in PLC of recipe are generated automatically in order which cannot be changed V Recipe number register Recipe number is generated automatically in order and cannot be changed which corresponds to the order of recipe name in data item The recipe data item is as shown in figure 7 31 ry Recipe General Data Item BECIPEL RECIPE Recipe Hame RECIFE Data Source Recipe H0 Objective Recit Figure 7 31 Screen of recipe data item yV Name Name of current recipe V Data Data write and display of each address in current recipe V Copy recipe data Copy data in source recipe number into objective recipe number after entering click OK to save current recipe click Cancel to exit current dialog box After the completion of recipe configuration you can design screen and operate recipe in HMI Example of concrete recipe application
328. ouch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of HollySys LM series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range Communication port Baud rate Data bit length Parity check bit Stop bit length PLC station number HMI station number 0 0 255 Support functions Offline simulation Online simulation Yes OO ETT 3 Operable register and address range a m ddd o 0 0 511 7 Bit Q storage area 385 dddd o 0 0 78 16 7 Bit M storage area ddd 0 510 Word I storage area 8 bit register each word for two addresses ddd 0 510 Word Q storage area 8 bit register each word for two addresses dddd 0 8190 Word M storage area 8 bit register each word for two addresses Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e 8 bit register in the remark indicates that the address space for the adjacent two words in register is 2 e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the re
329. ound Color are settings for the list box and the texts gt Line number This option is applicable only when List is chosen 4 6 11 Recipe data display of Sk Workshop The function of recipe data display is to list all data in the recipes if any The icon of this control in the toolbar is this icon and then a dialog as shown in the figure below will pop up 235 Recipe data display ID Title bar Border Language J Language ba BE Color ne a Font Size 10 border Col o Font Text Colo ID ID 7 Line unb 5 General tab of recipe data display The General tab contains settings of the texts and list box and here we do not make detailed introduction to it Data tab is shown as follows 236 Recipe data display General Data Item Display Display RECIFE x RECIFE s RECIPES x RECIFE4 s Data tab of recipe data display gt Language Choose different languages to list the recipe names in different languages gt Name List all recipe names gt Display Whether to display a specified recipe You can decide whether to display a recipe basing on actual needs 4 6 12 Operation record display of Sk Workshop Choose in the toolbar and set parameters of the operation record display control in the pop up dialog as shown in Figure 4 132 237 f i Operation record control ID Frame Title column Text
330. ow At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw a rounded rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse gt To change the size of the rectangle first choose it and move the mouse to any of the 8 green square dots on the frame of the rectangle When the mouse becomes TF or or fa press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to an appropriate position Then release the left key of the mouse So far the size of the rectangle has been adjusted T Changing width of rectangle I Fu Changing height of rectangle Changing both width and height of rectangle gt After completing the above steps the rectangle has default settings in transparency line type line width line color and filling pattern You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the rectangle and double click or click Properties button La in the tool bar after choosing the rectangle At this moment a property dialog similar to that in rectangle drawing will appear See Figure 4 31 108 Round Rect nh Corner Rad 10 7 Border Line Type Fad Pattern iz da l Alpha 255 o B r BG Color Fiz Color 7 Figure 4 31 Rounded rectangle property dialog gt X bend radius Radian of the four bends in X direction gt Y bend radius Radian of the four bends in Y direction 4 3 7 Ellipse Circle of Sk Workshop Choose Ellipse Cir
331. p in sequence At last the new acquired data will fill in the last item this is similar with 10 people queuing for tickets If one people got the ticket and left a new one will queue at the least But the total people remain 10 people v When the stop sampling in disposal as full is selected the only difference is that it will read data no longer if the acquired data reaches to sampling sum To view the acquired data visually the two controls as historical trend chart or historical data display on the tool bar can be used 7 6 Alarm setting of SK Workshop Let s come to SK Workshop alarm setting Sk Workshop alarm setting includes digit alarm login and analogy alarm login When the alarm login is set the users may view the alarm category and alarm time and date by alarm control or dynamic alarm bar 7 6 1 Digital alarm log of Sk Workshop Alarm setting is used to display alarm information Alarm controls and dynamic alarm bar In fact alarm controls and dynamic alarm bar respectively display the alarm information of Digital Alarm and Analog Alarm can be used normally only when alarm setting is configured It can set up 10 items of digit alarm information at most e Select Alarm Log in project manager to set digital alarm and analog alarm as shown in figure 7 20 32 Window oF Standard List y B 2 HMI is Langue ze S34 Link SR Link 1 is yey Setting z UNI Parameter Set
332. p menu and also includes right click menus See Figure 2 28 File F Edit View Draw H Object Sereen F Setting S DownLoad D Help H Language Selection Figure 2 28 Menu bar e File menu File menu includes such options as New Project N Open Project O Close C Save S Save As and Quit Q Grey options indicate the corresponding operation is invalid under current environment To open File menu click the File F button on the left top corner of the screen and then a drop down bar will appear See Figure 2 29 Edit View Draw H Object Sereen P Setting Do New Pro Hi Ctrlti fea Open Fro Ctr1lto Close bal Save 3 Ctrl s Save AS Quit I 1 C Documents and Settings Administrator 4H iqq shm 2 C Documents and Settings Administrator 4 Hifez shm 3 G inewtest shm 4 C Documents and Settings Administrator Hitestecom shm Sees ee eee sees Se oe se ee oe ee ee ses Se ee ee eee Figure 2 29 File menu New Project Used to create a new blank project The shortcut key is Ctrl N Open Project Used to open an existing project file saved in Windows Project configuration files with an extension name of drw can be opened The shortcut key is Ctrl O Close Used to close the current project screen configuration without quitting SK Workshop configuration software 53 Save Used to save the current screen configuration that has been changed with the file name and directory b
333. pop up attribute setting window of communication port In option General of this window select Modbus RTU for option Device Server and Modbus RTU Slave in right area Alternatively set the first touch screen connected with PLC to be primary station and other screens and PLC to be salve station Therefore when setting attribute of communication port for first touch screen it is necessary to select Modbus RTU for option Device Server and Modbus RTU Master in right area Besides it is required to change mode to expanded mode in option Parameter of this window and distribute address of touch screen In this way the touch screen as slave station also can obtain PLC data through the first screen even if they are not directly connected with PLC For both above methods only primary station can communicate with slave station Salve stations cannot communicate with each other m When PLC is primary station and all touch screens are slave station 1 The communication port RS232 connected with PLC connection method and system setting are as shown in figures 8 1 8 2 and 8 3 PLC ES 232 COBBTHiIcatio FLC is primary station T n port fei ES 232 ES 485 converter Slave station 1 Slave station 2 Slave station 3 Sakin sk Sakon sk The cotmmircate port of all touch screens is ES 485 FS 455 Rodeo 40 touch screens are slave stators Figure 8 1 Schematic diagram of connection mode One device with multiple screens Whe
334. r at the time of installation Click Global Macro in menu Set to pop up a dialog box as shown in following figure 341 Executive 50 ms Click the list item and list out the compiled macro name Set the bit control and executive frequency for the macro Then the selected macro will execute in configuration operation as the overall macro 7 10 Setting of initial macro of Sk Workshop Set one successfully compiled macro instruction to be initial macro When the configuration begins to run i e execute the macro instruction it is not limited by screen 64 initial macros can be added at most When multiple initial macros are set they will be executed according to the set serial number at the time of installation Click Initial Macro in menu Set to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure below 342 a Initiarco InitMarcoa Hame Click the list item to list all successfully compiled macro names Then the selected macro instruction will be treated as initial macro to be executed during configuration operation 8 System reserved register of SKWorkshop This Chapter makes presentation of registers retained in SKWorkshop system SKWorkshop keeps some registers for special purpose Users have to use these registers according to related instructions These registers include LB local memory bit LW local memory register and RWI recipe index LB LBO LB65535 LB50000 LB51999 belo
335. r variable name For example void main int a float a 10 is incorrect 4 The constant expression in the square bracket refers to the element quantity For example a 5 indicates that array a contains 5 elements However its subscript is started from 0 Therefore the five elements are a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 5 The square bracket can not include the element quantity of variables but symbol constant or constant expression is available For instance define FD 5 249 void main int a 3 2 b 7 FD is legal However the following expression form is incorrect void main int n 5 int afn 6 It is allowed that the same type declaration can describe several arrays and several variables For example int a b c d k1 10 k2 20 1 Representation of array element Array elements are the basic unit of array It is also a variable which is identified with array name and a subscript The subscript indicates the sequence number of element in the array The general form of array element is array name subscript Wherein subscript is integer constant or integer expression only If it has decimal this value will be integer automatically by C programming For example a 5 a 1 j a i are the legal array elements Array element is usually called subscript variable The subscript variable could not be used unless array is defined In C language the subscript variable is used one by one rather than the whole
336. rame Spare paramai Figure 8 7 Select expanded mode when first touch screen is primary station Refer to figures 8 2 and 8 3 to set the system of touch screen as slave station RS232 cannot support the connection mode of multi drop Therefore when PLC in mode one device with multiple screens doesn t support port RS485 it is necessary to configure communication adapter to convert RS485 signal into RS232 signal When Samkoon SK series touch screen is selected to be primary station in mode one device with multiple screens the address mode of touch screen as primary station have to be set to Expanded Mode 9 2 One screen multi unit connection method of Sk Workshop Samkoon SK series touch screen can not only be connected in mode one device with multiple screens but also can connect with PLC in the form of one screen with multiple device through MODBUS communication protocol which means that one touch screen can directly operate the register address of multiple PLCs connected with it only if PLC supports MODBUS communication protocol At the time of system setting it is necessary to select Modbus RTU for option Device Server and Modbus RTU Master in right area in option General of communication port attribute of touch screen making touch screen be primary station and all PLCs be slave station Using touch screen to operate register address means to operate the corresponding register addr
337. raph objects with SK Workshop cccccccssssssseseeeeeeeeeeees 74 3 2 1 SEAE PAE AIC VCs yer ices ar ee Aare Etre ck Oh Sr a le sae echt nach etalon 75 3 2 2 User password Sete CIAO 9 1424054 ahecasp estat E tt 76 32 3 Connection with printeri bs eae vale en vlad eae eon leas Ti 3 2 4 Saving position and system alarming setting eeseenosssssssseetttrrrnennsrssssssssssseerreeo 79 3 3 Downloading configuration project Of SK Workshop cccccssceeccceeeceeeeeeasaeeeseeseseeeeeeees 80 3 4 Upload Contig tit aon pro eral 05sc Stacricant a Sha atonal OEA head S 82 3 5 SKW OLKSHOp Conver oreraa ices anteater S we cee aaa cee ee A ee scsi ailutalies 83 ea Choose Convert SamDraw3 3 to SK Workshop ccccsssseessseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeees 84 fo han Choose Upload MistOmeal data serrera E E EE AEE EEE EET 84 Guide on configuration with SK Workshop ccccccccccccccccccccesseseesseseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaaseeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 85 4 1 Screen operation with SK WOTKSNOP siini Senne iene ieee 85 4 1 1 New screen with SK WOrkShOp ss tics ccccesehacessaeencenneaacessstseieetig wteemeendaniiehsceenage acess 85 4 1 2 Modify screen properties with SK Workshop cccccccccccccssssssseseseeeeeeeceeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeees 86 4 1 3 Delete Screech with SK W OF SHOP sie oenen onto dina ioe dir onennana dina adiooriacdtod 87 4 1 4 Copy sorcen With SK WOrKSHOD ices atu sarees a a e siedeoe 87 4 2 Graph ed
338. re three options as Local FLASH U disk and SD card for storage It defaults to store the data in FLASH gt System alarm Use system alarm whether the system alarm function is used or not According to the system alarm options set by users the screen top or bottom will display the current alarm information when there is alarm The background color text color font and font size in alarm bar are the property options in system alarm setting Users can set these items as required Display mode of alarm bar always display means the alarm displays all the time periodic display means the alarm displays or disappears during a certain period Alarm bar position select the position of alarm bar 312 The screen saver time is effective only if screen saver is enabled After the screen saver picture appears you can simply touch the screen to go back the original screen 7 2 3 HMI status of SK Workshop HMI status setting means to write current HMI status information into PLC data register Double click the option HMI Status in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 5 p State HMI Information Write to FLC F The Present Secree F The Present Recip F The Present Iser F The Present Langu Figure 7 5 Setting of HMI status Serial number of current screen Write the serial number of current HMI screen into PLC Serial
339. reen parameter setting in the Project Manager The dialog as shown in Figure 3 5 will pop up 80 fi HET Parameter Sett ing i Ea HAI Parameter Setting Set User Password HMI connected to the printer Settings Ste gt Model Uther ee Hide the mouse cursor J HMI Model SE 121A5 _ Floating point Settings Standard OQ Appoint This set of some agreement effective Display Type Horizontal re HMI Start Setting i Splash Screen Screen Saver Tili al Flicker Frequen 10 gl x 1s mir eee Touch Voice A voice tips Screensavers Screen Touch invalid labeled Use muest system Labeled F 1 Load Screen Alarm setting Alarm Voice Pe E m mamn F Alarm occurs picture Fla Operation Mode Touch Type Oper USB Mouse Action Figure 3 5 General parameter setting dialog gt Touch screen model To change the model of the touch screen by changing this option gt Display mode To switch between horizontal or vertical display of the screen gt Touch screen startup setting Startup screen The screen displayed when the touch screen is powered on Screen saver time The time before starting up screen saver Flicker frequency This parameter defines the frequency of the flicker of objects or controls with flicker option You can set this parameter by directly inputting a value or by clicking the tuning button Alarm voice With
340. refer to relative technical documents of LG Master K series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Default Parameters Setting Range 393 LG Master K Cnet RS232 19200 8 NONE 3 Operable register and address range dddh dddh dddh dddh dddh ddd ddd dddd ddd ddd Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e h indicates hexadecimal and the input range is 0 9 a f 0 255f 0 255f 0 255f 0 255f 0 255f 0 255 0 255 0 9999 0 255 0 255 LG Master K Cnet K Loader K10s1 RS232 RS422 RS485 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 7 8 EVEN ODD NONE 1 2 0 255 0 255 Yes Yes Yes Bit input output region Bit auxiliary relay Bit protective relay Bit link relay B j 0 t special relay Bit timer relay Bit counter relay Word data register Word current value of timer Word current value of counter e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 16 Matsushita device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Matsushita FP series PLC register It establishes serial port communication
341. rent register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 6 Fuji device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Fuji NB series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Fuji NB series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Fuji NB series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Fuji NB series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Fuji NB series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS422 SK series touch screen Fuji NB COM1 COM2 series SK series touch screen uses DB9 F connector Fuji NB series PLC terminal is RJ45 a Software setting v Select Fuji Electric Corporation in the connection device service VY Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Fuji NB series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range PLC 379 3 Operable register and address range oT acco a Gen a ee wae on Note h indicates he
342. reprocessor directive which is called macro definition directive It 1s used to define the identifier to the constant value Upon definition all of this identifier in the future program will be replaced by the constant value Usually the identifier of symbol constant is expressed with capital letter and the variable identifier 1s expressed with lowercase letter for distraction define PI 3 14159 void main float s r r 5 s PI r r printf s f n s It is defined by macro definition directive P1 is defined to be 3 14159 and s r is defined to be float 5 gt r PI r r gt s Display program result float s r wherein r 5 s PI r r This program is defined by macro definition directive before main function P1 is 3 14159 which substitutes for P1 in the program s PI r r is equivalent to s 3 14159 r r Pay attention symbol constant is not variable Its value can not be changed in the overall action scope That is to say assignment statement is forbidden to re assign in the program 246 5 1 2 Initial value of variable and type conversion Initial value assignment for variable In the program it is usually to assign initial value for the variable There are many methods for initial value assignment in the language program which are called initialization In the variable declaration the general form of initial value assignment is Type specifier variable 1 1 variable 2 2 for example int a b c 5 float
343. ric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test Protection grade IP 65 front panel Ambient temperature 10 to 65 C for running paren Huaalty tor 10 to 90 RH non condensable running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Outline dimension 266x208x40 mm Opening dimension 261x203 mm Weight About 2 2 kg ome aun SK Workshop 4 0 0 software Detailed parameters of SK 10 4A a Main technical parameters Number of network l interfaces Number of USB main interfaces Number of SD cards USB device interfaces 32 Number of COM 2 interfaces Display size 10 4 length width 4 3 Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate USB RS232 RS422 RS485 interface Power supply DC24V 15 Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength 1 000V AC 1 minute test for running apie hum Lelaty 108 10 to 90 RH non condensable running Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Opening dimension 386x214 mm software Detailed parameters of SK 12 1A 33 rd Main technical parameters Number of network interfaces Number of USB main interfaces USB device s l interfaces Number of COM i 2 interfaces Display size 12 1 length width 4 3 Service life of back 60 000 hours light Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate USB RS232 RS422 RSASS interface Power supply DC24V 15 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class
344. ries PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Hitachi E EH COM1 COM2 series 383 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector AB device terminal is RJ45 2 Software setting v Select Hitachi Industrial in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Hitachi E EH series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen PLC Hitachi E EH Series Hitachi E EH Series RS232 RS232 RS422 RS485 19200 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 EVEN EVEN ODD NONE Support functions Yes No Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Yes 3 Operable register and address range hhhh O ffff Bit external switch value input read only hhhh O ffff Bit external switch value output MM hhhh O ffff Bit internal relay OOO R O hhhh D i Dik E EA hhhh O ffff Bit timer status hhhh O ffff Bit link relay hhhh O ffft Word external switch value input hhhh O ffff Word external switch value output hhhh O ffff Word internal relay hhhh O ffff Word internal register hhhh O ffft Word link relay hhhh O ffff Word current value of timer counter Note h indicates hexadecimal and the input range is 0 9 a f
345. rrows for polygonal line To change the length direction and position of the polygonal line you may first choose the polygonal line move the mouse to the polygonal line press down left key of the mouse after the mouse shape becomes drag the mouse to appropriate position and finally release the left key 4 3 3 Curve Arc of SK Workshop Choose Curve Arc command in Draw menu or click Curve Arc command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw curve arc in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a curve arc will be drawn left click the mouse and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be the starting point of the polygonal line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically Then left click the mouse and release gt At this moment the mouse shape is still a cross Move the mouse to another position where you want to set the end of the curve arc press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to move in the screen Then release the mouse and right click it to complete the drawing process See Figure 4 26 Figure 4 26 Drawing a curve arc gt As shown in Figure 4 26 in the curve drawn the starting point is a green dot and the ending point is a diamond dot This
346. s of four pages that are Off Text On Text Off Picture and On Picture Off Text and On Text Used to change the text at Off state or On state font pattern font size edge distance font color position and some other properties SKWorkshop also provides more convenient copy function so that you can directly copy well set properties to the current Off Text or On Text Text of the first language used for all languages This option is used for multiple languages cases that are when the total numbers of languages is more than 1 in the Language option of the Project Manager If this option is chosen the language of the control will not be changed along with the language switch Language This option is used for multiple languages cases You can choose different languages and enter different texts under different states getting prepared for multiple language controls Thus when Switch Language option is chosen in the function buttons and a target language is chosen all the text controls in the screen will use specified language after clicking this function button For different languages text contents font and font size may be different but color word space and position are the same Font Font of the text contents entered You may choose different fonts for different states or languages Font size Font size of the text contents entered You may choose different font sizes for different states or languages 1
347. s set by the user is LW3 then the values of 12 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 X axis value of pen 1 LWS Y axis value of pen 1 LW7 X axis value of pen 2 LW9 Y axis value of pen 2 LW11 X axis value of pen 3 LW13 Y axis value of pen 3 The read addresses are LW3 to LW14 totally 12 addresses Thus if 32 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of 2 N addresses adding 2 to the address each time can be read according to different address rules of the PLC 4 4 4 Historical trend chart of Sk Workshop gt Overview of trend chart This chart should be used together with the Historical Data Collector in the Project Manager of the system It displays the data value read from the Historical Data Collector Overview of XY Trend chart Displaying continuous values of variables on a dynamic and continuous basis Reference curves for multiple data can be drawn Values of two continuous register addresses will be respectively used as the horizontal and vertical axis to visualize the change trend of the two values 8 polygonal lines can be displayed at most line charts The steps to insert Trend chart and modify its properties are as follows Click Trend chart icon bes in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 58 will appear 131 Historical trend i Reni j EY Acts gl Visi bi ity J Humber of Cursi o i C I use control addr Figure 4 58 Gen
348. s so as to confirm what branch program period is to be executed If statement of C language has three basic forms 1 The first form is basic form if expression statement It s semanteme if the expression value is true the following statement will be executed otherwise not 2 The second form is if else if expression statement 1 else statement 2 Semanteme if the expression value is true it will execute statement 1 otherwise statement 2 255 Input two integers and output the bigger one Judge a and b size with if else statement If a is bigger it outputs a otherwise b The third form is if else if form In the first two forms if statement is normally used for two branches When there are several branches for selection if else if statement is adopted Its basic form is if expression 1 statement 1 else if expression 2 statement 2 else if expression 3 Statement 3 else if expression m Statement m else statement n Semanteme judge the expression value in sequence When a value is true it executes the corresponding statement Then it executes program out of if statement If all expressions are false it will execute statement n Then continue to execute the subsequent program There are some points to be noted in if statement 1 In the three forms of if statement the one behind if is expression This expression is usually the logical expression or relational expression But it may b
349. screen properties with SK Workshop To modify properties of a screen follow the steps below to have a Screen Properties dialog pop up In this dialog screen name and background color can be modified The steps are as follows 93 ar If no object or control is chosen click a blank area in the current screen click command in the tool bar or click the screen to be modified in the Screen option in the Project Manager and right click it to call the right click menu and then click Properties option Besides you can also move the mouse to a blank space in the screen and right click the mouse to call the right click menu and choose Properties option in the menu After that a dialog as shown in Figure 4 3 will appear l Add Screen mM Screen Hame sereen Backer ound G Aequiesbls Color FG Color Pattern C Ficture Figure 4 3 Screen properties dialog 4 1 3 Delete screen with SK Workshop Delete Screen command is used to delete a screen in the current project The steps are as follows Choose Delete Screen in Screen menu or click the screen to be deleted in the Screen option in the Project Manager and right click it to call the right click menu and then click Delete option Besides you can also move the mouse to a blank space in the screen and right click the mouse to call the right click menu and choose Delete option in the menu After that a dialog as shown in Figure
350. se button Macro Use Macro 176 Figure 4 85 Screen button dialog Refer to the introduction of Bit Button for Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Function module Open Screen Here you can choose a screen to be opened in Screen option so that the screen will be opened after you click the screen button in the touch screen This function can be used in screen or window Open Previous Screen When this option is checked the screen will jump to the previous screen after you click this button This function can be only used in screen pages Close and Open Screen This function can be only used in window page It is used to close the current window and open another window or screen Close Screen This function can be only used in window page It is used to close the current window page Change user level User level log off Recover the current user level to the default user level Specify user level Change the current user level to a specified level Open function When Pressing Down Screen switch over will be performed when you press down the mouse When Releasing Screen switch over will be performed when you release the mouse Require logon at insufficient user level If you chose User Level Controlled option in the Advance tab of Screen dialog and have changed the Valid Lowest Level then the controls in the screen will be touchable only when the current user level is equal to or higher than
351. sed to directly execute online simulation command 1 Compile used to check the screen configuration project created by the user and get prepared for downloading IE Download used to call the download dialog You can download the configuration project into the screen if SK series HMI is connected 70 De Converter used to call a dialog with four functions first converting a SamDraw3 3 project to a SKWorkshop V4 0 project second uploading historical data third uploading recipes fourth uploading configuration project Macro used to programme for the configuration screen with C language 7 Global macro used to set a global macro 7 Initial macro used to set an initial macro SKWorkshop project manager The Project Manager window of SKWorkshop is located below the tool bar on the left of the interface of the configuration software It can be used to set parameters for the touch screen including Link Setting Screen Window Historical Data Logger Alarm Log and Recipe In detail Link includes Link 1 and Link 2 Setting includes HMI parameter setting HMI status PLC Control Clock File Protection and HMI Protection See Figure 2 41 71 Window F x Standandi v Ae HMI ch y Setting vm MI Parameter Setting EES HMI Status FLC Control N Clock i File Frotection P HMI Protection Variable table H 9 Sereen O00 Sereentl Hindow Historical Data Logger l Alarm Log
352. sen to a control or to disassemble an assembled object to the original objects When using Assemble key do not assemble objects to be touched or it cannot be touched after downloading to the touch screen Users may use Layer command to superpose touch objects Zoom Used to zoom in or out the current screen in order to conduct finer control operation The available zoom options include 1x zoom in recover and 1x zoom out Grid Used to arrange the current screen and cancel grids whose widths have been selected Grid width Used to change the grid width of the current screen The range of such change is 4 16 Simulation status Used to change the ON OFF status of all bit operation objects in the current screen Screen Used to create a new screen open screen property window and delete a screen Before deleting a screen please ensure that the screen to be deleted is the current screen and whether there are useful controls in the screen Deleted screens cannot be recovered by means of Undo SKWorkshop Tool bar SKWorkshop totally provides three lines of shortcut tool buttons including tool commands and editing commands After getting familiar with these buttons designers can find the desired commands quickly without searching in the menu bar Each button has a floating prompt which appears when you move the mouse to the button SKWorkshop totally provides 87 tool buttons When these buttons are grey they are inval
353. set of machine parameter setting For batch processing device one recipe may be used to describe different steps during batch processing One device can be used to produce bread and also cake The bread includes sweet one and salty one Cake has cream one and chocolate one Here the proportional relation of ingredients for bread manufacturing is called recipe and the proportional relation of ingredients for production of salty or sweet bread called one file It is clear that the recipe record is included in recipe file The function of recipe configuration is provided in SKWorkshop You can enter the dialog box of recipe configuration through recipe setting in menu bar or recipe in project manager as shown in figure 7 30 337 Recipe Hame Description wii n Recipe Length Humber of Rk 4 gt Data Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int We F Write Recipe To PLC F Read Recipe Form FLC Recipe Memory Address Range Current Recipe Address Range cen o y yyyoy Recipe Number RegisYI0 EDESA NEES Recipe Export Recipe Inport Figure 7 30 Dialog box of recipe attribute setting V Name Name of current recipe file only one group of file is supported temporarily V Description Name description and explanation of current recipe file yV Recipe length Length and quantity of current recipe read record address Address of recipe record table is sorted in order which is generated by system automatically and cann
354. several coordinate axes Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 4 5 Dynamic circle of Sk Workshop Dynamic Circle is used to place a graph onto the screen and have the graph move along a specified course and change in size Such movement and size change is determined by the value of the monitored address The steps to insert Dynamic Circle control and modify its properties are as follows Click Dynamic Circle icon gt in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 61 will appear ji Dynamic Cricle Visibility TEOOO Controllable C Center C Radius Data Type 16 Bit Int Monitor Addr es Circle w Solid Border Border Col eet Figure 4 61 Dynamic circle dialog 136 This control reads values of three addresses to define X coordinate Y coordinate and radius of the circle Reading of these values should be based on the data type set by the user Controllable Only Center is chosen The circle moves along with the change of the position of the center with the radius being unchanged Only Radius is chosen The circle changes along with the change of the radius with the center being unchanged Both Center and Radius is chosen Not only the radius of the circle changes along with the value of the monitored address the X coordinate and Y coordinate of the center changes along with the values of the monitored addresses Transparency Change the transparency of t
355. sh and the mouse will become a cross shape Click on the screen to add the screen button and adjust the size of control button Then build three function buttons and the text entry of mark for each function button is described as following select language 1 in the drop down list of language and enter present language 1 Simplified Chinese in the text select language 2 in the drop down list of language and enter present language 2 English in the text select language 3 in the drop down list of language and enter present language 3 Japan in the text The function option on the general page of each function button should be language switch the language option is language 1 language 2 and language 3 respectively 302 Function Button Gener al Advanced Visibility Border Color Bis Color Pattern soia v Function Change Language w Language languazel Macro F Use Macro 303 Function Button Gener al Advanced Visibility Border Color Bis Color Pattern soia v Function Change Language w Language Language Macro F Use Macro 304 Function Button General Label Advanced Visibility il Border Color Bis Color Pattern soia v Function Change Language kai Language Macro F Use Macro 3 After setting finishes save the project as shown in following figure 305 j SEFor
356. sitive integer select scaling gain 3 offset 2 LH1 32 positive integer select scaling gain 2 offset 1 LH2 16 integer not select scaling LH3 32 integer not select scaling LH4 floating number select scaling gain 4 offset 5 After completion of setting we have set Read Address to be LW1 and Sample Length to be 5 in general page previously Therefore we have to read five groups of address value continuously starting from Read Address The concrete address to be read depends on the data type of each item in page Data Item 325 If the data type of each item is set to 16 digits the sampled address is continuous if data type is 32 digits the sampled address is discontinuous If Scaling is selected for some item the finally sampled value read address value x gain offset If the data type and scaling of each item has been set addresses to be read are respectively as follows LHO LW1 16 digit data read address 1 LH1 LW2 32 digit data read address 2 LH2 LW4 16 digit data read address 1 LH3 LWS5 32 digit data read address 2 LH4 LW7 32 digit data read address 2 LHO final value LW1 address value x3 2 LH1 final value LW2 address value x2 1 LH2 final value LW4 address value LH3 final value LW5 address value LH4 final value LW1 address value x4 5 Click OK after the completion of setting Click the icon Historical Record Displayer in toolbar and set the display l
357. ss of channel 2 is LW100 the control address of channel 2 is LW200 and the control address of channel 3 is RWI1 then Pen 1 LWI1 LW10 Pen2 LW100 LW110 Pen 3 LW200 LW210 Pen3 RWII RWIIO If the data type is 32 bit and other settings remain unchanged then Pen 1 LW1I LW20 Pen2 LW100 LW120 Pen3 LW200 LW220 Pen 3 RWII RWI20 Thus if 32 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of N addresses adding 2 to the address each time can be read according to different address rules of the PLC Background color Background color of the area where the pens lines are moving Clear Trigger When the value of the Clear Trigger address changes from 0 to 1 all current pens lines will be cleared When the value of the Clear Trigger address changes from 1 to 0 or has no change no change will be made to the pens Point pen Each pen is composed of points Line pen Each pen is composed of lines Refer to Visibility tab of Bit Button for the Visibility tab 230 4 6 9 User defined keyboard of SK Workshop 1 Keyboard element This control is used for user defined keyboard to form each button of the keyboard The icon of this control in the toolbar is Leh Click this icon and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 128 will pop up Eeyboard Components Label Advanced _ isibility 5 m Border Color Fiz Color Bis Color Fattern EXTER BACKSPACE
358. supply module 1 4 2 Front panel Figure 1 14 is a view of the front panel of Samkoon SK series touch screen The front panel consists of the display screen and the operation indicator lights Indicator light Display screen Figure 1 14 Front panel of SK series 1 4 3 Communication interfaces The communication interfaces of the touch screen are located in the bottom panel of the machine 2 standard serial communication interfaces are provided in SK 12 1A SK 10 4A SK 10 4B SK 8 0A SK 7 0A SK 7 2A SK 5 7A SK 5 7B SK 5 7C and 1 standard serial communication interface is provided in SK 3 5A SK 4 0A SK 4 3A SK 5 0A 9 pin D type interfaces are used for connection and communication with PLC or other controller When shielded cables are used the communication distance of RS232 should be no more than 15m A USB communication interface is provided for connection with PC for configuration downloading with a communication rate up to 1OMbps 2 USB interfaces are provided in SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7D and SK 5 7F These USB interfaces use B type female interfaces 1 B type female interface and 1 A type female interface are provided in SK 5 7A SK 5 7C SK 5 7D and SK 5 7F For connection of different PLCs the definitions of the communication interfaces are also different Users need to specify the types of the PLCs to be connected at the time of ordering so that appropriate communication cables can be provided Figure 1 15 shows a pane
359. t Other settings Hide mouse cursor it is display cursor or not Floating number setting standard the high byte of floating number is in front and the low byte is behind defined confirm the high and low byte position as required by users No data mark Value object the control that displayed in communication failure i e numeric display control numeric input control etc Stay means to maintain the original display clear means to clear the displayed text of the control means to display the text with symbol means to display the text with symbol Character object the control that displayed in communication failure i e ASCII display control ASCII input control etc Stay means to maintain the original display clear means to clear the displayed text of the control means to display the text with symbol gt Touch invalid sign if selecting customized mark it means to mark the control is uncontrollable with the selected picture of users on the control when the controllable control is unavailable gt Operation mode make operations by touch or USB mouse 2 The user password setting is shown as Figure 7 2 309 HEL Parameter Setting 3 C Star User 6 F Star i Default user MULL x Allows uploading configuration F Upload when password Supreme authority password Figure 7 2 User password setting in touch screen parameter settin
360. t external input read only ddddh 0 9999f Bit external output 0 9999f ddddd 0 99999 Word link register Note d indicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e h indicates hexadecimal and the input range is 0 9 a f e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 17 Mitsubishi device driver This device driver is used by SKWorkshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Melsec FXxn QO00J C24N_ series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Melsec FXxn QO00J C24N series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Melsec FXxn QOOJ C24N series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Melsec FXxn QO0J C24N series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Melsec FXxn QO0J C24N series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS422 Melsec FXxn FX3U 3G SK series touch screen Melsec FXx COM1 COM2 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Melsec FXxn series PLC terminal is MD8M RS232 Melsec QO0J 39
361. t updating 5 Restart HMI and complete updating Restart HMI power or click Restart button on the screen to restart HMI Note Do not disconnect U disk or SD card during updating e Keep HMI powered during updating 11 3 Image formats supported by SK series touch screen SK series touch screen supports many image formats such as jpg bmp gif png etc However to ensure the display efficiency the default image is compressed and converted into JPG format in HMI except gif display control If you want to keep the original format please select the image option as keep the original format or convert image to JPG from the menu touch screen parameter setting gt printer download setting Download images options O Keep pictures for thi O Put the pictures int notice To Suggestions will Note Converting image to jpg format can save the memory control and accommodate more images e Using the image whose resolution is not greater than HMI screen resolution could improve display efficiency e The max frames of gif image are 32 frames 11 4 Dial switch SK series touch screen provides a dial switch Each switch corresponds to the separate function Function list of dial switch IPPP 420 00000 Normal operation mode 00001 Coordinate adjustment mode 00010 Parameter display mode Note HMI has to been restarted after the dial switch is adjusted e Please adopt the normal operation
362. t Lamp 1s exactly the same as the Label tab of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Bit Lamp 3 If Word Bit or Double Word Bit is chosen as Date Type there will be a bit number selection dialog The Visibility tab of Bit Lamp is exactly the same as the Visibility tab of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Bit Lamp After setting of the properties click OK button and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can draw a rectangle in the screen by clicking the mouse and thus add this control into the screen 4 5 4 Screen button of SK Workshop Screen Button is mainly used to switch screens change user level and pop up window and the like You can make the screen window switch to a set screen window by touching a set screen button and during the switching process you can also choose whether to change user level gt Click Screen Button icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 85 will pop up Screen Button Label Advanced Visibility sB0000 Border Color Bi Color Fattern Operation fm ie a Open Screen Open Previous Screen E Close Upen Screen E Close Screen a eo ree mee Sereen 0 Screenl a a BEEE E Switching User Ley Login Required if Level is Insufticiel Open Funetion Press the butt Relea
363. t click menu See Figure 4 23 for a contrast before and after such processing 102 Make same width and height before Make same width and height after Figure 4 23 Contrast before and after The Same Height and Width gt Equal horizontal space First choose several two or more graph objects and then click the Equal Horizontal Space command in Align option in Edit menu or command button t in the toolbar buttons or call the right click menu and choose the Equal Horizontal Space command in Align option gt Equal vertical space First choose several two or more graph objects and then click the Equal Vertical Space command in Align option in Edit menu or command button in the toolbar buttons or call the right click menu and choose the Equal Vertical Space command in Align option Before apply The Same Width The Same Height and The Same Height and Width commands you need to first make sure whether the objects to be processed have been rotated Rotated objects are subjected to change between width and height Application of these commands after rotation has the same effect as rotation after application of these commands 4 3 Drawing basic graphs with SK Workshop This chapter introduces in detail the operations of drawing basic graphs with SK Workshop 4 3 1 Line of Sk Workshop sis ge feesten faisin Choose Line command in Draw menu or click Line command button in the tool b
364. t color word interval line interval blink and position See Figure 4 113 for Text tab of Day of Week Display 210 Day of Week Display E renter al Text F All language use the first Langu bAtExthe property will the s E Attribute oF Text Sunday l L System Menday Font Tuesday Font Size 10 Thursday Blink Friday Saturday Fosition bes oad Figure 4 113 Text tab of day of week display gt Text of the first language used for all languages This option is used for multiple languages cases that are when the total numbers of languages is more than 1 in the Language option of the Project Manager If this option is chosen the language of the control will not be changed along with the language switch gt Language This option is used for multiple languages cases You can choose different languages and enter different texts under different states getting prepared for multiple language controls Thus when Switch Language option is chosen in the function buttons and a target language is chosen all the text controls in the screen will use specified language after clicking this function button For different languages text contents font and font size may be different but color word space and position are the same gt Font Font of the text contents entered You may choose different fonts for different states or languages gt Font size Font size of the text contents entere
365. t of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the Numeric Entry button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list gt Advanced tab of Numeric Entry This tab is mainly used to set Gain Offset and Range Check checking whether the data entered exceed the range set of the data entered Besides there are also Touch Availability and Notification options in this tab which have the same functions as the corresponding options in Bit Button control Click the Advanced tab and then a dialog as shown in 4 102 will appear 196 Nameric Ent Ly Control B Use the keyboard Available 1 Display the original invalid logo F Controlled by User Level Notification scaling Hotificat Gain State 1 Oo Offset lisplay range Range Check F Variable Range C Variable Range Lower Lilo Lower Limi d High limess35 High limi te5535 High color Low color Text Color a Text Color BG Color He Eeior aa Figure 4 102 Advanced tab of numeric entry Bit controlled If this option is chosen the control will be touchable only when specified conditions are met that is the address value of the control bit is equal to the valid state value For example if the address of Control Bit is LB1 and the Valid State is 1 then the Number Entering control will be touchable in simulation or screen when and only when the value of LB1 is equa
366. t to Lef Customize the values of tl Up to Down Down to Up Data Type 1B it Unsi gm Write pee ee Current State Bis Color Text color Figure 4 118 General tab of step button State sequence Text arrangement sequence of the control For example if the total number of states is 3 the texts of state 0 1 and 2 are respectively 0 1 and 2 From left to right Horizontal placement of the control and from left to right arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 0 1 2 From right to left Horizontal placement of the control and from left to right arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 2 1 0 From top down Vertical placement of the control and from top down arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 0 1 2 From bottom up Vertical placement of the control and from bottom up arrangement of the texts If this option is chosen the text sequence is 2 1 0 State type Refer to the state type of Multi state lamp 217 gt Current state Set the background color and text color of the text under the current state gt Refer to the Text and Picture tabs of Multi state Lamp for the parameter setting in Text and Picture tabs gt Refer to the Advanced tab of Bit Button for the Advanced tab gt For example if the Data Type is Numerical Value the write address is LW1 the total number
367. t will output the execution result 190 The final effect is shown as Figure 5 21 Figure 5 21 Result Display To the end of this section all required functions as macro edition compilation download and test have been completed smoothly and a simple macroblock runs in normal condition 5 5 Appendix 1 1 ADDSUM Description 281 Use addition to calculate checksum Usage Checksum ADDSUM data size of data Example char data 5 Oxl 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x20 int checksum checksum ADDSUM data 5 checksum 0x2a 2 ASCIIDEC Description Convert a string to a decimal value Usage result ASCIIZ2DEC source sizeof source Example char source 4 2 3 4 5 short result result ASCIIZDEC source 4 result 2345 3 ASCII2FLOAT Description Convert a string to a floating value Usage result ASCIIZFLOAT source sizeof source Example char source 4 5 7 8 float result result ASCIIZ2FLOAT source 4 result 5 78 4 ASCTIRHEX Description Convert a string to a hexadecimal value Usage result ASCIIZHEX source sizeof source 282 Example char source 5 1 6 3 4 short result result ASCIIZHEX source 4 result 0x1634 5 BCD2BIN Description Convert a BCD value to a BIN value Usage result BCD2BIN source Example short source 0x2648 short result result BCD2BIN source result 1234 6 BIN2ZBCD
368. ta to the data register of PLC or other connected devices in addition to data display The steps to create a Numeric Entry touch button are as follows Click Numeric Entry icon He in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 100 will appear Nameric Ent Ly EA PAES E Border Color FG Color patilar Text Color Pattern _ Solid Data Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int Display Type 16 Bit Unsigned Decime W Write Address Monitor Address Identics Monitor Addres ee F Passord Font p Justification Zero Supt Font Size O Leading 2 Total Digits E Leading Fractional Digi Macro Use Macro Figure 4 100 Numeric entry dialog Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Refer to Numeric Display control for use of Alignment Justification Total Digits and Fractional Digits 195 To reset the contents and properties of Numeric Entry you can double click the Numeric Entry dialog When this control is executed in HMI a keyboard will pop up on the screen for users to enter the data See Figure 4 101 Figure 4 101 Number entering keyboard When 32 digit data type is chosen for Numeric Display the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data reg
369. the connected device For example for FX 2N series of Mitsubishi PLCs X represents the address of input coil Y represents the address of the output coil M represents the address of the intermediate relay C represents the address of the counter on off state display T represents the address of the timer on off state display D represents the address of the data register C represents the address of the counter count value and T represents the address of the timer count value For S7 200 series of Siemens PLCs I represents the address of the input point Q represents the address of the output point M represent the address of the intermediate relay and V represents the address of the data register See Figure 4 76 PR Link 1 Ww fi Address Ent Ly x iy EE le CIs Jos on W GIy CH m1 he Figure 4 76 Thus you can write the current state of the bit button into the address basing on the corresponding address symbols of the PLCs or other connected device used In other words when the Bit Button is at 0 OFF state the value of the write or displayed address is 0 OFF when the control is at 1 ON state the value of the write or displayed address is 1 ON Monitor If this option is checked a Monitor Address will appear indicating this Bit Button can be used to monitor the state change of the value of Monitor Address When the value of the monitored address is 1 ON the bit button presents 1 ON state when the va
370. the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 5 8 Numeric display of Sk Workshop Numeric Display control is a common control used to display the data saved in the data register of PLC or other connected devices such as speed current pressure and the like 190 Click Numeric Display icon 123 in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 96 will appear H Nameric Display Advanced Visibility Border Color Fir Color BG Color Text Color Fattern Data Type it Unsigned Display Type 16 bit Unsigned W Monitor Address o Ali goment Justification O Left Lero Supt Font Font Size M E E Center Leading 7 Fractional Digits0 C Right Pa Ca Ca tas Figure 4 96 Numeric display dialog In this dialog you can set the data register address of the PLC or other connected device where the data to be displayed are saved total display digits of the data fractional digits of the data font size font color alignment and value adjustment Data type Here you can choose different data types according to the data in the register address to be monitored Display type Here you can choose different display types according to actual needs Monitor address This control is used to display data and the Monitor Address is the data register address of the PLC or other connected device to be displayed Fractional digits The number of fractional digits of the data to b
371. the register can be used as bit only e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 5 Fatek device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of Fatek FB series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of Fatek FB series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Fatek FB series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Fatek FB series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Fatek FB series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen Fatek FB 377 COM1 COM2 series SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Fatek FB series PLC terminal is MD8M Software setting Y Select Fatek Automation Corp in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Fatek FB series PLC for
372. the value of this option is set to 10 then the element will change a position every second Return We assume there are four positions respectively position 0 position 1 position 2 and position 3 If this option is not chosen after the element moves to the last position position 3 it will move immediately to position 0 and then repeat the original position changing mode as shown below position 0 gt position 1 gt position 2 gt position 3 gt position 2 gt position 1 gt position 0 If this option is chosen after the element moves to the last position position 3 it will move in reserve direction till position 0 and then repeat the original position changing mode as shown below position 0 gt position 1 gt position 2 gt position 3 gt position 2 gt position 1 gt position 0 225 State switch The manner of state changing You can choose Based on Position or Based on Time If Based on Position is chosen the state will change along with position If Based on Time is chosen the position and state will change along the points specified in the screen Switch frequency determines the frequency of the state switching as shown in Figure 4 125 Anigation Generel Text Picture Cont our Visibility ID AAOOOO _ State Border Colas FG Color Bi Color Pattern Property Total States E v Site depend on registel According of the clock Automatic position co
373. the welcome window you can also install USB drive program view the CD read user manual access the website of the Company via the hyperlink and view contact information of the Company You can quit installation by clicking the Exit button on the right bottom corner e After starting up the installation program the following language selection box will pop up allowing user to select English or Simplified Chinese installation Here we take Simplified Chinese as an example Choose Simplified Chinese and click OK then the startup dialog will pop up in several seconds e In the startup dialog click Next to continue installation or click Cancel to quit installation as shown in Figure 2 3 Before installation please confirm that SK Workshop3 3 or earlier releases have been uninstalled or normal use of SK Workshop4 0 0 may be impacted ie Setup SEWorkshop Welcome to the SKWorkshop Setup Wizard This will install SEWorkshop on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Hext to continue or Cancel to exit Setup Figure 2 3 Installation window e In the license agreement dialog please select whether to accept the software clauses and click next See Figure 2 4 40 ie Setup SEVorkshop License Agreement Please read the following important information before continuing Please read the following License Agreement You must accept
374. then complete setting in the pop up dialog as shown in Figure 4 71 After setting and clicking OK click on the screen to add the control into the screen add an value entering control in the screen set both the write address and monitored address to LW3 and then save the project Click the number entering control in simulation or screen and enter a desired state value in the pop up keyboard We assume the value entered is 1 then the value written to the register is 22 the value of the monitored read address is 1 and the control will display the texts under state 1 that is the text contents under State 3 in the Text tab of this control On the contrary if the entered value for LW3 is 33 the control will display the text under state 2 Manner There are four options that are Keyboard Input Output Constant Increase and Decrease Keyboard input This can be chosen for all of the three options in State Type If this option is chosen when you click the control in the simulation or screen a pop up keyboard will appear so that you can enter a value as shown in Figure 4 95 189 Figure 4 95 Keyboard Output constant This option can be chosen only when the Numerical Value option in the three options of State Type is chosen If this option is chosen a Constant option will appear after the dropdown box of Manner When you click the control in the simulation or screen the value written will be this constant set here Increase
375. this button you can conveniently realize various functions Click FL and then a Function Button property dialog as shown in Figure 4 87 will appear Function Button ease ora ID FBOoo0 oo Border Color Bis Color Pattern HAEREERE Macro Use Macro Figure 4 87 Function button dialog 178 10 11 Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Turn off background light Used to set the function of the Function Button to turn off alarm light Then you can turn off the background light of the touch screen by touching this button but the touch screen remains working normally To turn on the background light you only need to touch any position on the touch screen Confirm alarm Used to set the function of the Function Button to confirm alarm Then you can confirm chosen alarm contents by touching this button on the touch screen Restart Used to set the function of the Function Button to restart Then you can restart the touch screen by touching this button on the touch screen Set screen saver time Set the time before starting up screen saver Write recipe to PLC Used to set the function of the Function Button to write recipe to PLC Then you can write the recipe parameters saved in the current screen to corresponding continuous data register addresses which are write
376. this command to the configuration procedures by the SamDraw3 3into the SK Workshop V4 0 0version Help menu Help menu is used to call the help file of SKWorkshop and the version number and copyright statement of the software See Figure 2 36 ARTI Language Selection Help H Fl HFiEWorkshop 4 0 1 Figure 2 36 Help menu The help file is shown in Figure 2 37 61 m User manual pdf Adobe Reader Seles 8A 63 OL Jas me es ie Preface Thanks very much for purchasing the SE series touch screen products of Shenzhen Samkoon Automa Ltd Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd is a national hi tech enterprise involved in rese of industrial visual touch control products core technology of human machine interface as 1 manufacture and selling of advanced industrial control products With over 6 years of development it strengths and become leading in the related national and even global industry by virtue of its strong capability core technologies that are not based on any system and for which the Company has 100 in property nght and high cost effectiveness of the products samkoon s SK series human machine interface HMD products are mainly used in industrial control t control With excellent performance they are increasingly widely used in various industries such as tes machines plastic and rubbery machines plastic injection molding machines packaging machines ultra electronic welding machin
377. through the other height side To change the scale to the right forms in the figure above perform Free Rotation for it 4 3 13 Open library of SKWorkshop Choose Open Library command in Draw menu or click Open Library command button _ in the tool buttons and then a Library List dialog will pop up See Figure 4 43 117 fa Open Library Button 1 Buttonl Buttons G Indicator Liss Tndicatorl Indicator H Indicators Tndi catord Indicator H Indicator gt IndicatorT H Indicator Indicator Figure 4 43 Library list gt The picture library of SK Workshop provides users with abundant graph objects and in SKWorkshop V4 0 0 many additional buttons indicator lights and other graph objects are added Designers can easily find desired graph objects in the library saving much time in configuration gt To choose a graph object you can first click the brief major categories on the left side of the library click to unfold the detailed classes under the major categories and then choose a desired graph object in the right area Click or double click a graph and click OK button on the lower left and then the mouse shape will become a cross Now you can add the library graph into the screen by clicking the mouse gt Modify Choose the graph to be modified click the Modify button on the lower left and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 44 will pop up 118 Graphic modification BG Col
378. ting i HMI Status PLE Control SM Clock File Protection HMI Protection Variable table Sereen The O00 Sereenl Hindeaw Historical Data Logger Historical Data Logger U p i T na F Hew Didital Alarm Log E Hew Analog Alarm Log a Vata Transport Figure 7 20 Select alarm log e Double click the option Digital Alarm Log in unfolded option of alarm log to open the dialog box of digital alarm setting as shown in figure 7 21 328 i Digital Alarm Block Name Digital Alarm Logi Type Continued Bit Read Address Continuwtof Word ford value Scanning Ti Discrete Alarm o Message ________ tee Information Language languagel S Figure 7 21 The dialog box of digit alarm at continuous digit The operation step of digital alarm is as follows Firstly enter the bit address to be alarmed in column Read Address Suppose it is set to internal address LB1 here Select total number of alarms in option Block Size i e total number of digit addresses which are continuous here Suppose the length is set to be 6 here Users can set the Scanning time of digit alarm as required 1 e scanning frequency Click some option in list box Then move mouse to the edit box Text in right module Message and enter text information in it i e alarm content Suppose information set here i e alarm content is as shown in figure 6 17
379. tion failure As it is Keep the displayed text contents as it is Clear Clear the text contents displayed in the control Present the displayed contents of this control with gt Invalid touch sign When Use Sign is chosen that is a touchable control cannot be touched a user selected picture will be used to indicate that this control cannot be touched 3 2 2 User password setting dialog See Figure 3 6 82 HET Parameter Sett ing i Ea WII Parameter Setting Set User Password stc4 gt User 1 Star User 2 Star User 3 Star User 4 Star User 5 Star User 6 Star User T Star User 6 Star Default user HULL Allows uploading configuration C Upload when password L ee F Supreme authority password Figure 3 6 User password setting dialog gt In this dialog there are 8 user passwords and for each user password there are 8 levels available for selection gt Default user level The current user level by default is NULL v Allow configuration uploading If this option is chosen you can upload the project from the HMI to the PC otherwise such uploading is not allowed Input password when uploading Whether to enter password for uploading of the project Highest privilege password This password can be used to open all controls subject to level controlling Enable uploading You can use this password to upload the
380. tion for different languages When the users employ language switching function in the function button it can switch to the defined language 7 6 2 Analog alarm log of SKWorkshop Double click the option Analog Alarm Log in unfolded option of alarm log to open the dialog box of analog alarm setting as shown in figure 7 26 333 A Analog Alarm Block Block Name Analog Alarm Log Read AddressLML Block Size Scanning tint E A Analog Alarm Hessaze miro st o Address Type i gh a ne 16 Bit Unsigned Inm Limit Message Terie More than 350 Information Language Languagel b h Figure 7 26 Dialog box of analog alarm log If users need analog alarm the operation step of is as follows e Firstly enter the address to be alarmed in column Read Address Suppose it is set to internal address LW1 here e Select the total number of alarms in option Block Size 1 e total number of addresses The mode of read address has something to do with data type selected by users In the beginning each address is default to 16 digit data type The initially read address is continuous But users can alter the data type of each address As shown in figure 6 20 LW1 address value is selected to 32 digit positive integer and both LW3 and LW4 are 16 digit positive integer Therefore when selecting 32 digit data for some address the address read following is equal to previous address plus 2
381. tion timeout the unit is ms 348 C Current waiting time in COM2 60323 communication Current waiting time of communication the unit is ms Current retry times in COM2 60324 communication Current retry times in communication 60325 PLC brand of COM2 Communication parameter set manufacturer for PLC connection PLC model of 60326 COM2 Communication parameter the model is CPU model Historical alarm 60327 items The recorded historical alarm sum Historical record 60329 items The recorded historical records sum 60331 Whether it makes sound in touch or mouse clicking R 60332 Alarm sound Whether it makes sound in alarm R Keyboard language 60333 switching 0 Chinese keyboard 1 English keyboard for standard keyboard 60334 CPU utilization rate The utilization rate of current system in CPU operation Current luminance of a 60335 backlight Current luminance of backlight HMI remain storage 60336 capacity Remain FLASH storage capacity used by current HMI Current project 60337 creation time year Current project file creation time year Current project creation time 60338 month Current project file creation time month Current project 60339 creation time day Current project file creation time day Current user 60340 language Set the current language Copy the historical alarm within a ete fe left PEE He eeh i sp
382. to or higher than this level Cancel user level Used to set the function of the Function Button to cancel user level Then you can cancel the privilege of the current user by touching this button on the touch screen so that the user level will become the minimum level that is level 1 Alarm voice On Off Used to set the function of the Function Button to alarm voice On Of Then where there is an alarm in the touch screen the alarm will be audible Function button can be used to enable or disable this function Add a Function Button on the screen and set it to alarm voice On Off Then if alarm voice is enabled in the current system it will be disabled by pressing this button if it is disabled in the current system it will be enabled by pressing this button Touch voice On Off Used to set the function of the Function Button to touch voice On Off that is to enable or disable touch voice Then if the screen makes a sound along with touching after pressing this button it will no longer make a sound and vice versa User Macro If this option is chosen a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the bit button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list Clear all historical data Used to clear all historical data saved in the touch screen Clear historical alarm Used to clear all historical alarm inf
383. to the introduction above for reference The icon of XY Trend Chart in the tool bar is US Open the Properties dialog of XY Trend Chart and set parameters with reference to the parameter setting for Trend Chart It should be noted that in Trend Chart each pen presents the values of continuous addresses starting from write address and in XY Trend Chart each pen presents the values of two continuous addresses starting from write address gt Detection module Enable Whether to enable the detection line reference line Color Color of the detection line reference line Detection address Write the value corresponding to the current position of the detection line reference line into the detection address register For example If the data type is 16 digit data the number of data is 4 and the read address set by the user is LW3 then the values of 8 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 X axis value of pen 1 LW4 Y axis value of pen 1 LWS X axis value of pen 2 LW6 Y axis value of pen 2 LW7 X axis value of pen 3 130 LWS8 Y axis value of pen 3 LW9 X axis value of pen 4 LW10 Y axis value of pen 4 The read addresses are LW3 to LW10 totally 8 addresses Thus if 16 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of 2 N addresses can be read continuously according to different address rules of the PLC If the data type is 32 digit data the number of data 1s 3 and the read addres
384. ton again Corresponding to Recover command used to recover the current screen to the original standard size Corresponding to Zoom out command used to zoom out the current screen by 1x For further zoom out click this button again E7 Corresponding to Translate command used to move the screen in the allowable range of the configuration window Choose this command first move the mouse to the picture area press down the left key of the mouse and keep such state then move the mouse to desired position and loosen the key k Scroll arrow used to change the palm shape under Translate command back to ordinary mouse shape Draw toolbar N Corresponding to Line command used to draw a straight line of any direction in the current screen si Corresponding to Polyline command used to draw a polygonal line of any direction in the current screen Corresponding to Curve Arc command used to draw a curve or arc in the current screen a Corresponding to Free line command used to draw a line of any direction in the current screen along the movement of the mouse Corresponding to Rectangle command used to draw a rectangle of any size in the current screen Corresponding to Rounded rectangle command used to draw a rounded rectangle in the current screen L Corresponding to Polygon command used to draw a polygon in the current screen eS Sector
385. trol E Clock amp File Protection HMI Protection Variable table Sereen 000 Screenl E Window Historical Data Log I Alarm Log Recipe Recipe 1 d Data Transport Coordinate Left Top Size Width g Height SamKoon Figure 6 7 Edited project Y Click Save to save the project Then select Off line Simulation in option Download in menu bar to pop up a screen as shown in figure 6 2 The introduction of off line simulation example ends 6 2 On line simulation of SK Workshop If you have no SK series HMI you can use on line simulation to realize communication through personal computer plc and other related devices When using this function the personal computer simulates the operation status of touch screen which can debug the correctness of your configuration software and carry out related test if touch screen has fault For configuration operation of on line simulation please refer to that of off line simulation Connection with plc is needed for on line simulation At the time of operating on line simulation please ensure that the cable connected with plc and computer can perform normal communication The service time of online simulation function is 30 minutes It will exit simulation automatically after 30 minutes of program running 296 R I Usually the cable used by plc for on line simulation is download line i e cable connected with plc progr
386. tting Download mode users can select USB or Ethernet downloading as required If the Ethernet is selected it has to set IP address and port number IP address and port number refers to that of HMI Clear historical alarm records whether to clear the historical HMI alarm information in downloading Bootstrap screen after downloading whether to restart the interface after downloading Clear historical data records whether to clear the historical HMI data information in downloading Recipe downloading whether to download the current project recipe into HMI gt Downloading picture option Save picture as original format if this option is selected the original format is remained in downloading Convert picture into JPG convert all pictures selected by users into JPG and download into HMI 311 Note as BMP format occupies larger it is recommended to use the option convert picture into JPG 4 The settings of storage position amp system alarm are shown as Figure 7 4 a HEI Parameter Setting fx System Alarm Use the system alarm Article alarm Text Colors Font Font Size Article alarm show Always show O Cycle show Article alarm appe Top O Bottom Figure 7 4 Setting page of storage position amp system alarm gt Storage position the position to save the historical data historical alarm and screenshot There a
387. ual of Yokogawa FA M3 series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Yokogawa FA M3 series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS422 416 4 5 short connection 220Q resistance in series 2 3 short connection 220Q resistance in series SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Yokogawa FA M3 series PLC terminal is SIO 2 Software setting v Select Yokogawa Electric Corp in the connection device service vV Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Yokogawa FA M3 series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range Communication port RS485 RS232 RS422 RS485 lt a Data bit length 7 8 Stop bit length HMI station number 0 255 Online simulation a S 3 Operable register and address range 0 71664 Bit output discontinuous defined by slot number 0 71024 Bit internal relay 417 7 ddddd 0 512 Word special register Note dindicates decimal and the input range is 0 9 e word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only i
388. uang Technology JiaChuang device JiaChuang special protocol serial port KDN Automation Direct connection Corporation K3 series KDN special protocol serial port KV 1000 700 KV L20 R Direct connection Keyence Corporation KV 10 16 24 40 KV P16 Keyence special protocol serial port Direct connection Koyo Electronics SN series Koyo special protocol serial port Direct connection Kstar Technology Kstar master slave device Kstar special protocol serial port Direct connection Letrun Technology LC series Letrun special protocol serial port 368 Direct connection LG Industrial Systems Master K series LG special protocol serial port Direct connection Matsushita FP series Matsushita special protocol serial port Melsec FX FX2N FX3U FX3G Direct connection Mitsubishi Melsec Q_ C2A4N series Mitsubishi special protocol serial port RTU ASCII master slave device Direct connection Modbus device RTU TCP IP master slave device Modbus protocol serial port Direct connection Modicon Corporation _ NEZA TWIDO M218 series Modbus protocol serial port Direct connection Nanda Auto Technology NA 200 NA 400 series Nanda Auto special protocol serial port Direct connection Omron C CPM series CS CJ series Omron special protocol serial port Direct connection Samkoon technology Customized protocol serial port Direct connection SEARI VP series SEARI special protocol serial port Direct connection Shimaden MR13 Shimaden special protocol
389. ub USS Root Hub USE Root Hub USS Root Hub 51 Figure 2 26 Driver name e So far the touch screen has been connected properly with the computer After connection of Samkoon SK series touch screen with a computer do install USB driver strictly following the above steps or you may fail in downloading the project configuration 2 7 Editing page and system composition of Sk Workshop 2 7 1 Editing page of SK Workshop SKWorkshop configuration software is the configuration visual development system of Samkoon SK series touch screens produced by Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd As an integrated development environment software it has abundant and powerful development functions Sk Workshop adopts the advantages of Windows system with high user interface consistency and simple interfaces The layout of the menus is close to those of Windows system making it easy to learn so that project designers can easily develop suitable configurations for their projects using SKWorkshop The development interface and the functional areas are shown in Figure 2 27 Es 4 ya shop C Documents and Settings Administrator MW IEST she Screenl File Edit E View Drar H Object Sereen F Setting DownLoad D Help H Language Selection a i TEN es ee Sc Pe Ce amp fF mH amp fF slosh mh s es it ki Iojef Ge ce gh HEE Ge A Setting A HMI Farameter Se EES HMI Status FLC Control a E Clock re Fil
390. ue set by you to the write address This value must be between the maximum value and minimum value Then when you touch the Word Button a keyboard will pop up on the touch screen and you can enter desired value See Figure 4 82 172 Foe 7 fee _ Clr Enter Figure 4 82 Increase When the Delay Parameter is 0 this function is the same as Add function If the Delay Parameter is not 0 after clicking this control the value of the write address will continuously add a constant after elapse of the time set in the Delay Parameter and write the value into the write register Decrease When the Delay Parameter is 0 this function is the same as Subtract function If the Delay Parameter is not 0 after clicking this control the value of the write address will continuously subtract a constant after elapse of the time set in the Delay Parameter and write the value into the write register Enter password The same function as Enter Numerical Value except that this function module does not have the option of decimal digits Add After you set the data type the write address the constant and the maximum value the value of the register corresponding to the write address will be added by the constant set each time the Word Button is touched However the value of the write address cannot exceed the maximum value set by you For example if the write address is LW1 the constant is 5 and the maximum value is 65535 then each tim
391. ufacturers the color is more vivid Besides Sk Workshop provides a larger picture library helping designers to design their configurations more conveniently and quickly After configuration is downloaded to the touch screen it has the same appearance as on PC screen without distortion of color and font Meanwhile SK Workshop has very simple operation interface and the menu layout is similar to that of Windows It absorbs and integrates the advantages of many major visual configuration software and touch screen configuration software helping users to configure high performance and high quality project documents 2 Complete functions SkWorkshop has complete functions including basic shape drawing coloring text preparation system picture library animated display bitmap status change trend picture display alarm control and the like In updating of SK Workshop4 0 0 powerful functions such as dynamic circle dynamic rectangle meter historical data collection address searching off line simulation data transfer macro and multi function button are added Designers can easily design schemes and configuration basing on their own requirements and characteristics of projects and can achieve satisfactory effects 3 Communication SK Workshop provides drives for communication with PLCs projects of all major manufacturers in the world such as Siemens Mitsubishi Omron Fuji Panasonic Schneider and Emerson Meanwhile the Company can also
392. ults into the specified type of type specifier by force Take an example of float a convert a to float int x y convert the result of x y into integer In forced conversion there are some points to be noted 1 Type specifier and expression must be included in the bracket the single variable may not be bracketed If int x y is written to be int x y it means to convert x into int and plus y 2 Either forced conversion or auto conversion is just the temporary conversion of data length for convenience of the operation It will not change the variable type in the data declaration 247 5 1 3 Basic operator and expression Category priority and associativity of operator There are many operators and expressions in C language which is seldom in the high level language It is the rich operator and expression that complete the C language This is one of main features of C language The operators of C language have different priorities In addition they have individual associativity In the expression the data for operation should not only conform to the priority of operators but also subjected to the associativity so as to confirm the operation direction from left to right or from right to left This associativity is unavailable for other high level language which increases the complexity of C language Operator Category The operators of C language can be classified as following 1 Arithmetic operator It is used for di
393. upies 2 bytes in the memory Its value is always basic integer Short int Its type specifier is short int or short C110F1 The occupied bytes and value range is same to basic int Long int 242 Its type specifier is long int or long which occupies 4 bytes in the memory Its value is always long integer 4 Unsigned int Its type specifier is unsigned The unsigned int can be integrated with the above three types 1 The type specifier of unsigned int is unsigned int or unsigned 2 The type specifier of unsigned short int is unsigned short 3 The type specifier of unsigned long int is unsigned long All unsigned int occupies the same memory bytes with the signed int As the sign bit is omitted it can not indicate the negative number The following table lists the assigned memory bytes and number range of various integers in ARM Type Specifier Number Range Assigned Bytes Int 2147483648 2 147483647 EEEE Short int 2147483648 2 147483647 TTT Signed int 2147483648 2 147483647 EEEN Unsigned int 0 4294967295 EENE Long int 922337203685477808 922337203685477807 TTT TTT Unsigned long 0 18446744073709551615 TTT TTT 4 Integer variable declaration The general form of variable declaration type specifier variable name identifier Take examples as following int a b c a b c is integer variable long x y x y is long integer variable unsigned p q p q is unsigned integer variable Announcements in writing variables shou
394. ure 6 3 291 as New Project Project Properties Project Ha test Fath Model oR OTOAS SR OSSAE Show Model SR O40KE FoR O4ShE SR O4ASAS Model Paramet SK 043BF SR O4ASES Model Siz T cF OSOAS 5 sE 0S AE SE 0STAS Color E SE OSTAE Resolutia User Memo Fower Sup DC24 15 COM1 R5232 R422 RS485 CoM RS232 RS422 R5465 USE 2 Ports B type A Type Ethernet Figure 6 3 Dialing box of new project Enter project name in column Project Name select one saving position for the project in column Position select SK 043AS in column Model Selection The 4 3 inch HMI is just taken for example Users can select other models as required select Horizontal in column Display Mode Users can select vertical display as required After finishing the setting information just set by users will display in the below module Model Parameter Users can click Next after confirmation to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 6 4 292 a Hew Link Link ID E Link Name Link 1 Connecting COM1 v Device Ser Modbus Modbus ETU Master v Advantech Distributed I O Al ALEUS Protocol FPLC Continua Allen Bradley Altec Electronics Delta Corporation Emerson Hetwork Power Fatek Automation Corp Fuji Electric Corp GE Corporation Haiwell Technology corp Hitachi Industrial Hollysys Group IDEC Corporation dese Technology Corp JiaChuang Technology
395. ure 5 11 Variable Setting Step 4 lt Compile source file gt After the above steps the next is compilation Click compile button as following Figure 5 12 and complete save compile connection and error check functions automatically Figure 5 12 Information Output Window When the information output window outputs 0 errors Compile success it indicates the macro has established successfully In addition it will be added into the successful compiled list box automatically Otherwise it will prompt the 212 error and add into failed compiled list box Then users may make modification edition even compilation for the compiled program Step 5 lt Create macro ADDSUM gt Create macro ADDSUM as specified from step 2 step 4 as shown in Figure 5 13 create macro ADDSUM lt 1 gt input ADDSUM in the macro name lt 2 gt input the circled contents in the code compilation window lt 3 gt set the corresponding tag property in the tag setting window lt 4 gt click compile button 273 Hacro Editor Macro Hame Marcoz SumLWU LWO LW LU3 Specification of variables mection T LC Stat internal internal storage l storage l local this machine is a compiler errr es successfully Figure 5 13 Create Macro ADDSUM Step 6 lt compile control gt lt 1 gt Put the corresponding control in the project menu and adjust the size as Figure 5 14 274 Numerical e
396. used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of LG Master K series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of LG Master K series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate LG Master K series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of LG Master K series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with LG Master K series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 use CNet protocol SK series touch screen Key COM1 COM2 Master K SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector LG Master K series PLC terminal is DB9M 392 RS232 use KLoader protocol SK series touch screen LG COM1 COM2 Master K SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector LG Master K series PLC terminal is DB9M RS485 SK series touch screen LG COM1 COM2 Master K SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector LG Master K series PLC terminal is two wire connector RS232 K10S1 SK series touch screen LG COM1 COM2 Master K SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector LG Master K series PLC terminal is MD6M 2 Software setting vV Select LG Industrial Systems in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please
397. uttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw lines in the screen by clicking the mouse gt After completing the above steps the line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the line and double click or click Properties button l in the tool bar after choosing the line At this moment a property dialog as shown in Figure 4 24 will appear 103 Line Line Type fine Wedeh lt Ee ee Color O Shape Endarrow End ap chamfer ing Figure 4 24 Line property dialog gt You may adjust the properties of the line using the pull down and fine tuning button Sk Workshop provides 6 line types 30 line widths and 6 line end arrows for straight line To change the length direction and position of the line you may first choose the line move the mouse to an end of the line press down left key of the mouse after the mouse shape becomes drag the mouse to appropriate position and finally release the left key 4 3 2 Polygonal line of SK Workshop Choose Polyline command in Draw menu or click Polyline command button L in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw polygonal lines in t
398. vice service vV Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Siemens S7 200 300 series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen PLC S7 200 PPI S7 200 PP1 7 300 MPI RS485 RS232 RS422 RS485 19200 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 ODD EVEN ODD NONE Support functions Offline simulation Yes Online simulation Yes Extension mode Yes S7 200 PPI No S7 300 MPI 3 Operable register and address range Siemens S7 200 dd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit input image register read only dd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit output image register dd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit bit memory dd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit sequence control relay ddd o 0 0 4095 7 Bit special bit memory SM0 0 SM29 7 read only ddd 0 255 Bit timer status read only ddd 0 255 Bit counter status read only VB Bit ddddd o 0 0 10239 7 Bit bit of variable storage dd 0 4095 Word input image register read only 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses dd 0 4095 Word output image register 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses lt S 0 4095 Word bit memory 8 bit register each word occupies two addresses M OQ Sn 0 4095 Word sequence control relay 8 bit register each
399. w If there is an error in the screen configuration the compiling cannot be completed See Figure 3 9 X error Screenl Word Button rite AddressIntput error oF Figure 3 9 Prompt of compiling error You can modify the configuration screen basing on the error prompt in the information output window or double click the error to allow the software to find the error automatically Then you can double click the wrong object to view its property setting find the source of the error and make corresponding modification After modification click Save button and execute Compile command again If there is no error in the configuration after executing the Compile command a dialog will appear to show successful compiling Click OK to complete the compiling process See Figure 3 10 and 3 11 Hot a macro instruction in engineering can be compiled mi Not a macro instruction in engineering can be compiled Compiles successfully 86 Figure 3 10 Information output window Compiling is a necessary process before downloading Do save the configuration before compiling or the compiling process cannot be started See Figure 3 11 If you change the screen configuration after compiling you need to compile it again Point out cave the current project before compiling whether to save Figure 3 11 Compiling reminder Finally choose USB download command in the Download menu Alternatively you can also directly choose Compile Downloa
400. with the serial port of Matsushita FP series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate Matsushita FP series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of Matsushita FP series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with Matsushita FP series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 FP0 FP2 FP2SH FPM TX 394 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Matsushita FP series PLC terminal is MD5M RS422 FP1 SK series touch screen Matsushita FP COM 1 COM2 series 3 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector Matsushita FP series PLC terminal is MD8M 2 Software setting VY Select MATSUSHITA in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of PLC v Please refer to relative technical documents of Matsushita FP series PLC for device setting Default connection parameters of SK series touch screen Setting Item Default Parameters Setting Range RS232 RS422 RS485 Communication port Baud rate Data bit length Parity check bit Stop bit length PLC station number HMI station number Support functions Offline simulation Online simulation Extension mode a m 3 Operable register and address range 395 ddddh 0 9999f Bi
401. words in the remark indicates the data type of register in configuration must be 32 bit e Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only e Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in e Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 24 TaiLing device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of TaiLing DX series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of TaiLing DX series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate TaiLing DX series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of TaiLing DX series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with TaiLing DX series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 SK series touch screen TaiLing DX COM1 COM2 series 9 E 5 sel LJ I O o O SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector TaiLing DX series PLC terminal is DB9M 2 Software setting Y Select TaiLing Electric in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that of
402. x 3 2 y 3f z 0 75 char chl K ch2 P Note no continuous assignment is forbidden in the declaration for instance a b c S is illegal Type conversion of variable The variable type is convertible There are two methods for conversion One is automatic conversion the other is forced conversion Automatic conversion When the different types of data are involved in hybrid operation the automatic conversion is completed by compilation system The auto conversion should conform to the following rules 1 Ifthe data types involved in operation are different first convert them into one type then make operation 2 Conversion is made as the data length so as to ensure the high precision For example when int and long is in operation convert int into long then make operation 3 All float operations are double Even the expression contains float only it must be converted to double for operation 4 Char and short must be converted into int for operation 5 In the assignment operation when the data types on both sides of assignment sign are different the right data type will be converted to the left type If the right data is longer than left one it will loss a part of data In this case the precision will be reduces The lost data will be rounded off Forced type conversion The forced type conversion is achieved by type conversion operation Its general form is type specifier expression It is used to convert the operation res
403. xadecimal and the input range is 0 9 a f O indicates octal and the input range is 0 7 Bit in the remark indicates the register can be used as bit only word in the remark indicates the register can be used as word only Read only in the remark indicates the register can be read only rather than write in Different device models may support different register names and the range may be different Detailed names and range refer to the relative technical documents for connected device 10 7 GE device driver This device driver is used by SK Workshop series touch screen to read and write the data or status of GE Fanuc series PLC register It establishes serial port communication with the serial port of GE Fanuc series PLC through the serial port of touch screen so as to operate GE Fanuc series PLC Please read carefully this Chapter and relative technical manual of GE Fanuc series PLC before using the driver How to establish connection with GE Fanuc series PLC 1 Hardware connection Connection cable RS232 380 0000 O 00000 SK series touch screen uses DB9F connector GE Fanuc series PLC terminal is RJ45 2 Software setting Y Select GE Corporation in the connection device service v Select the corresponding item in the connection device service according to the PLC model or supporting protocol v Make sure the communication parameters and PLC station number of touch screen is consistent with that
404. y 0 255 units The shortcut key is Ctrl D Paste Used to copy the object in the paste buffer area to the current screen The shortcut key is Ctrl V Delete Used to delete a chosen object The shortcut key is Ctrl Del 54 View Draw H Object Cut IT Ctrlti Copy E CtrltC Faste IE CtritY A Delete D Tel Select AL A Ctrlta Align Layer j Assemble Mirror j Loom b a h Fan View ti Grad The Forward Screen a The Backward Screen P Upen Property Setting ith Find Address PA Address Table Reverse Select a Macro search Macro Manager Figure 2 30 Edit menu Select All Used to select all the objects in the current screen of the current project The shortcut key is Ctrl A Align Used to align two or more objects chosen The align manners include top alignment bottom alignment vertical centering left alignment right alignment and horizontal centering Layer Used to place the object chosen to different screen layer The selectable layers include top layer one upper layer bottom layer and one lower layer Rotary Used to rotate the chosen object The rotary manners include free rotation horizontal rotation and vertical rotation Assemble Used to assemble two or more objects chosen to a control or to disassemble an assembled object to the original objects When using Assemble key do not assemble objects to be touched or it cannot be touched after downloading to the
405. y clicking the shape See Figure 4 74 162 LoadShape shapes shapet shapel shapell shapel2 shapels shapel4 shapelS shapelG shapelT shapel shapeld shapeZ Figure 4 74 Shape pop up dialog Border Color If you have chosen a shape with border you can click this button and then choose a desired color in the drop down color selection system FG Color If you want to change the foreground color you can click this button and then choose a desired color in the drop down color selection system foreground color is effective only when transition pattern is chosen Then there will be a contrast transition between the foreground color and the background color to make the control more beautiful BG Color If you want to change the background color you can click this button and then choose a desired color in the drop down color selection system Pattern Click this drop down box and then you can select any of the 21 patterns to beautify the control See Figure 4 75 for an example 163 Bit Button _ Genaral Label Advanced Visibility Border Color Bis Color Fattern Function a set OF Write kidee o S style OR a aC oS RE style Moni tor 3 style style style style Horizontal mE TM Vertical Use Macro Figure 4 75 Change shape and pattern value SetON _ If this option is checked after downloading to HMI you can set the value of the writ

1 Preface Thanks very much for purchasing the SK

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents